Home

HP 8712C and HP 8714C RF Network Analyzers User's Guide

1. Spi ULL 1 Transmission Log Mag 10 0 dB Ref 0 00 dB dB 30 20 10 10 20 30 Abs M eer 1 Start 0 300 MHz Stop 3 000 000 MHz be Reflection Log Mag 10 0 dB Ref 0 00 dB Tz dB 30 20 10 BEEN EON 2 10 20 30 Abs Start 0 300 MHz Stop 3 000 000 MHz Figure 4 20 Split Display 4 54 Using Instrument Functions Customizing the Display Enabling Disabling Display Features Figure 4 2 shows a display screen with graticule lines the measurement grid and two limit lines In the default or preset state these lines are turned on Transmission Log Mag 10 0 dB Ref 24 56 dB ba Off pmi Lue ne 5 Era SEXE ET FEE ie EIE ESTEE Eau an a LIS 6 ee A Fa Se a 0 DATERAR E Start 0 300 MHz Stoo 360 264 MHZ Figure 4 21 Display Features 1 To turn on off the graticule press More Display Graticule ON off This softkey toggles the display graticule on and off 4 55 Using Instrument Functions Customizing the Display line or point on and off Turning limit lines or points off does not turn limit testing off NOTE You cannot turn off the delta amplitude or delta frequency limit indicators 4 56 Using Instrument Functions Customizing the Display Mo
2. LINE VOLTAGE VOLTAGESELECTOR DETECTORS SWITCH pp63c Figure 1 4 Analyzer Rear Panel line Module and Selected Connectors Refer to Figure 1 4 e The HP IB port is for use with computers and peripherals printers plotters etc e The parallel and RS 232 serial ports are also for peripherals With Option 1C2 the parallel and serial ports can also be programmed via IBASIC for 1 11 Installing the Analyzer Step 4 Configure the Analyzer general I O control See the JBASIC User s Handbook for information on using IBASIC The VIDEO OUT COLOR VGA port allows you to connect a color VGA monitor for enhanced viewing See Using an External VGA Monitor in Chapter 4 for more information The LAN ETHERTWIST connector is for connecting your analyzer to a LAN local area network for control and access You must have Option 1F7 to utilize this port See the Option U ser s Guide Supplement for information on how to use your analyzer in a LAN 1 12 HP IB Connections Installing the Analyzer Step 4 Configure the Analyzer An HP IB system may be connected in any configuration as long as the following rules are observed e The total number of devices is less than or equal to 15 e The total length of all the cables used is less than or equal to 2 meters times the number of devices connected together up to an absolute maximum of 20 meters For example the maximum cable length is 4
3. IC Ic ic ic Ica DEVICE UNDER TEST LOAD po660b Figure 3 8 Equipment Setup For a Reflection Measurement of a Two Port Device NETWORK ANALYZER DEVICE UNDER TEST po659b Figure 3 8 Equipment Setup For a Reflection Measurement of e One Port Device Making Measurements Measuring Reflection Response View and Interpret the Reflection Measurement Results 1 To view the entire measurement trace on the display press 2 To interpret the reflection measurement refer to Figure 3 10 or your analyzer s display if you are making this measurement on your instrument a The values shown on the horizontal axis are the frequencies in MHz 3 28 The values shown on the vertical axis are the power ratios in decibels dB of the reflected signal divided by the incident power To display the result in logarithmic magnitude format designated by Log Mag at the top of the measurement screen the analyzer computes the measurement trace using the following formula Reflection dB 10 log st ane where the power of the signal reflected from the device and where the incident power A level of 0 dB indicates that all of the power applied to the DUT is reflected back and that none of it passes through the DUT or is absorbed by the DUT Values less than 0 dB indicate that power is either absorbed or transmitted by the DUT Althou
4. 0000 0000 FILTER 47 Figure 2 2 Connect the Filter to the Analyzer 2 5 Getting Started Entering Measurement Parameters Presetting the Analyzer Press the key When the analyzer is preset with the key it reverts to a known operating condition When this key is pressed the following major default conditions apply Frequency range Frequency range Power level Measurement Channel 1 measur ement Measurement Channel 2 measur ement Format Number of points Sweep time Scale Reference System Bandwidth 1 HP 8712C only 2 HP 8714C only 0 3 to 1300 MHz 0 3 to 3000 MHz 0 dBm Transmission off log Magnitude 201 Auto 10 dB div 0 dB Medium Wide 3 Preset power level can be set to other then O dBm if desired See Entering Source Power Level later in this chapter for more information NOTE The measurement parameters that you enter will be retained in the analyzer s memory when the power is turned off and will be restored when the power is turned back on See Also Refer to Chapter 12 Preset State and Memory Allocation for a comprehensive table of preset conditions 2 6 Getting Started Entering Measurement Parameters Entering Frequency Press the key to access the frequency softkey menu Range 2 Ib change the low end of the frequency range to 10 MHz press St 3 Ib change the high end of the frequency range to 90
5. Start 0 300 MHz Stop 3 000 000 MHz Figure 2 4 Both Measurement Channels Active 2 11 Getting Started Entering Measurement Parameters Viewing Measurement 1 Ib view only the measurement channel 2 reflection measurement press Channels Meas OFF 2 Ib view both measurement channels again press MEAS 1 3 To view both measurement channels separately on a split screen press More Display Split Disp FULL 1 Transmission Log Mag 10 0 dB Ref 0 00 dB dB 30 20 10 10 20 30 1 Start 0 300 MHz stop 3 000 000 MHz be Reflection Log Mag 10 0 dB Ref 0 00 dB 30 20 10 20 30 Start 0 300 MHz stop 3 000 000 MHZ Figure 2 5 Split Display You have now learned how to enter common measurement parameters and how to manipulate the display for optimum viewing of your measurement You can now proceed on to performing the operator s check or refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on making specific types of measurements 2 12 Performing the Operator s Check The operator s check should be performed when you receive your instrument and any tune you wish to have confidence that the analyzer is working properly The operator s check does not verify performance to speciiications but should give you a high degree of confidence that the instrument is performing properly if it passes The operator s check consists of
6. Equipment Setup for Transmission Measurement Verify Transmission Measurement Verify Reflection Measurement Connect the Load DUT Response to an RF Signal Simplified Block Block Diagram a aa Equipment Setup For Transmission Response Measurement Example of a Transmission Measurement Display Equipment Setup For a Reflection Response Calibration Equipment Setup For a Reflection Measurement of a Two Port Device c0 is ade se Equipment Setup For a Reflection Measurement of a One Port Device du ie e So est n pe oS Example of a Reflection Measurement Display Equipment Setup For a Power Measurement Example of a Power Measurement Filtering Out the Unwanted Mixing Product Equipment Setup For a Conversion Loss Measurement Example of a Conversion Loss Measurement Equipment Setup For an AM Delay Response Calibration Equipment Setup For an AM Delay Measurement Example of an AM Delay Measurement Equipment Setup For a Group Delay Measurement 1 d ro d 1 1 1 mM pk OS 1 Nr Contents 10 T 1 11 1 13 1 18 2 2
7. e Serial Devices press Select controls to highlight your type of printer or plotter and press Select If the baud rate or handshake at the top of the screen are incorrect use the softkeys to change them Copy Port use the entry controls to highlight your type of printer or plotter and press Select e LAN Printer Option 1F7 only press HARDCOPY Select Copy Port use the entry controls to highlight HP LaserJet PCL5 6 PCL5 LAN and press eiect If the printer IP address at the top of the screen 15 incorrect press LAN Prin IP Addr to enter the correct IP address Port is selected the first two lines in the box that appears at the top Show the current settings for your convenience NOTE Use PCLS printer for fastest hardcopies See Configure the Hardcopy Port in Chapter 4 for more information 1 16 CAUTION CAUTION Installing the Analyzer Step 4 Configure the Analyzer Installing the Analyzer In a Rack Use only the recommended rack mount kit Option 1CM when ordered with the analyzer or HP part number 08712 60036 when ordered separately with this instrument it needs side support rails Do not attempt to mount it by the front panel handles only This rack mount kit allows you to mount the analyzer with or without handles Ib install the network analyzer in an HP 85043D rack follow the instructions in the rack manual Ib install the network analyzer in other racks
8. information on the disk will be erased during the formatting process 1 Make sure the disk is not write protected by ensuring the write protect tab is in the proper position 2 Insert the disk into the analyzer s disk drive 4 It will take approximately 2 5 minutes for the disk to be formatted 4 77 Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters The analyzer is capable of plotting or printing displayed measurement results directly without the use of an external computer to a compatible peripheral The analyzer supports HP IB serial parallel and LAN Option 1F7 only peripherals Hardcopy output can also be saved to a file in either HP GL or PCX format With Option 1F7 LAN capability you can also capture hardcopy output in either HP GL or PCX format NOTE Hardcopy device selection and configuration parameters are retained when the analyzer is turned off or is preset These plotters are compatible These printers are compatible Using Instrument Functions Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters Select a Compatible Printer or Plotter Most Hewlett Packard desktop printers and plotters are compatible with the analyzer Some common compatible peripherals are listed here some are no longer available for purchase but are listed here for your reference HP 7440A ColorPro Eight Pen Color Graphics Plotter HP 7470A Two Pen Graphics Plotter HP 7475A Six Pen Graphics Plotter HP 7550A B High Sp
9. 4 98 Front Panel Control Using a Keyboard 4 99 Using an External VGA Monitor 2 4 101 Customizing Color on an External Monitor 2 4102 Synchronizing and Positioning the Display 4 104 5 Optimizing M easurements Increasing Sweep Speed To Increase the Start Frequency To Set the Sweep Time to AUTO Mode To Widen the System Bandwidth To Reduce the Amount of Averaging To Reduce the Number of Measurement Points To View a Single Measurement Channel To Turn Off Alternate Sweep To Turn Off Markers and Marker Tracking To Turn Off Spur Avoidance To Avoid Frequency Bandcrossings by Minimizing the Span HP 8714C only Increasing Network Analyzer Dynamic Range To Increase the Receiver Input Power To Reduce the Receiver Noise Floor Reducing Trace Noise To Activate Averaging for Reducing Trace Noise To Change System Bandwidth for Reducing Trace Noise To Eliminate Receiver Spurious Responses Reducing Mismatch Errors Reducing Mismatch Errors in a Reflection Measurement Reducing Mismatch Errors in a Transmission CA CA CA CA CA CA CA CA 1 1 1 O tA 4 VW WD CA CA CA CA a 4 oq O2 CO CO Measurement 5 18 Reducing Mismatch Errors When Measuring Both Reflection and Transmission 5 18 Compensating for Phase Shift in Measurement Setups io Port EXtemsions u
10. Command or by using high speed built in subprograms Since IBASIC shares CPU time with the analyzer it may cause some degradation in measurement throughput if your program performs intensive computations However for most applications it provides excellent performance and convenience Refer to the HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook for more information An external controller can be used to control the analyzer It can be a personal computer PC or an HP BASIC computer The external controller sends standard SCPI commands to address 716 default OUTPUT 716 Command to control the analyzer Refer to the Programmer s Guide for more information You can use one controller to control several analyzers see and Large Systems earlier in this chapter However if a large number of SCPI commands are required per measurement throughput may be degraded Typical limits are 3 to 10 analyzers per computer An external computer can control sending SCPI commands via LAN using a telnet connection Refer to the Option 1F7 User s Guide Supplement for more information You can use one computer to control several analyzers Performance will typically be limited by the computer s speed which in turn will limit the number of analyzers per computer Operation of an Analyzer Running IBASIC Under Computer Control Automating Measurements Configuring Your Test System Commands can be sent from an external computer
11. Softkey Reference M Softkey in marker search more menu Designed for use when measuring multi pole filters Automatically searches the measurement trace from left to right and positions up to 8 markers on consecutive maximum points See Ib Use Marker Search Functions in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in switching test set menu When ON configures the analyzer for use pp With an 87075C multiport test set Refer to theHP 87075 User s and Service Guide for more information tem ching Test Set Access Keys svsrEM OPTIONS ig Swi Naxxow 250 Hz Next Min Left Softkey Reference N Softkey in the system bandwidth menu The default system bandwidth is medium wide See Chapter 5 Optimizing Measurements for information on how system bandwidth can affect your measurements Softkey in the detection options menu Selects tuned receiver type measurements of inputs A B or R or the ratios A R or B R See Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer in Chapter 3 for more information stion 0 Softkey in the mm search menu Moves the active marker to the next nearest minimum point to the left See Ib Use Marker Search Functions in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys MARKER Marker Search Min Search n Softkey in the min search menu Moves the active marker to the next nearest minimum point to the right See 6 Use Marker Search Functions in
12. T Softkey in HP IB menu HP IB mode normally used for remote computer control of the network analyzer The computer can designate the network analyzer as talker or listener The network analyzer cannot talk directly with other peripherals in this mode unless the computer establishes a data path for 1t Softkey in marker search menu Displays menu to set target search value search left or search right See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Marker Search Softkey in target search menu Sets value of target sought by Search Left Value or Search Right Default value is 3 dB NOTE Since markers are continuous but frequency points are discrete target values may be interpolated See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Marker 9 81 BY Reference Softkey in service menu Displays menu to perform tests including self tests and adjustments See the Service Guide for information on tests and adjustments Softkey in title and clock menu Used to show the title if any and date time on the display and or on a hardcopy output Access Keys DisPLAY itle and Clock or fine py Define Graph Softkey in more display menu Displays menu to display and edit screen title and display clock Access Keys More Display Softkey in more printer menu Sets top margin of printout non printing space in mm Minimum
13. Define save Instrument state On Cal Off Data Off HARDCOPY See Peripheral State SYSTEM OPTIONS Beeper volume IBASIC display 1 Analyzers with Option 1C2 only Preset State and Memory Allocation Peripheral State When you preset the analyzer with the hardkey or the SCPI command 5 or cycle power the settings below are saved in non volatile memory and thus are not affected The analyzer is shipped from the factory with the settings in the following table These settings will remain as shown until changed Key Settings User BEGIN menu Off MENU Key Settings Distance Units Feet 1 Analyzers with Option 100 only DISPLAY Key Settings Color options for external monitor Factory default Key Settings Velocity factor 1 0 speed of light 1 Option 100 only For analyzer s without Option 100 sea Preset State 12 8 Save ASCII format Select Disk Volatile RAM disk percent IBASIC file Fast recal 10ption 1C2 only Preset State and Memory Allocation SAVE RECALL Key Settings tutus 123 Format Non Vol RAM disk 20 ASCII Off 12 9 Preset State and Memory Allocation SYSTEMOPTIONS Key Settings yzer HP IB Address 16 em Controller Talker Listener Talker listener er Mater HP IB Address 13 em Controller Address 21 TIL Config Softkey Auto Step Clock For mat YYYY MM DO HH MM SS Numeric Alpha Numer ic Seconds On HP
14. Line Module The line module contains e the power cable receptacle e the line fuse and an extra fuse e the voltage selector switch Power Cables The line power cable is supplied in one of several configurations depending on the destination of the original shipment Each instrument is equipped with a three wire power cable When connected to an appropriate ac power receptacle this cable grounds the instrument chassis The type of power cable shipped with each instrument depends on the country of destination See Figure 8 11 Power Cable and Line Mains Plug Part Numbers for the part numbers of these power cables Cables are available in different lengths Check with your nearest Hewlett Packard service center for descriptions and part numbers of cables other than those described in Figure 8 11 This is a Safety Class I product provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited 8 21 Front Rear Panel line Module CABLE PLUG CABLE CABLE FOR USE PLUG TYPE HP PART DESCRIPTION LENGTH COLOR IN COUNTRY NUMBER CM INCHES 260v 8120 1351 Straight BS1363A 229 90 Mint GroylGreat Britain 8120 1703 90 229 90 Mint Gray Cyp
15. M DETECTORS po617b Figure 3 16 Equipment Setup For an AM Delay Response Calibration Standard Making Measurements Measuring AM Delay Option 10 or 1DB Connect the DUT NETWORK laa ox on ANALYZER X INPUT Y INPUT SPLITTER po618b Figure 3 17 Equipment Setup For an AM Delay Measurement Making Measurements Measuring AM Delay Option 1DA or 1DB View and Interpret the AM Delay Results This example is an AM delay measurement of a frequency converter 1 To view the measurement trace press cale 2 Ib interpret the AM delay measurement refer to Figure 3 18 a Note that the vertical axis is displaying time rather than power as in previous example measurements The AM delay measurement measures the time required for power to travel through the DUT at various frequencies The measurement trace will be noisier as the power level is attenuated by the DUT b Since delay is proportional to the derivative of phase flat constant delay indicates linear phase Delay measurements are typically performed to measure the deviation from linear phase Deviation from linear phase flat delay would indicate that the DUT is distorting the signal 3 46 Making Measurements Measuring AM Delay Option 1DA or 1 DB 1 AM Delay 55 6 kHz 20 ns Ref 1 46 wus C P2 off 435 MHz 1 38 Abs
16. See Figure 4 10 and Figure 4 1 1 for examples of a multi peak and a multi notch search respectively Chl Using instrument Functions Using Markers P1 Ref lection Log Mag 2 0 dB Ref 500 dB C be off Start 10 000 MHz Figure 4 10 Multi Peak Search Mode Stop 500 000 MHz 4 19 Using Instrument functions Using Markers 1 Ref lection Log Mag b2 off 5 0 dB Ref 100 dB C Cnt 1 51 650 MHZ 17 66 dB inr Start 10 000 MHz Figure 4 11 Multi Notch Search Mode d MHz To Use Marker Statistics Using Instrument Functions Using Markers To Use Marker Math Functions The three marker math functions statistics flatness and RF filter stats perform certain mathematical calculations on the amplitude data of user defined trace segments For measurement channel 1 the trace segment is defined with markers 1 and 2 for measurement channel 2 the trace segment is defined with markers 3 and 4 The marker math parameters are updated after each sweep as well as any time a marker is moved Regular marker tracking is not available with the marker math functions NOTE You cannot have marker math functions active at the same time as marker search functions The marker statistics function measures a user dehned segment of the measurement trace and calculates the following e frequency span mean amplitude e standard de
17. Source Specifications Frequency 300 kHz to 1300 MHz 300 kHz to 3000 MHz 1 Hz 5 ppm at 0 to 55 5 ppm at 25 5 C lt 1 Hz at 10 change in he voltage 10 4 Specifications and Characteristics Instrument Specifications and Characteristics Output Power Resolution Level Accuracy 10 dB 155 dB Option 20 dB Option 1E1 3 3 0 dB Options 1EC a n d 1E1123 1 All power characteristics for 8714C analyzers with Option TEC 175 ohm ports are typical above 2000 MHz 2 75 ohm test ports 3 Attenuator option Maximum Specified Test Port Power Frequency HP 87126 Std HP 8714C Std 1000 M Hz 10 dBm 2 1000 M Hz 10 dBm 1This value will change depending upon the options installed in your analyzer See Determining Test Port Power to determine the maximum test port power output for your particular instrument Minimum Specified Test Port Power sd HP 8712C Std HP 8714C Std Standard 0 dBm 5 dBm Option 1 1 6 0 dBm 6 0 dBm Attenuator 1 This value will change depending upon the options installed in your analyzer See Determining Test Port Power to determine the minimum test port power output for your particular instrument 10 5 Determining Test Port Power Specifications and Characteristics Instrument Specifications and Characteristics The maximum and minimum test port power output of your analyzer depends upon the options that are in
18. ency 174 MHz 3 Press Limit E ter 4 37 Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing To Use Marker Limit Functions The following marker limit test types are available in the marker limit table e Statistic Mean e Statistic p p e Flatness e Delta Ampl e Delta Freq The Erst three items above are parameters of special marker functions You can use pass fail limit testing on three parameters of the marker math functions statistical mean peak to peak ripple and flatness See To Use Marker Statistics and Ib Use Marker Flatness earlier in this chapter for more information on these types of searches You can also use specific markers to limit test delta amplitude and delta frequency All of these special marker limit functions can be used in conjunction with regular limit line testing Statistical Mean 1 Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing This limit test requires that you first define a segment on the measurement trace using markers 1 and 2 or markers 3 and 4 for measurement channel Then press MARKER Mari Statistics earlier in this chapter for more information on using marker statistics Press DISPLAY Limit Menu Mkr Limits Use the front panel knob or the 1 II keys to select Statistic Mean in the marker limit test table Turn this limit function on by pressing the Mkr Limit OFF key Note that the entry in the on off column of the table dh t
19. All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws 1400 Fountaingrove Parkway Santa Rosa CA 95403 1799 USA 8712 and 8714C RF Network Analyzers The HP 8712 and HP 8714 are easy to use RF network analyzers optimized for production measurements of reflection and transmission parameters The instrument integrates RF synthesized source transmission reflection test set multi mode receivers and display in one compact box The source features 1 Hz resolution 50 ms or faster sweep time and up to 16 dBm output power The three channel dual mode receivers provide dynamic range of greater than 100 dB in narrowband measurement mode For measurements of frequency translating devices the network analyzer features broadband internal and external detector inputs The receivers incorporate digital signal processing and microprocessor control to speed operation and measurement throughput Two independent measurement channels and a large CRT display the measured results of one or two receiver channels in several user selectable formats An external VGA monitor can be connected to the rear panel for enhanced measurement viewing in color Measurement functions are selected with front panel hardkeys and softkey menus Measurements can be printed or plotted directly with a compatible peripheral Instrument states can be saved t
20. ible 9 34 HP 87126 Address 9 35 87146 9 35 HP BASIC programming language 7 15 HP IB addresses 1 15 HP IB 9 35 HP IB address plotter 1 15 printer 1 15 HP IB cable length 1 13 HP IB cables 4 80 HP IB connector 8 7 10 18 HP IB Echo om BFF 9 35 HP IB extender instruments 8 8 HP IB interconnections 1 13 8 8 HP IB interface capabilities 8 8 HP IB port 1 11 HP IB restrictions 8 8 HP VEE programming language 7 16 Hue 9 35 humidity conditions 10 19 Hz 9 36 IBASIC 7 4 programming language 7 15 IBASIC 9 37 IBASIC and automation 7 7 IBASIC Display 9 37 icon fail 4 46 i ginary 9 37 impedance magnitude 3 62 In agnitude 9 37 impedance matching errors how to reduce 5 17 impedance system 3 10 incident signal 3 3 increase receiver input power 5 10 increase start frequency 5 3 increasing dynamic range 5 10 increasing sweep speed 5 3 Index 14 indicator averaging 5 12 Information saved 4 65 initializing a disk 4 77 input auxiliary 3 48 8 5 10 17 external reference 8 5 10 17 external trigger 8 5 10 17 Ensert Char 9 37 Insertion loss 3 22 Insert Line 9 38 installation 1 2 rack 1 17 Installation category 1 5 Install CC From Disk 9 38 installing the analyzer 1 2 11 5 instruction manual symbol defined 11 5 instrument description iii instrument markings and symbols 11 5 Instrument preset state parameters 12 2
21. 2 5 2 9 2 11 2 12 2 15 2 16 2 17 2 18 3 3 3 5 3 7 3 12 3 21 3 23 3 26 3 27 Contents 3 20 Example of a Phase Derived Delay Measurement Display 3 2 Equipment Setup For a Reflection Measurement of a Two Port Device Sion E Ino wt a or ena 3 22 Equipment Setup For a Reflection Measurement of a One Port nuc CMT CET 3 23 Interpreting the Smith Chart 3 24 Determining the Magnitude and Phase of the Reflection Coefficient e a drea car s do dex e ao Aa Me Pob to ee te 3 25 Example of an Impedance Measurement 3 26 Impedance Calculation for Reflection Measurements 3 27 Impedance Calculation for Transmission Measurements 4 1 The MARKER Key 00 00 0222 4 2 Connect the Filter to the Analyzer 4 3 Markers at Minimum and Maximum Values 4 4 Peak and Minimum Search Criteria 4 5 Peak and Minimum Search Criteria at Display Endpoints 4 6 6 dB Bandwidth Marker Search 4 7 6 dB Notch Marker Search 4 8 Peak and Minimum Search Criteria 4 9 Peak and Minimum Search Criteria at Display Endpoints 4 10 Multi Peak Search Mode 4 11 Multi Notch Search Mode 4 12 Marker Statistics Function 4 13 Marker Flatness Function 4 14 RF Filter Statistics Function 4 15 Delta Marker Mode
22. 20 OUTPUT QRfna LRN 30 ENTER Rfna USING K State1 160 1 Put the learn string back 170 OUTPUT Rfna State1 Since LRN by IEEE definition only contains the actual instrument state exclusive of data traces and calibration arrays the network analyzer provides the command SYST SET LRNLong This command saves the data traces and calibration arrays if they are enabled under save recatt Define Save or using the MMEM STOR STATE SCPI commands Using the LRN command to set the instrument settings takes about the same amount of time as recalling a file from disk using MMEM LOAD STATe For more details on learn strings refer to Example Programs in the Programmer s Guide 7 48 Automating Measurements Automated Measurement Setup and Control SCPI Commands That Modify a Single Parameter Tip If several measurement setups are similar differing only by a few instrument parameters the fastest way to switch between the states is for the control program to send the SCPI commands that modify those parameters For example if center frequency and source power are the only parameters that change in consecutive measurement setups send the SCPI commands SENS1 FREQ CENT and SOURI POW to change these parameters leaving all other instrument settings unchanged This will be faster than either recalling an instrument state or sending a learn string Automating Measurements Automated Measurement Setup and C
23. 4 30 Smith 4 30 Format NonVol RAM 9 29 Format Vol RAM 9 29 FREQ 2 7 9 29 mnot ON off 4 60 9 30 Frequency 9 30 frequency annotation 4 60 frequency change to increase sweep speed 5 3 frequency delta marker limit 4 43 frequency of data point 4 47 frequency range entering 2 7 frequency response errors 6 4 9 66 frequency shift how to minimize 5 21 frequency shift due to long electrical delay 5 21 frequency tracking 4 52 front and rear panel connectors 8 3 front and rear panel features 8 2 24 front panel display 8 14 Index 12 front panel features 8 2 24 front panel knob 8 16 front panel tour 2 3 Full 9 30 fuse line 1 4 8 23 part number 8 23 G Gre graphics 7 21 Graphics Pen 9 31 Graph Only 9 31 graticule 4 55 Graticule ON off 4 55 9 31 Graticule Pen 9 32 Grey Scale 9 3 group delay 3 49 group delay specifications 10 14 H hardcopy faster 7 77 typical times 4 96 HARDCOPY 9 33 hardcopy speed 4 95 harmonics specifications 10 6 9 33 Back Porch 4 104 9 33 Horizontal Frnt Porch 9 34 Horizontal Front Porch 4 104 Horizontal 9 34 hot keys external keyboard 7 32 how to create flat limit lines 4 33 create single point limits 4 37 delete limit segments 4 45 use delta A markers 4 27 use limit lines 4 31 Index 13 use polar format markers 4 30 use Smith chart markers 4 30
24. 4 30 reference 4 27 relative mode 4 27 search bandwidth values 4 13 search notch values 4 15 Smith chart markers 4 30 use with limit lines 4 46 Index 18 markers and reference tracking 4 50 markers and sweep time 5 7 marker search 4 8 tracking function 4 8 Marker Search 9 47 marker search and sweep time 5 7 marker search RF filter 4 25 marker statistics 4 21 marker tracking and sweep time 5 7 match load 10 3 match source 10 3 math marker 4 21 Max Limit 9 48 Max Search 4 9 9 48 mean 4 21 mean statistical 4 39 MEAS 1 2 10 9 48 2 10 9 48 4 60 9 48 Meas 9 48 measure using limit lines 4 31 measurement reflection response 3 24 steps 3 11 transmission response 3 18 typical sequence 3 11 measurement averaging 5 12 measurement calibration iii When it is necessary 6 7 measurement calibration theory of 6 3 measurement channel 2 10 measurement channel annotation 4 60 measurement data to save 4 65 measurement detection modes 3 6 measurement errors 6 3 measurement example reflection response 3 24 transmission response 3 18 measurement port specifications 10 3 measurements explained 3 3 from the key 3 12 optimizing 5 2 When a calibration is necessary 6 7 measurement speed with hardcopy 4 95 Index 19 measurement theory 3 3 measurement uncertainty 10 11 directivity 9 22 isolation 9 39 load match 9 44 reflectio
25. Center 233 800 MHz Span 8 000 MHz Figure 3 16 Example of an AM Delay Measurement 3 Use the marker flatness function to determine the maximum deviation See Chapter 4 for how to use the marker functions 3 47 Making Measurements with the Auxiliary Input The auxiliary input AUX INPUT is located on the rear panel of your analyzer This input is designed to monitor sweep related dc control signals of devices generally used in conjunction with the analyzer such as a dc biased amplifier or a Voltage Controlled Oscillator VCO The AUX INPUT is not recommended for use as an oscilloscope for several reasons This input is sampled only once per data point regardless of sweep speed bandwidth or number of points per sweep and sampled data points may not occur at evenly spaced intervals unless the analyzer is in CW mode The AUX INPUT sampling rate depends upon the instrument state and sweep In CW mode with the fastest possible sweep time Sweep Tim AUTO system bandwidth has the most significant effect on this timing Data points are typically taken at about 0 2 0 6 7 2 and 70 ms in wide medium narrow and fine bandwidths respectively This effect must be taken into account if attempting to view signals that are unrelated to the sweep ramp For best accuracy input signal slew rate should be less than 700 volts per second Even though the AUX INPUT is not recommended for use as an oscilloscope it is possible to view sine w
26. Instrument State ON off 9 38 Instrument states recalling 4 65 7 46 instrument state settings to save 4 65 Int Disp intensity contro interface cables 4 80 parallel 10 18 Interface capabilities HP IB 8 8 9 39 Internal 3 5 Disk 9 39 internal detectors 3 4 Internal disk 4 68 Internal drive MS DOS formatting 4 77 introduction front a 2 3 ty 9 38 9 ISM1 A mark definition cae 5 Index 15 isolation calibration 9 66 n 9 39 isolation errors 6 4 iterative control 7 50 K keyboard external 7 30 keyboard connector 1 11 4 97 8 12 keyboard DIN 10 18 keyboard external hot keys 7 32 keyboards to connect 4 97 using 4 97 keyboard template 7 32 Key Record on OFF 9 40 keystroke recording 7 27 KHz 0 40 kits calibration 3 25 knob 8 16 L LAN 10 18 LAN 9 41 Landscape 941 language programming 7 15 LAN port 4 82 LAN Printr IP Address 9 41 layout page 7 77 learn strings 7 48 L t Margin 9 41 level power 2 8 reference 2 9 Level 9 41 limit edit example 4 33 Limit 9 41 Index 16 limit indicator 4 46 Limit Line on OFF 9 42 imit Line DN off 4 45 4 56 limit lines 4 55 stimulus and amplitude values 4 47 limit lines testing 4 31 limit marker 4 38 options 9 43 it pass fail indicator 4 46 4 61 limits and reference tracking 4 44 4 50 limit testing 7 37 creating flat limit lines 4 33 creating single poin
27. MDS Touchstone format provides for analyzers with either 50 Q 75 impedance Since your analyzer cannot make full two port measurements saving in Touchstone format is generally only useful when measuring reflection S11 b Choose Save Meas 1 or Save Meas 2 depending on which measurement channel data you want to save 3 The filename appears on the network analyzer screen as TRACE PRN for Lotus 1 2 3 files or TRACE S1P for Touchstone files where is a number the analyzer selects from 0 to 999 NOTE Your analyzer can store files only on floppy disks that are formatted in MS DOS 4 70 Using Instrument Functions Saving and Recalling Measurement Results To Recall from a Disk or Internal Memory The network analyzer allows you to recall and display measurement results that you saved as STATE files You can then compare the recalled measurements to subsequent measurements The analyzer can display both a data and memory trace for each measurement channel The data trace is saved when you select Data ON in the Def ave menu The memory trace is saved as part of the instrument state These traces will be automatically redisplayed when you recall the file from a disk or internal memory Calibration sets are linked to the instrument state and measurement parameter for which the calibration was done Therefore a saved calibration can be used for multiple instrument states as long as the measurement paramet
28. Pass fail text can be disabled with the Limit T ON off softkey See Customizing the Display in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys DISPLAY Limit Menu Limit On Softkey in limit options menu Allows for customizing the position of the pass fail indicator and text on the analyzer s display Limit X Position See Customizing the Display in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys _ DISPLAY Limit Menu Limit Options Softkey in limit options menu Allows for customizing the position of the pass fail indicator and text on the analyzer s display See Customizing the Display in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in menu Displays limit testing menu to select display add delete and edit limit lines and other limit tests See Using Limit Testing in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in limit options menu When ON limit lines or points in limit table 4 are visible on the CRT Does not turn off limit testing only turns off visible limit lines or points See Using Limit Testing in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys DISPLAY Limit Menu Limit 9 42 Limit Test on OFF Lin Mag List Trace HARDKEY Softkey in limit menu Displays a menu that allows you to turn visible limit lines on or off and to reposition and enable disable the pass fail indicator and text See in 4 for more informat
29. See Using Limit Lines in Chapter 4 for more information on using limit lines Softkey used for editing titles file names directory names and IBASIC programs Softkey in file utilities menu Deletes the file that is highlighted See Other File Utilities in Chapter 4 for more information on file utilities 9 21 Reference Softkey D Softkey in limit line menu Displays menu to delete one segment or point of a limit line or all limits See Using Limit Lines in Chapter 4 for more information on limit lines Access Keys Limit Menu Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in edit menu of IBASIC Allows deletion of one line of code at a time Access Keys SYSTEM options IBASIC Edit Line Delta Mkr Softkey in marker functions menu Makes the active marker the delta marker on OFF reference point See Ib Use Delta A Marker Mode in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Softkey in eash jemenssu re ment type narrowband broadband internal broadband external or aux input See Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer in Chapter 3 for more information on detection modes Options Directivity Softkey in the cd check menu One of the corrected measurement uncertainties that can be viewed after performing a cal check Refer to Chapter 6 for more information on using cal check Access Keys CAL Cal Check View Cal h BCR Softk
30. The sections following the overview provide instructions for choosing performing saving and checking measurement calibrations Each example measurement in Chapter 3 provides an example calibration for the particular type of measurement Measurement Calibration Overview Measurement calibration is a process that improves measurement accuracy by using error correction arrays to compensate for systematic measurement errors Measurement calibration is also called cal accuracy enhancement and error correction Measurement errors are classified as random drift and systematic errors Random errors such as noise and connector repeatability are non repeatable and not correctable by measurement calibration Drift errors such as frequency and temperature drift are also non repeatable and not correctable by a cal Systematic errors such as tracking and crosstalk are the most significant errors in most RF measurements Fortunately systematic errors are repeatable and for the most part correctable though small residual errors may remain In brief the systematic errors are correctable Repeatable systematic errors are due to system frequency response isolation between the signal paths and mismatch and leakage in the test setup DUT APPLIED TRANSMISSION __ ERRORS RF SOURCE X NA INCIDENT o REN REFERENCE REFLECTED TRANSMITTED po641b Figure 6 1 Sources of Errors 6 3 Calibrating for Increased Measurem
31. To Use Relative Limits 4 44 Other Limit Line Functions s 4 45 Additional Notes on Limit Testing 4 47 Using Reference Tracking 4 50 To Track the Peak Point 4 51 To Track a Frequency 4 52 Customizing the Display Sd e resta empate 4 53 Using the Split Display Feature et kr 4 54 Enabling Disabling Display Features 4 55 Modifying Display Annotation zoom tol 4 57 Expanding the Displayed Measurement Son voee a Sans 4 62 Saving and Recalling Measurement Results 4 65 Saving Instrument Data 4 67 To Recall from a Disk or Internal Memory how der RU us 4 71 Other File Utilities 2 cs 4 72 To Use Directory Utilities 4 75 Formatting a Floppy Disk PAP 4 77 Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters Bel Gogh 4 78 Select a Compatible Printer or Plotter 4 79 Select an Appropriate Interface Cable 4 80 Connect the Printer or Plotter 4 81 Configure the Hardcopy Port 2 2 4 82 Define the Printer or Plotter Settings 4 85 Printing and Plotting Measurement Results 4 90 To Select the Copy Port ls 4 91 Define the Output 4 92 Contents 3 Using Keyboard lll sn 4 97 To Connect the Keyboard 4 97 To Use the Keyboard to Edit
32. are expressed as a percentage 0 to 100 with 0 representing no color and 100 representing no white Satu See Using an External VGA Monitor in Chapter 4 for more information Save ASCII Softkey in define save menu Selects which channel s 1 or 2 trace data is to be saved in ASCII format for output Also allows you to choose whether to save in Lotus 123 or Touchstone format for spreadsheet use See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys save RECALL Sa save Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in programs menu Titles the current program AUTOST and saves it to memory or disk as set by Select Disk At power up the network analyzer searches the internal non volatile disk and the internal floppy disk for an AUTOST auto start file loads it and executes it if present 05 AUT Access Keys sAvE RECALL 3 Softkey in Save ASCII menu Selects measurement channel 1 data to be saved as ASCII data This data can be imported into a spreadsheet or word processing program See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information Save Save ASCII Access Keys save RECALL D Softkey in Save ASCII menu Selects measurement channel 2 data to be saved as ASCII data This data can be imported into a spreadsheet or word processing program See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for
33. example a bandpass filter like the one that was shipped with your network analyzer is used NOTE Phase derived delay cannot be used to measure frequency translating devices Use AM delay Option 1DA or 1DB to measure frequency translating devices Making Measurements Measuring Group Delay Enter the Measurement Parameters 1 Press the following keys on the analyzer 2 Choose an aperture When choosing an aperture there is a tradeoff between minimum apertures giving more resolution but noisier responses and maximum apertures giving less resolution but smoother responses For this example choose an aperture of 4 by pressing 3 50 Making Measurements Measuring Group Delay Calibrate For a Transmission Response Measurement 1 Since we are measuring the transmission group delay a transmission calibration can be performed to improve accuracy 2 Press CAL Enhanced 3 The instrument prompts you to connect four standards open short load and through cable as shown below NETWORK ANALYZER NETWORK ANALYZER pano 00 O a 00 00 B noo 0000 9 3 RF OUT rem OPEN SHORT LOAD NU Open Short load Connections Through Cable Connection 5 The analyzer will measure each standard and then calculate the new calibration coefficients The message Calibration complete will appear for a few seconds whe
34. most addresses are set with switches The following are examples of how to check or set the device s recognized address on the network analyzer e Printer press HARDCOPY 6 to highlight the line that reads HP PCL HP IB Press The second line of the screen displays settings in this case the The default address is 5 however most printers are a set to umber Gombe e Plotter press Select Copy Port Use the front panel knob to highlight the line that reads HP Plotter HPGL HP IB Press Select The second line of the screen displays settings in this case the address The default address is 5 and most plotters are factory set to address 5 Eve so changing the address is s probably not necessary Ib change the recognized address press Printer HP IB Addy number Enter NOTE Only one hardcopy HP IB address can be set at a time Changing the printer address for example Changes the plotter to the same address HP 8712 or pers svsrEM options HP IB 1 15 To Configure Peripheral Settings Installing the Analyzer Step 4 Configure the Analyzer If your system uses serial or parallel peripherals follow the guidelines below to configure the system Refer to the peripheral S manual for correct cables and settings The parallel and serial ports have standard Centronics DB 25 and RS232 pinouts respectively as explained in Chapter 8 Front Rear Panel
35. 1 30 1 the height should be 7500 1 3 5769 The top margin of the paper is at 10000 so the bottom of the image should be at 10000 5769 4231 Plugging these numbers into the HP GL IP command gives IP 500 4231 8000 10000 Using the same calculations for an A size sheet of paper in landscape orientation gives 500 7 10500 7700 The numbers shown in these examples work well on an HP LaserJet 4 Your printers margins may vary slightly Perform a hardcopy dump in HP GL format Once your printer is set to accept HP GL commands you can perform a hardcopy using the SCPI HCDP WAI command Automating Measurements Saving Measurement Results Custom Data Sheets You can write programs to set the printer font output text to the printer and send hardcopy of measurement test results to the printer to create your custom data sheet Refer to the example program called REPORT which is included with IBASIC Option 1C2 example programs A data sheet created by the REPORT program is shown on the next page The example program uses hardcopy output to generate a report with custom text Five different text fonts are used The fonts are available for HP LaserJet printers Refer to your printer manual to modify the example fonts for your printer Automating Measurements Saving Measurement Results COMPANY NAME CITY STATE COUNTRY BPF 177 Bandpass Filter PASS BAND Level Bandwidth 3 dB 60 MHz 3 MHz 20 dB 95 M
36. 100 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuencyl USER STOP 100 e To specify a custom suffix use DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency 1 2 USER SUFFix DATA STRING for example DISPlay ANNotation FREQuencyl USER SUFFix uV The suffix can be up to 3 characters long To turn the axis frequency annotation on or off press Annot ON off use these SCPI DISP ANN FREQ 1 12 ON Automating Measurements Displaying Measurement Results DISP ANN FREQ 112 OFF NOTE When using custom X axis annotation the SCPI command CALC MARK X and query CALC MARK X will return the analyzer s stimulus value not Your custom annotation values If this is a problem You can use the SCPI command CALC MARK POIN to specify the X axis point number at which You wish to position the marker For example OUTPUT HP8711 CALC 1 134 will put the marker at point number 134 Custom X axis annotation has no effect on marker Y values CALC MARK Y Note the customized X axis annotation in Figure 7 11 7 67 Automating Measurements Displaying Measurement Results Customized Measurement Channel Annotation The analyzer displays measurement channel annotation above the graticule This annotation shows the measurement type format scale div and reference level You may replace this annotation with your own text or eliminate the measurement channel annotation completely Ib do so use the follow
37. 175 000 MHz Figure 4 15 Delta Marker Mods 4 28 Span 349 400 MHz To Use Marker to Center Frequency To Use Marker to Reference To Use Marker to Electrical Delay Using Instrument Functions Using Markers To Use Other Marker Functions This function changes the analyzer s center frequency to that of the active marker and limits the span if necessary If the markers are all off and this function is selected it first turns on marker 1 at its previous setting or if no previous setting at the center frequency default 1 Press MARKER and then use the front panel knob or the numeric keypad to move the marker to 200 MHz ir Functions has now shifted and that the center of the analyzer is now 200 MHz This function changes the value of the analyzer s reference level to the amplitude value of the active marker This function does not change the reference position If the markers are all off and this function is selected it first turns on marker 1 at its previous setting or if no previous setting at the center frequency default 1 Press MARKER and then use the front panel knob or the numeric keypad to move the marker to about 10 dB trace now that the is pim on the reference level gt Elec Delay to add or subtract enough Tie ies to xe receiver input to compensate for the phase slope at the active marker position
38. 3 Making M easurements Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer When to Use Attenuation and Amplification in a Measurement Setup When to Change the System Impedance The Typical Measurement Sequence Using the BEGIN Key to Make Measurements BEGIN Key Overview Using the BEGIN Key To Configure Measurements The User BEGIN Function Option 1C2 only Measuring Transmission Response 7 Enter the Measurement Parameters Calibrate For Transmission Response Measurement Connect the DUT View and Interpret the Transmission Results Measuring Reflection Response Enter the Measurement Parameters Contents l Calibrate For a Reflection Response Measurement Connect View and Interpret the Reflection Measurement Results Making a Power Measurement using Broadband Detection Enter the Measurement Parameters Connect the DUT View and Interpret the Power Measurement Results WAS Measuring Conversion Loss Enter the Measurement Parameters Perform a Normalization Calibration Connect the DUT View and Interpret the Conversion Loss Results Measuring AM Delay Option 1DA or 1DB Enter the Measurement Parameters Calibrate For an AM Delay Measurement Connect the DUT View and Interpret Delay Results Making Measurements with the Auxiliary Input Auxiliary Input Characteristics Measuring Group Delay Enter the Measurement Parameters Calibrate For a Transmission Re
39. 4 Add Add Max Point HARDKEY Soft Softkey in the do cal check menu Stops the current cal check procedure and returns to the cal check menu See Chapter 6 for more information on using cal check Access keys Softkey in marker menu that turns off the active marker and makes the lowest numbered marker if any the active marker See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for an explanation of active marker and for more information on using markers Access Keys MARKER Markers Softkey in limit line menu Displays menu to add limit lines or points to the limit table See Using Limit Lines in Chapter 4 for detailed information on using limit lines Access Keys Limit M Softkey in add limit menu Displays menu to add a maximum limit line See Using Limit Lines in Chapter 4 for detailed information on using limit lines Access Keys DISPLAY E Softkey in add limit menu Displays menu to add a maximum limit point See Using Limit Lines in Chapter 4 for detailed information on using limit lines Access Keys DISPLAY Lim 9 d Softkey in add limit menu Displays menu to add a minimum limit line See Using Limit Lines in Chapter 4 for detailed information on using limit lines Access Keys DISPLAY Limit u Add limit 1 Softkey in add limit menu Displays menu to add a minimum limit point See Using Limit Lines in Chapt
40. 4 measurement 6 3 mismatch 6 4 systematic 6 3 error term directivity 9 22 isolation 9 39 load match 9 44 reflection tracking 9 65 source match 9 75 transmission tracking 9 84 ESD precautions 1 8 10 19 expanded display 4 62 extensions port 5 19 external auxiliary input AUX INPUT 3 48 8 5 10 17 external detector connectors 1 1 1 external keyboard 7 30 10 18 external keyboard hot keys 7 32 external monitor 4 102 7 40 external monitor connector 8 11 External Point 9 26 external reference input 8 5 10 17 External Sweep 9 26 external trigger Input 8 5 10 17 external video monitor 10 18 EXT REF IN 8 5 10 17 Ext Ref on OFF 9 26 EXT TRIG IN OUT 8 5 10 17 F fail icon 4 46 fail indicator 4 46 4 61 fast recall 7 41 9 75 stRecall OFF 9 27 Fault Location 9 27 Fault Max Freq Span 9 27 Fault Window 9 27 file to delete 4 73 to rename 4 72 Index 11 file format 4 69 File Format 9 27 12 13 flle renaming 4 72 file saving 4 67 File Tjf ASCII 9 27 tiliti s 9 28 filter multi pole 4 17 Filter 9 28 Fine 15 Hz 9 28 line bandwidth 5 1 1 flat limit lines 4 33 Platness 4 23 9 28 flatness marker limit test 4 41 floppy disk 4 67 floppy disk formatting 4 77 foot switch 7 35 FORMAT 9 28 Format 3 5 Disk 9 29 format a floppy disk 4 77 Format Disk Menu 9 29 format file 4 69 format markers polar
41. 4 77 disk access time 7 47 disk or memory recall 4 7 1 disks MS DOS formatting 4 77 disk selecting 4 67 disk storage capacity 12 14 Disp display 8 14 expanded 4 62 split 4 54 7 21 DISPLAY J 2 12 9 23 display annotation modifying 4 57 display color 4 102 display customization 4 53 4 55 display features 4 55 display Intensity control 8 19 Index 9 display resolution specifications 10 16 DOS formatted disks 4 77 downloading cal tit standards 6 18 DRAW graphics keyword 7 21 drift compensation detectors 6 15 dual channel measurements 2 12 dynamic range change measurement averaging 5 12 changing system bandwidth 5 11 factors 5 10 increase receiver input power 5 10 increasing 5 10 receiver 10 8 reduce receiver floor 5 11 dynamic range iii dynamic range specifications 10 2 Edit 9 24 Edit 1 9 24 edit limit example 4 33 electrical delay 5 20 effect on measurements 5 21 E Delay 9 24 electrical requirements 1 4 electrostatic discharge 1 8 10 19 precautions 1 8 10 19 eliminate receiver spurious responses 5 14 End Fred 9 24 End Line 9 25 Enhanced Res 6 9 25 enhanced response calibration 6 12 entering parameters 2 4 Enter Line 1 9 25 Enter Line 2 9 25 environmental characteristics 10 19 Index 10 environmental requirements 1 4 error unrecoverable 9 60 errors frequency response 6 4 isolation 6
42. 7 Single 9 74 single point limits 4 37 Smith Chart 9 74 Smith chart markers 4 30 Smith Chart LO 9 75 softkey auto step 7 28 7 43 Softkey Auto Step 9 75 softkey redefinition with User BEGIN 7 22 source harmonics 10 6 source match 10 3 Source 9 75 Source power entering 2 8 source resolution iii source specifications 10 4 Space 9 75 Span 2 7 9 75 specifications 10 2 20 definition 10 2 receiver 1 0 8 source 10 4 speed increase of sweep 5 3 speed with hardcopy 4 95 Split Disp FULL split 4 54 9 75 split display 2 12 4 54 7 21 Spur Avoid 9 76 spur avoidance 5 8 5 15 Spur Avoid Options 9 76 SRE 9 76 SRQ 7 52 Stack Size 9 76 standard deviation 4 21 standby 8 17 Start 2 7 9 77 start frequency change to increase sweep speed 5 3 Stat Line 9 77 Start Power 9 77 states recalling 7 46 static safe equipment part numbers 1 8 statistical mean marker limit test 4 39 Statistics 4 21 9 77 Index 28 statistics marker 4 21 statistics peak to peak 4 40 step 9 77 Stop 2 7 9 78 stop cal check 9 5 Stop Pow stop printer 9 4 storage conditions 10 19 Stare 6 To EPROM 9 78 storing measurement results 4 65 string message 7 20 strings learn 7 48 SWEEP 9 78 Sweep Out 9 78 sweep speed increase start frequency 5 3 increasing 5 3 reduce averaging 5 5 reduce number of points 5 5 turn off alternate sweep
43. 9 56 N sch Softkey in marker search menu Automatically calculates 6 dB default or other user specified bandwidth center frequency and Q of a notch filter See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys MARKER Marker Search Softkey in the source MENU Allows selection of the number of measurement points in a sweep 3 5 11 21 51 101 201 default 401 801 or 1601 As the number of points increases frequency resolution increases and sweep speed decreases See Ib Reduce the Number of Measurement Points in Chapter 5 for information on how the number of measurement points selected can affect your measurements Softkey in clock format menu Formats the real time internal clock to display the number of the month for example 03 for March Access Keys SYSTEM System Conf ig Set Clock TN lock Format 9 57 Softkey Reference Port Softkey in CAL menu when in reflection measurement mode Use this key to perform a user defined reflection measurement calibration See To Perform A Reflection Calibration in Chapter 6 for more information Softkey in system options menu Displays several screens of measurement Channel settings cal kit definitions instrument settings and instrument configuration Port Phas Offset an OF e E Softkey Reference Option 1 2 IBASIC only Softkey in secure menu Use with
44. DI Cent busy D2 Cent out of paper D3 Cent on line D4 Cent printer err 7 55 Automating Measurements Controlling Peripherals NOTE When using the WRITEIO 15 0 or WRITEIO 15 3 command the Printer Select Line is Set High How ever when the instrument is doing hardcopy the Printer Select Line is set low The Printer Select line may or may not be used by individual printers Check with your printer manual Writing to the Parallel Port To write the value 52 decimal 34 hex 0011 0100 binary to the parallel port s output pins use one of the following commands OUTPUT Rfna DIAG PORT WRITE15 3 52 WRITEIO 15 3 52 When the write command is executed the parallel port s data lines pins 2 9 will be set to the specified value and then a pulse of at least 1 us duration will occur on the strobe line pin 1 A data setup and data hold time of at least 1 us are guaranteed See Figure 7 9 7 56 Automating Measurements Controlling Peripherals L t t Lj 1 DO D7 data byte n 1 t 1 1 t t i a E Ww A INI nStrobe f i l 1 4 Fa E F 7 t AG rir obs IM d se 98 m 1 0 po6tb Figure 7 9 Writing to the Parallel Port Table 7 6 shows the pin numbers data bus bit numbers and signal names Table 7 6 Parallel Port Pins 7 57 Automating Measurements Controlling Peripherals The data will
45. Examples of volatile settings are File Format always returns to 8711C Compatible format after a power cycle IP Address to Ping always returns to 0 0 0 0 after a power cycle Option 1F7 only 12 13 Save Recall Memory Allocation Before reading this section please refer to Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for an overview of the Save Recall functions This section provides details on the size of Save Recall instrument state files Since disks have limited storage capacities it is often important to know how many instrument state files will fit on a disk and how to reduce the size of each file in order to maximize storage Types of Storage Disks The analyzer is capable of saving complete instrument states for later retrieval It can store these instrument states to any one of the following Table 12 1 Disk Capacities Internal non volatile RAM disk over 900 KB Internal volatile RAM diskl over 200 KB to 16 MB Internal 3 5 floppy disk 144 MB 1 Expandable by adding SIMM DRAM See the Service Guide for details The non volatile RAM disk is powered by a battery to provide short term storage of data when the analyzer is not connected to ac power With this battery protection data can typically be retained in memory for approximately 250 days at 70 and for more than 5 years at 25 The number of files that can be saved to disk is limited by the space available on the disk
46. IB Status Talker Listener SRE Register ESE Register PSC Flag LAN LAN state HP 87 IP Address Gateway IP Address Subnet Mask 1 This address cannot be changed 2 This address cannot be changed from the front panel of your analyzer It can only be changed using the command See your Programmer s Guide for details 3 Option 1F7 only 12 10 Preset State and Memory Allocation HARDCOPY Key Settings Select Copy Port Hardcopy Device Printer Language Hardcopy Port Printer Plotter HP IB Address Baud Rate dshake Define Hardcopy Graph and Marker Table Define Graph ace Data aticule otarion ker Symbol itle Clock ne PCL5 ono Color ochrome Orientatio rait Auto Peed Top Margi Left Margi m 15 9 in Print Wid 12 11 Preset State and Memory Allocation Key Settings continued Jefine Printer Mono Color Monochrome Orientation trait Auto Feed Resolution Top Margi left Mar gi Print Widt 150 mm 15 9 in ne Plotter 0no Colo Monochrome 0 Feed On Numbers onochrome Trace 1 Trace 2 emory 1 emory 2 aticule aphics 12 12 Preset State and Memory Allocation Volatile Settings A few of the analyzer s settings that are not included in the previous sections are volatile These settings survive when the key is pressed but 2ot when the analyzer s power is cycled
47. OUTPUT 800 DISP ANN TITL1 DATA Dut 50 OUTPUT 800 DISP ANN TITL1ON 60 END 7 31 Automating Measurements Operator Interaction Hot Keys on External Keyboard For Common Functions You can use a keyboard s keys instead of the analyzer s keys to control the analyzer Table 7 1 provides the same information that can be found on a template that is supplied with each analyzer HP part number 08712 80028 Function keys F9 F10 and F11 are hot keys which perform common operations such as entering measurement titles and saving measurement results to disk 7 32 Automating Measurements Operator Interaction Table 7 1 Keyboard Template Definition Koyboard Koy Name Analyzer Function l Koyboard Key Name Analyzer Function Esc Shi Opt IBASIC Command Line On Off Softkey 1 Softkey 2 Softkey 3 Softkey 4 Softkey 5 Softkey 6 Softkey 7 Softkey 8 E ABA E gt 3 c E e gt 59 Title Keys Line 1 or rc ift Print Screen a D 2 O S p co 5 gt a E a Title Keys Line 2 or Edit SAVE RECALL Title Keys Clock or Window F HARD COPY Re save File of Run SYSTEM OPTIONS Print Screen Help F4 PRESET Shift Fl MEAS 1 F5 Shift F2 MEAS 2 Print Screen Hard Copy Keyboard Template Shift F3 1 when IBASIC command line is enabled 7 33 CAUTION Automating Measurements Operator Interaction User Defined TTL Input Out
48. PRN 30 OUTPUT 716 MMEM STOR TRAC FORMAT LOTUS123 40 OUTPUT 716 MMEM STOR TRAC CH1FDATA MEM DUT1 PRN 50 OUTPUT 716 MMEM TRAN MEM DUT1 PRN 60 ENTER 716 USING Word1 A 70 CREATE Dest 32000 80 ASSIGN GFile TO Dest 90 OUTPUT File A 100 ASSIGN File TO With the Save ASCII feature you can read the measurements into your CAE or spreadsheet program and perform statistical analysis on the data such as mean and standard deviation on groups of For information on transferring disk files between the analyzer and your computer refer to the Example Programs chapter of the Programmer s Guide 7 73 Automating Measurements Saving Measurement Results Saving the Measurement to Disk Save Data Similar to Save ASCII the analyzer can also save the measurement data onto disk as an instrument state file Use Def ine Save and turn Data ON and turn Inst State and Cal OFF Tip A file saved in this manner is smaller than a file saved using Save ASCIT Save Data uses 6 bytes per point as opposed to about 20 bytes per point for Save ASCII However the file type is binary and contains a header making it difficult to read Querying Marker Searches The analyzer can measure a filter and compute its center frequency bandwidth Q and Loss You can query this information using the SCPI command CALC MARK FUNC RES For example 10 OUTPUT Rf na CALC MARK BWID 3 3 d
49. Pass Fail indicator position 4 59 Measurement title and clock Measurement Channel Annotation Frequency Annotation Using Instrument Functions Customizing the Display The measurement title area consists of two lines of text In the default or preset state this annotation area is toggled off When th title mode is initially turned on by pressing DISPLAY More D 1 d Clock line 1 is empty and the clock date and t time e of day is mee to line 2 The Title and amp Xock menu allows you to customize these two lines The clock can be shown on line 1 line 2 or can be turned off You can enter up to 30 characters of text on either or both lines NOTE When the display is in split display mode line 1is shown at the top of the measurement channel 1 screen and line 2 is shown at the top of the measurement channel 2 screen Ib turn the measurement title and clock on or off press More Display Title and Clock Title Clk ON The measurement channel annotation at the top of the display screen can be modified through the use of SCPI commands See Chapter 7 for more information To turn measurement channel annotation on FO press DISPLAY The frequency annotation at the bottom of the display X axis can be modified through the use of SCPI commands See Chapter 7 for more information To turn the measurement t channel annotation on or r off DH More Disp Ant 4 60 Marker Annotati
50. Pass_count 0 Start LOOP Display message Msg DUTs passed amp VAL Pass_count amp CHR 10 Msg Msg amp Press button to measure next DUT OUTPUT Hp8711 DISP ANN MESS Msg Wait for button to be pressed REPEAT OUTPUT QHp8711 DIAG PORT READ 15 1 ENTERHp8711 X UNTIL X 0 DISP Button is now pressed 8711 DISP ANN MESS CLEAR Wait for button to be released REPEAT OUTPUT Hp87 11 DIAG PORT READ 15 1 ENTERGQHp8711 X UNTIL X 1 DISP Button is now released OUTPUT Hp8711 DISP ANN MESS Measuring Add code here to take sweep and measure DUT WAIT 1 Pass_count Pass_count 1 END LOOP END CAUTION Automating Measurements Operator Interaction Limit Test Pass Fail TTL Input Output When limit testing is turned on the LIMIT TEST IN OUT rear panel BNC connector indicates the status of the limit test If the limit test passes this TTL output goes high If the limit test fails this TTL output goes low This signal can be used for example as an input to a materials handler Since the TTL output has limited current drive capability it should be buffered when controlling high current devices such as mechanical relays Otherwise damage to the instrument may result The limit test TTL can also be used as a general purpose input since the analyzer drive to this line is open collector When used as an input limit testing should be turned off so
51. Softkey in cal kit menu of 50 ohm instruments Selects type of cal kit as 3 5 mm Coefficients for male and female test ports are identical and based on the HP 85033D cal kit standards See Chapter 6 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy for more information Access Keys CAL al Kit 50 Softkey in system impedance menu Selects 50 ohms as the system impedance Refer to When to Change the System Impedance in Chapter 3 for more information Access Keys Cal Q Softkey in system impedance menu Selects 75 ohms as the system impedance Refer to When to Change the System Impedance in Chapter 3 for more information Access Keys Cal Kit Sys 20 Reference HARDKEY S Softkey used to select tuned receiver measurement of input A See Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer in Chapter 3 for more information on input A Softkey in narrowband internal menu Selects tuned receiver reflection measurement A R See Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer in Chapter 3 for more information on measuring A R Access keys MEAS 1 or MEAS 2 Detec and Internal Softkey in HARDCOPY menu Stops sending data from the network analyzer to the hardcopy device NOTE Hardcopy devices with large buffers may continue to operate for quite a while after this command To stop such devices immediately turn off power to the hardcopy device 9
52. System Cond Hardkey to left of disk drive An appropriate place to begin measuring any of the four types of devices in the begin menu Recommended for one channel measurements See Using the Key in Chapter 3 for more information Softkey used to define a limit line Begi Frequency See Using Limit Lines in Chapter 4 for more information Add Min Lii Softkey used to define a limit line See Using Limit Lines in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Limit Menu Add limit Add Max Line or Add Mia Line HARDKEY Bi B Softkey in detection options menu Displays menu to select detection modes when using external detectors Access Keys MEAS 1 or MEAS 2 Detection 0 Softkey in detection options menu Displays menu to select measurements made with internal broadband detectors B R or B R Broadband Softkey in BEGIN menu Used to set up the analyzer to make transmission or p reflection measurements of passive devices such as cables Cable CAL HARDKEY tkey Reference C Option 100 only Softkey in menu Used to perform fault location and SRL measurements See your O ption 100 U ser s Guide Supplement for information Hardkey in the CONFIGURE area Displays the calibration menu options for the current measurement mode See Chapter 6 for information on calibrating the analyzer Softkey in menu Provides access to the cal chec
53. accepted are 0 to 100 with 0 resulting in black not visible and 100 resulting in full brightness 1 Softkej Reference Softkey in trigger source menu Default mode network analyzer is triggered automatically in Continuous mode or as desired in Single mode Softkey in select disk menu Selects the analyzer s built in disk drive as the location where information is saved re saved or recalled See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys save Select Disk Softkey in the color options menu Sets the external display to inverse video format Access Keys DisPLAY Mo Softkey in the cal check menu One of the corrected measurement uncertainties that can be viewed after performing a cal check Refer to Chapter 6 for more information on using cal check Access Keys Cal Cheek View Cal Check l tkey Reference K on OFF program Only one program can be stored in memory at a time but programs can also be stored to internal and external disks NOTE See the HP Instrument BASIC U ser s H andbook for more information Access Keys options lt Hz Softkey in display frequency resolution menu Displays frequency to kHz resolution For example 1 234 567 MHz is displayed as 1 235 MHz note rounding up Access Keys Display Freq Resolution 1 Softkey Reference L LAN Option 1F7 L
54. also provides for sync on green monitors See Using an External VGA Monitor in Chapter 4 View Looking Into Connector pp6tc Figure 8 6 VIDEO OUT Connector Pin out Red Video Red Ground 11 GNO Display ID 0 Green Video Green Ground 12 N C Display ID 1 Blue Video Blue Ground 13 Horizontal Sync N C Reserved NI C Key 14 Vertical Sync GND Monitor self test Digital Ground 15 N C Reserved See Using an External VGA Monitor in Chapter 4 for information on how to synchronize and adjust the display on an external monitor 8 11 DIN KEYBOARD EXT DET Y INPUT EXT DET X INPUT PROBE POWER FUSED Front Rear Panel Connectors This rear panel connector can be used with an optional keyboard or bar code reader See Using a Keyboard in Chapter 4 for more information Signals are IBM PC AT compatible These rear panel connectors power external detectors and accept input from them for processing and display Compatible detectors are e HP 86201B e HP 86200B This front panel connector provides fused power for active probes and other devices Figure 8 7 shows the pin out of the connector looking into the connector GROUND 15 V 12 6 V nominal nominal View looking into connector Figure 8 7 Probe Power Connector The probe power output specifications are 15 V supply Lu 200 mA max 12 6 supply Iou 150 mA max Applying loads that result in current levels beyond thes
55. an Impedance Measurement 3 61 Measuring Impedance Magnitude The impedance Z of a DUT can be calculated from the measured reflection or transmission coefficient The impedance magnitude format allows measurement of impedance versus frequency or power This measurement can be useful for many types of devices including resonators and discrete passive components The analyzer measures the reflection or transmission response of the DUT converts it to the equivalent complex impedance and displays the magnitude Two simple conversions are available depending on the measurement configuration The impedance measurement is highly dependent on the reflection coefficient making it important to perform a good calibration The accuracy of the impedance measurement is best near the analyzer s system impedance 50 or 75 ohms The resolution is limited by internal math calculations to approximately 5 to 10 milliohms Ib use the impedance magnitude format press FORMAT More Format 3 62 Making Measurements Measuring Impedance Magnitude How the Reflection Measurement Works A reflection trace can be converted to equivalent parallel impedance using the model and equations shown in Figure 3 26 In the formula shown in Figure 3 26 1 the complex reflection coefficient The complex impedance Zren is computed based on and ZO The analyzer displays the magnitude of Zren This measurement assumes a two terminal device connected ac
56. and RF filter statistics calculations on user dehned trace segments See Fla Access Keys Marker Fi Softkey in MARKER menu Displays marker search menu to perform various marker search functions See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for more information 9 47 HARDKEY So1 M yReference Softkey in marker limits menu Use this key to set the maximum limit for the marker limit function that is currently highlighted in the on screen table See 6 Use Marker Limit Functions in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Limit Menu Mkr 1 Softkey in marker search menu Places the active marker at the frequency point of maximum amplitude If tracking is off marker remains at that frequency If tracking is on marker moves to the maximum point with each sweep See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys MARKER ler Search MEAS 1 Hardkey in MEAS area Turns on measurement channel as the active channel Default mode is transmission measurement MEAS 2 Hardkey in MEAS area Turns on measurement channel 2 as the active channel Default is measurement channel selecting it changes setting to the most recent type of measurement or transmission if not been used Softkey in annotation options menu Allows you to toggle the measurement channel annotation at the top of the display on or off See Customizing the Display in Chapter 4 for more information Acces
57. averaging reduce the number of measurement points e only view a single channel e turn off alternate sweep e turn off markers and marker tracking turn off spur avoidance e minimize frequency span to avoid bandcrossings HP 8714C only To Increase the Start Frequency Since the analyzer sweeps frequencies below approximately 20 MHz at a slower rate you can increase the start frequency to speed up the sweep l Press Start 2 Enter the highest start frequency possible for your measurement 5 3 Optimizing Measurements Increasing Sweep Speed To Set the Sweep Time to AUTO Mode Auto sweep time mode the preset instrument mode maintains the fastest sweep speed possible for any particular measurement settings l Press and look at the Sweep Ti When AUTO is all capital letters it indicates that the analyzer is in auto sweep time mode If MAN is all capital letters the analyzer is in manual sweep time mode 2 If necessary press Sweep AUTO To Widen the System Bandwidth Wide system bandwidth is recommended for some broadband detection measurements Table 5 1 Relationship Between System Bandwidth and Sweep Speed System Bandwidth Sweep Speed Wide fastest edium Wide faster Medium fast edium Narrow slow arrow slower ine slowest 5 4 Optimizing Measurements Increasing Sweep Speed To Reduce the Amount of Averaging If averaging has been turned on it is off in the pres
58. can control markers with the front panel knob the step keys or the front panel numeric keypad The markers are activated by pressing the key See Figure 4 1 MARKER ann 0 0000 0000 ng NETWORK ANALYZER Figure 4 1 The Key 4 3 Using Instrument Functions Using Markers If a marker is on two or three lines of numbers follow the marker annotation Smith Chart frequency frequency magnitude resistiue value reactive value The examples in this section are shown with a transmission response measurement of a filter Ib follow along with these examples use the filter that was shipped with your analyzer connect the equipment as shown and set up the analyzer by pressing the keys shown below the equipment setup NETWORK ANALYZER 0000 0000 post Figure 4 2 Connect the Filter to the Analyzer Cen Au Span 4 4 Using Instrument Functions Using Markers NOTE When you make a hardcopy of your measurement results that contain displayed markers you can choose to have a marker table appear on the hardcopy Refer to Printing and Plotting Measurement Results later in this chapter Using Instrument Functions Using Markers To Activate Markers 1 Press the key to activate marker 1 2 To activate markers 2 through 4 use the softkeys For example press Softkey 3 to activate marker 3 To activate markers 5 through 8
59. caution secured program lines can not be listed seen or edited _ See the HP Instrument BASIC U ser s Handbook for more information ies Secure Access Keys System options IBASIC Util Softkey in menu Displays a Cartesian format of the phase portion of the data measured in degrees This format displays the phase shift versus frequency Softkey in menu Adds or subtracts a phase offset that is constant with frequency rather than linear Softkey in more format menu Displays a polar format Each point on the polar format corresponds to a particular value of both magnitude and phase Quantities are read vectorally the magnitude at any point is determined by its displacement from the center which has zero value and the phase by the angle counterclockwise from the positive x axis Magnitude is scaled in a linear fashion with the value of the outer circle usually set to a ratio value of 1 Since there is no frequency axis frequency information is read from the markers Softkey in more cal menu Allows compensation of phase shift due to an extended measurement reference plane See Port Extensions in Chapter 5 for more information Softkey Reference P Portrait Softkey in define printer menu Sets printer to print hardcopy so that paper is oriented with shorter edge at top and longer edges at sides Portrait is the default setting and toggles with Landscape Access Keys HARD COPY 1 Softkey in
60. centered at 900 MHz With an LO frequency of 200 MHz the mixer IF frequency will sweep over a 15 MHz span centered at 700 MHz 3 36 Making Measurements Measuring Conversion loss Enter the Measurement Parameters Press the following keys on the analyzer PRESET This example measurement uses the default instrument parameters for a conversion loss measurement If your particular conversion loss measurement requires specific parameters such as frequency range Source power level number of data points and sweeptimel enter them now 3 37 Making Measurements Measuring Conversion Loss Perform a Normalization Calibration Normalization is the simplest type of calibration The analyzer stores normalized data into memory and divides subsequent measurements by the stored data to remove unwanted frequency response errors This calibration is used for this measurement to remove the insertion loss error of the IF filter Changing the frequency span or number of measurement points will invalidate a normalization calibration Perform the following steps to perform a normalization calibration 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 14 except replace the mixer with a through cable 2 Set the following frequency parameters This sets the analyzer frequency range to sweep over the passband of the IF filter 700 MHz This stores the filter response passband into memory and sets up a normalized trace so that
61. clock in the title area Access Keys DISPLAY More Di Color Softkey in defme printer and define plotter menus Used to define the printer or plotter as a multi color device as opposed to a one color monochrome device See Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys HARD COPY Def i lotter 9 15 Color Options Configure continue Conversion Softkey Reference C Softkey in more display menu Allows customization of color on an external monitor connected to the rear panel VIDEO OUT connector See Using an External VGA Monitor in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys DISPLAY More Displ Option 7C2 IBASIC only Softkey in select disk menu Displays menu to modify the memory allocation for the internal volatile RAM disk Access Keys save RECALL Select Disk Option C2 IBASIC only Softkey in IBASIC menu Restarts a program that has been paused See the HP Instrument BASIC U ser s H andbook for more information on using IBASIC Access Keys SYSTEM options TBASIC Softkey in trigger menu Continuous is the default trigger mode the analyzer begins its next sweep at the conclusion of the current sweep Access Keys MENU Trigger Softkey in mixer menu and measurement menu for measuring frequency translating devices Selects a broadband internal transmission measurement See Measuring Conv
62. diode detection type of measurement with an external detector connected to the EXT DET Y INPUT on the rear panel MEAS 1 or MEAS 2 Options Access Keys 8 LbI Softkey in more display menu Toggles annotations to left of graticule on and ON off off reference line indicator graticule values etc Y ax NOTE Graticule values are limited to four characters including and If any graticule value exceeds four characters all values are blanked For example 23 45 blanks the values it is not truncated as 23 4 or rounded up as 23 5 Similarly 123 blanks the graticule values Access Keys DISPLAY More Display Softkey in more display menu Toggles graticule value annotation and values ye ABS mode absolute value of each horizontal graticule line is indicated in rel ABS REL mode value of each horizontal graticule is indicated relative to the value of the reference line Access Keys DisPLAY More Display 9 90 HARDKEY Softkey Reference Softkey in broadband external menu Selects measurement of the ratio of the external detectors at inputs Y and R Access Keys MEAS 1 or MEAS 2 Detection xternal X Softkey in broadband external menu Selects measurement of the ratio of the external detectors at inputs Y and X Options Broadband External Softkey in clock format menu Formats the real time internal clock to display time as Year Month Day H
63. disk The files can then be copied from the floppy disk to the volatile RAM disk at the start of each day For example to copy the file TEST3 STA from the floppy to the RAM disk use this SCPI command MMEM COPY INT TEST3 STA For more details see the Programmer s Guide When controlling the analyzer with a computer you may want to copy a state flle from your computer s disk to the analyzer s built in RAM disk or floppy disk Later the instrument can be instructed to recall the state from it s internal disk The file can be sent from the computer to the analyzer s disk using the SCPI MMEMory TRANsf er commands For more details see the Programmer s Guide For manually controlled test systems the instrument state files for each measurement can be stored onto disk by the test system designer During the test sequence the operator can press the Save RECALL key and recall the state corresponding to a particular measurement 7 47 Using learn Strings to Save and Recall Instrument States Automating Measurements Automated Measurement Setup and Control The IEEE 488 LRN learn command can also be used to set or query a complete set of instrument parameters This can be used as a programming convenience eliminating the need for using disk files when saving and recalling instrument states Ib obtain the learn string containing the instrument state use the command LRN as follows 10 DIM State1 4000
64. display to a floppy disk in either HP GL or PCX format These files can be imported into various computer applications such as Microsoft Word or Lotus AmiPro and integrated with other text and graphics You can use the SCPI MMEM TRANsf er command to copy files from the analyzer s floppy disk to an external computer This is described in Example Programs in the Programmer s Guide HP GL format files can also be archived on the analyzer s floppy disk drive and later sent to a printer or plotter Under program control the files can be printed using various page layouts such as one to a page two to a page and so on using either portrait or landscape orientation This is done using the HP GL IP command described later The analyzer provides an HP IB interface and a Centronics parallel interface both of which are well suited for printing If you are controlling the analyzer via the HP IB port you can use the parallel port for hardcopy Or you can have your computer collect the measurement results and format them itself and dump them to its own printer If you have a custom interface circuit connected to the analyzer s parallel port you can still connect a printer in addition and use the Printer Select line to select either the printer or your custom interface circuit For more details refer to the section titled Controlling Peripherals in this chapter 7 76 Automating Measurements Saving Measurement Results Faster Har
65. drive an external VGA compatible monitor HP IB Parallel Port RS 232 LAN DIN Keyboard line Power User TTL Input Output See Table 8 2 for more information Vertical rate 59 82 Hz Horizontal rate 31 41 kHz 31 84 ys Pixel rate 25 MHz This connector allows communication with compatible devices including external controllers printers plotters disk drives and power meters This 25 pin female connector is used with parallel or Centronics interface peripherals such as printers and plotters It can also be used as a general purpose I O port with control provided by IBASIC and SCPI commands This 9 pin male connector is used with serial peripherals such as printers and plotters This RJ 45 ether twist connector is used for connecting the analyzer to a LAN This connector is functional only with Option 1F7 See the Option 1F7 User s Guide supplement for more information on using this connector This connector is used for connecting and using an IBM PC AT compatible keyboard for title entry remote front panel operation and for IBASIC programming Option 1C2 47 to 66 Hz 115 V nominal 90 V to 132 V or 230 V nominal 198 V to 254 V 300 VA max This connector provides a bidirectional open collector TTL signal that can be accessed by IBASIC and SCPI commands It also can be used as a sweep out connector and as a softkey auto step connector with an external switch 10 18 X and Y External Detector Inpu
66. e HP 92268A Twisted pair straight through cable 4 HP 92268B Twisted pair straight through cable 8 m e HP 92268C Twisted pair straight through cable 16 m HP 92268D Twisted pair straight through cable 32 m e HP 92268N Twisted pair straight through cable 300 4 80 Using Instrument Functions Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters Connect the Printer or Plotter 1 Turn off the analyzer and the printer or plotter 2 Connect to one of the ports shown in Figure 4 25 LAN SERIAL ETHERTWIST PERIPHERAL HP IB PARALLEL VIDEO OUT PERIPHERALS PERIPHERAL COLOR Figure 4 25 Peripheral Connections 4 81 Using Instrument Functions Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters Configure the Hardcopy Port You will only have to do this setup once if you make all your hardcopies with the same printing or plotting device You can configure the analyzer for any of the peripherals listed below 4 82 me me jm ism pe en a m CTI NN 1 Option 1F7 only Using Instrument Functions Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters The analyzer can send print commands in PCL5 PCL Epson or HP GL modes Recommended usages are e Use PCL5 mode for maximum speed if your printer supports it HP LaserJet 4 5 models support PCL5 Typical time t
67. entering a limit line will activate a marker The marker can be used to determine a frequency or level of interest on the device response Stimulus and Amplitude Values CAUTION Calculating the Frequency of a Data Point Freq Qt number limit Testing and Measurement Points Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing Additional Notes on Limit Testing In frequency sweep mode the stimulus values are interpreted as frequencies in power sweep mode the stimulus values are interpreted as output power levels The values entered for stimulus and amplitude are unitless If the measurement format is changed after limit lines are set the amplitude values do not automatically change Therefore you should select the format you want to use before entering your limits The frequency of each data point is calculated using the following formula pt number 1 x stop freq start freq start freq number of points 1 where pt number ranges from 1 for the leftmost display point to number of points the rightmost display point Limit testing is only performed on actual data points not interpolated values between them The limit lines or points that you enter are converted to values at each measurement point Most of the time this has little or no effect on the validity of the limit testing However note the following examples of problems that could arise when using limit lines 4 47 Using Instrument F
68. first and then the softkey that corresponds to the marker press you wish to activate 3 Each marker when activated is either placed at its previous x axis value or at the center of the x axis Active Marker Definition Although there may be up to eight markers on the display screen at one time only one marker can be active at any given time The active marker is designated by a triangle pointing down with the marker number above it Any other markers on the display are inactive and are designated by a triangle pointing up A with the marker number below it Any marker can be made active by selecting its corresponding softkey The active marker s values are always displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen and you can modify the stimulus value of the active marker using the front panel knob the step keys or the numeric keypad 4 6 Using Instrument Functions Using Markers To Turn Markers Off 1 All markers can be turned off by pressing AT 2 lb turn off an individual marker make it the active marker by pressing its corresponding softkey and then press Active M Off accessed by 4 7 Using Instrument Functions Using Markers To Use Marker Search Functions Markers can be used to e search a measurement trace for maximum or minimum points e search for a target value e automatically calculate bandwidth or notch parameters of filters e automatically search for mul
69. format menu Select this key only if you are saving instrument states that are to be used in older model A or analyzers See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys _ save_recatt Define Save File Format Softkey in file format menu Always select this key unless you need your saved file to be compatible with older model or B analyzers See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information 9 34 Softkey Reference H Softkey in HP IB menu Sets actual HP IB address of the network analyzer zc Q Default HP IB address is 16 This setting is not affected by PRESET or re 88 power on Access Keys svsrEM oPrioNs HP IB Add Softkey in HP IB menu Sets actual HP IB address of the network analyzer 2 Default HP IB address is 16 This setting is not affected by or 88 power on Access Keys SYSTEM options HP IB HP IB Softkey in system options menu Displays menu to set the HP IB address of network analyzer set and change network analyzer HP IB status and set HP IB echo feature sho Softkey in HP IB menu When on displays HP IB mnemonics on screen as keys are pressed a convenient way to see the mnemonics associated with the on SEE yoy NOTE Not all keys especially those that display menus have mnemonics Softkey in the custom colors menu Use this ke
70. in steps Hardkeys are front panel keys physically located on the instrument front panel In text these keys will be represented by the key name with a box around it such as PRESET Softkeys are keys whose labels are determined by the analyzer s firmware The labels are displayed on the screen next to the B blank keys next to the display screen on the analyzer In text these keys will be represented by the key name with shading behind it such es 2 3 Entering Measurement Parameters This section describes how to input measurement parameter information into the network analyzer NOTE When entering parameters you can use the numeric key pad as described in each example or you can use the TL keys or the front panel knob to enter data NOTE When you are instructed to enter numeric values in this manual it often can get cluttered and confusing to depict each key stroke So in this manual numbers matter how many characters are depicted inside one keycap For example if you are instructed to enter the number 42 5 it will be depicted inside one keycap like this 42 5 To enter this number the following keys need to pressed in succession 4 2 C 5 You can follow along with these examples by connecting the filter and cable that were supplied with your instrument as shown in Figure 2 2 2 4 Getting Started Entering Measurement Parameters NETWORK ANALYZER
71. information on input B Access keys MEAS 1 or MEAS 2 Detecti Softkey in broadband internal menu Selects diode detector transmission measurement ratio of input B broadband transmitted power to input R broadband reference signal See Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer in Chapter 3 for more information on ratioed measurement B R Access Keys or MEAS 2 Det Broadband Internal Softkey in narrowband internal menu Selects tuned receiver transmission measurement ratio of input B transmitted power to input R reference signal See Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer in Chapter 3 for more information on ratioed measurement B R Access keys MEAS 1 or 2 Detec Internal Options HARDKEY Soft jy Reference Softkey in marker search menu Automatically calculates 3 dB default or other user specified bandwidth center frequency and Q of a bandpass filter See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Marker Search Baud Rate Softkey in select copy port menu Sets the transmission baud rate of the analyzer for serial devices Make sure the rate you set matches the requirement of the output device see its manual for details Access keys Select Copy Softkey in system configuration menu Sets the analyzer beeper volume from off 0 to high 100 The default is 90 Access keys SYSTEM 5
72. interpolated value See To Use Marker Search Functions in Chapter 4 for an example of how to use the target search function Softkey in marker search menu Disables marker search See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for more information on using marker search functions Access Keys Marker Search sh Softkey in target search menu During a target search moves the active marker to the right higher frequency to the first occurrence on the data trace where the amplitude equals the target value That first occurrence may be an actual data point or an interpolated value See Ib Use Marker Search Functions in Chapter 4 for an example of how to use the target search function Access Keys _ MARKER Softkey in clock format menu Toggles on and off the seconds annotation that is displayed or printed as part of the clock Access Keys _ system_options System Config Set Clock Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in utilities menu Enables user to define part or all of a program by start and end lines Once secured the defined lines can not be listed seen or edited See the HP Instrument BASIC U se s andbook for more information Access Keys _ system_ options IBASIC Utilities 9 70 Port Softkey Reference S Softkey in select copy port menu Selects the hardcopy port device highlighted in the select copy port list See Connecting and Configuring Printers
73. key6 User key7 Your User BEGIN program must contain all of these labels even if you are not using all of the softkeys A default User BEGIN program is created automatically when there is no IBASIC program installed In the default program softkey 3 is defined to be the gt Max function softkey 4 prompts the user for a title and also enables the clock The default program is listed next You may edit this program to change the functions you need Once you have edited the program be sure to save the program to memory for later recall The following line is required DO NOT REMOVE User begin ASSIGN Hp8714 TO 800 User Begin Program To Modify Use IBASIC EDIT or IBASIC Key Record Declare storage for variables DIM Name 60 Str 1 60 Str2 60 Str3 60 Clear the softkey labels OUTPUT Hp87 14 DISP MENU2 KEY8 WAI Re define softkey labels here OUTPUT Hp87 14 DISP MENU2 KEY1 WAI OUTPUT QHp87 14 DISP MENU2 KEY2 WAI 1 24 Automating Measurements Operator Interaction 17 OUTPUT Hp8714 DISP MENU2 KEY3 Mkr gt Max WAI 18 OUTPUT QHp8714 DISP MENU2 KEY4 and Clock WAI 19 OUTPUT Hp8714 DISP MENU2 KEY5 WAI 20 OUTPUT Hp8714 DISP MENU2 KEY6 WAI 21 OUTPUT Hp8714 DISP MENU2 WAI 23 The following 2 lines are required DO NOT REMOVE 24 User pause PAUSE 2
74. making a transmission measurement with the cable that was supplied with your analyzer and a reflection measurement with the cable and again with a 50 Q or 75 Q termination load 2 13 Getting Started Performing the Operator s Check Equipment List To perform the operator s check you will need the following e A known good cable such as the one that was supplied with your analyzer The cable you use should have 0 5 dB of insertion loss up to 1 3 GHz and 50 75 dB of insertion loss from 1 3 to 3 0 GHz e A known good load gt 40 dB return loss that matches the test port impedance of your analyzer such as one from calibration kit HP 85032B E 50 Q or HP 85036B E 75 0 2 4 Getting Started Performing the Operator s Check Make a Transmission Measurement 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 6 Use a known good cable such as the one that was supplied with your analyzer NETWORK ANALYZER 0000 0000 Figure 2 6 Equipment Setup for Transmission Measurement 2 Press PRESET SCALE 11 Enter Press POWER ENTER 4 Verify that the data trace falls within 0 5 dB of 0 dB See Figure 2 7 for a typical result 2 15 Getting Started Performing the Operator s Check bi Transmission Log 0 1 dB Ref 0 00 d8 ba Off Start 0 300 MHz stop 3 000 0 00 MH7 po653b_c Figure 2 7 Verify Transmission Measurement NOTE The quality of the cable will affect this measur
75. measurement information The following illustration shows several locations where information is provided on the screen q p gt 1 Transmission Log M 20 0 dB Ref 0 00 dB C 2 Heflection Log Mag 20 0 dB 000 dB TOP 2h maa 98 80 pp62c atus amete The data s eceiver par The active ata trace a easur nd ot gt e measure e type of measu isplay says 0 is the d eme er parameter data is indica ent chan isplay for otation i s have c t cha el pa ement fo ff hare is the reference level This value is the re at that is selected us the upper left co ner of t anged since the last comple nel indicator is d ameters for both esignated ed by bei channels each measureme ng brighter tha e display scree e sweep by a solid tria Front Rear Panel Display indicates that the analyzer source or gle P The active measurement channel s the inactive measurement channel s data always appear at the top of the display in this area t channe ference li is displayed he ing the FORMAT key This is the Scale Div that is selected using the SCALE key in units appropriate to the current measurement e in Cartesian f measurement channel is turned off ormats or the outer circle in polar formats 10 11 16 16 o ly for a few mo This a
76. menu Sets print width printing space in mm See Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys HARD COPY D Softkey in select copy port menu Sets recognized HP IB address of hardcopy device at HP IB port for HP IB printers and plotters only The default address is 5 The recognized HP IB address is the address that the network analyzer uses to communicate with the device The actual address of the device must be set independently to match See Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters in Chapter 4 for more information y Port Softkey in more printer menu Sets printer resolution in terms of dots per inch Check printer manual for appropriate setting Default is 96 dots per inch See Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters in Chapter 4 for more information on printer resolution Access Keys HARD coPY Def ine Printer More Printer Option 7C2 BASIC only Softkey in save recat menu Displays menu to save re save recall programs or save a program as an autostart AUTOST program See the HP Instrument BASIC U ser s H andbook for more information Softkey in menu Allows you to set a power level other than the factory default of 0 dBm that the analyzer will always return to when the 1 kisy irgssed Be sure to terminate your entry with one of the softkeys or the key S ftkey Reference P Softkey in POWER menu Leads to t
77. meters if only 2 devices are involved The length between adjacent devices is not critical as long as the overall restriction is met See Figure 1 5 for different connection configurations STAR LINEAR NETWORK NETWORK ANALYZER ANALYZER HP IB D067b Figure 1 5 HP IB Connection Configurations 1 13 Installing the Analyzer Step 4 Configure the Analyzer Table 1 1 Maximum HP IB Cable lengths Instruments Peripherals Maximum HP IB Cable Length in Systam Between Each Pair of Dwicas Two 4m Fifteen max 20m total Parallel and Serial Parallel and serial devices often require specific cables check their manuals Connections for details Parallel cable length should not exceed 25 feet The analyzer may experience problems talking to a printer if this length is exceeded Connect the required control cables and secure them Tighten the knurled screws or comparable fasteners Other Connections If you plan to use a keyboard external video monitor or external detectors connect them to the appropriate rear panel connectors See Figure 1 4 Also see Chapter 8 for more information on front and rear panel connectors 1 14 Installing the Analyzer Step 4 Configure the Analyzer To Set HP IB Addresses 16 communicate via HP IB each external device must have a unique address and the network analyzer must recognize each address Ib check or set each external device s actual address refer to the device s manual
78. note that they may promote shock hazards overheating dust contamination and inferior system performance Consult your HP customer engineer about installation warranty and support details When installing the product in a cabinet the convection into and out of the instrument must not be restricted The ambient temperature outside the cabinet must be less than the maximum operating temperature of the instrument by 4 for every 100 watts dissipated in the cabinet If the total power dissipated in the cabinet is greater than 800 watts then forced convection must be used Place other system instruments computer printer plotter where convenient within the HP IB cable length limits see Table 1 1 or other interface cabling limits 1 17 Clean the CRT Check the RF Front Panel Connectors Preventive Maintenance Preventive maintenance consists of two tasks It should be performed at least every six months more often if the instrument is used daily on a production line or in a harsh environment Use a soft cloth and if necessary a mild cleaning solution Visually inspect the front panel connectors The most important connectors are those to which the DUT is connected typically the RF cable end or the RF IN connector All connectors should be clean and the center pins centered The fingers of female connectors should be unbroken and uniform in appearance If you are unsure whether the connectors are good gauge the RF I
79. now Calibrate For a Reflection Response Measurement Since impedance is a reflection measurement you can perform a reflection calibration to improve accuracy Refer to Calibrate For a Reflection Response Measurement earlier in this chapter 3 56 Making Measurements Measuring Impedance Using the Smith Chart Connect the DUT NETWORK ANALYZER NETWORK ANALYZER OR RF IN po660b Figure 3 21 Equipment Setup For a Reflection Measurement of a Two Port Device NETWORK ANALYZER RF OUT DEVICE UNDER TEST posson Figure 3 22 Equipment Setup For a Reflection Measurement of a One Port Device 3 57 Making Measurements Measuring Impedance Using the Smith Chart View and Interpret the Results l Press Smith Chart 3 To interpret the impedance measurement refer to Figure 3 23 for the following discussion a The horizontal axis the solid line is the real portion of the impedance the resistance The center of the horizontal axis always represents the system impedance 50 Q in this example b The dashed circles that intersect the horizontal axis represent constant resistance The dashed arcs that are tangent to the horizontal axis represent constant reactance c The upper half of the Smith Chart is the area where the reactive component is positive and is therefore inductive The lower half is the area where the reactive component is negative and is theref
80. of measurement points unless memory trace functions are used Memory trace functions are Data Mem and Data and Memory You should save instrument states when you want to return to the same instrument setup Calibration data Error correction arrays The amount of memory used increases with the number of data points Reflection cals are larger than transmission cals The instrument state is automatically saved with cal data You should save calibrations to avoid having to repeat the calibration procedure Measurement or trace data The amount of memory used increases with the number of data data is put into memory by pressing Data M memory trace Saves trace data in ASCII format for output to spreadsheets or to CAE programs Preset State and Memory Allocation Save Recall Memory Allocation How to Determine the Size of Disk Files This section explains how to calculate the size of the files that you save to disk when using save RECALL As mentioned earlier there are three types of information that can be saved e Instrument state Cal Data Each of these can be enabled or disabled using SAVE recat Define Save based on your needs The following table shows how much space is required to save each of the three components of the instrument state By adding the numbers for the items which you are saving you can calculate approximately the size of the instrument state file that will be sav
81. of the measurement trace changes the reference marker value also changes The delta marker is represented by a triangle pointing up A with a delta symbol A below it rather than a number Limit testing can be performed on delta amplitude and delta frequency using specific markers See Use Marker Limit Functions later in this chapter To follow along with this example set up the instrument for a transmission measurement of the bandpass filter that was shipped with your instrument l Press All Off Marker Search Max Search Mkr gt to move marker 1 the active marker to the maximum value on the trace to place a reference marker at the active marker position 3 Press Prior Menu M rker Search Min Search place marker 1 to the minimum point on the trace kr gt Min to 4 The difference between the markers frequency and amplitude value is shown in the upper right corner of the analyzer screen 9 Press Prior Menu Prior Menu 2 Use the front panel knob to move marker 2 towards the right hand side of the display screen Note that the marker 2 values are also in reference to the delta marker 4 27 Using instrument Functions Using Markers 1 Transmission Log Mag 20 0 dB Ref 60 00 dB bo off i Chit 54 150 MHz 20 28 34 dB Te E TN Eno 2oC A 40 Chi L 80 1 up 100 AP a 140 ws _ Center
82. om OFF 9 19 data storage 12 14 date 4 60 format 9 15 DD HM YYYY HH MM 9 19 declaration of conformity 11 6 Default 9 19 default conditions presetting the analyzer 2 6 Default Pen Colors 9 20 Define Hardcopy 9 20 Define PECES 9 20 Define Platter 9 20 Define save 9 21 defining a printing device 4 85 defining what you save 4 68 delay 3 42 AM specifications 10 14 electrical effect on measurements 5 21 group 3 49 group specifications 10 14 phase derived 3 49 delay aperture 3 49 Delay Aperture 9 21 delay specifications 10 14 Delete 11 Files 9 21 Delete ALE Limits 9 21 Delete Char 9 21 Delete File 9 21 d 4 45 9 22 Delete Line 9 22 deleting files 4 73 deleting limit segments 4 45 delta amplitude limit test 4 42 Index 8 delta frequency limit test 4 43 delta markers 4 27 delta A markers 4 27 description of instrument iii detection broadband 3 6 narrowband 3 6 detection modes 3 4 3 6 Detection options 9 22 detector 3 4 detector 3 4 detector B 3 6 detector connectors 1 11 detector 3 4 detector R 3 6 detectors internal 3 4 detector zeroing 6 15 determining test port power 10 6 device measurement 3 3 diagrams on screen 7 21 dimensions of analyzer 10 19 DIN keyboard 10 18 directivity 10 3 Dis ctivi directory to make or change 4 75 ory Utilities 9 22 9 22 formatting
83. receiver spurious responses 5 14 factors 5 13 reduction 5 13 Track Frequency 4 52 9 83 tracking 4 8 marker 5 7 Track Peak 4 51 9 83 track peak point 4 51 transmission formula 3 22 transmission calibration 6 11 transmission measurement calibration 3 19 transmission measurements 3 18 23 Trans Port Extension 9 84 transporting instructions 11 5 trigger external 8 5 external input 10 17 F Source 9 84 TSet on OFF 9 84 TTL signals 7 35 type F connectors 6 17 U uncertainty measurement 10 11 unpacking the analyzer 1 3 unrecoverable error 9 60 Jpdate Corr Const 9 85 Jpper 9 85 User BEGIN 3 17 7 22 default program 7 24 BEGIN on OFF 9 85 User BEGIN program structure 7 23 USER TTL IN OUT port 7 34 8 6 User TTL 9 85 Index 31 Utilities 9 85 V VEE programming language 7 16 Velocity Factor 9 86 rch 4 104 9 86 rnt Porch 9 86 Vertical Back P Vertical F Vertical Position 9 86 vertical scale how to set 9 8 VGA monitor 4 102 8 11 VIDEO OUT COLOR VGA connector 8 11 VIDEO OUT connector 1 11 10 18 view a single measurement channel 5 6 View Cal Check 9 87 volatile RAM disk 7 46 Volatile RAM Disk 9 87 volatile settings 12 13 voltage requirements 1 4 voltage selector switch 8 24 W warning definition 11 3 warranty 10 21 weight 10 19 Wide 8500 Hz 9 88 wide bandwidth 5 11 writeable ports
84. referred to as frequency shift The amount of frequency shift is given by the following equation frequency shift transit tune x IFeguency span sweep time The narrowband receiver at the RF IN port is tuned to the exact frequency being emitted at the RF OUT port with an input bandwidth determined by the System Bandwidth selection If the RF IN signal is lower than the RF OUT signal the measurement of RF IN will be attenuated by the receiver s frequency response The amount of attenuation increases as the amount of frequency shift increases The amount of attenuation also increases as the System Bandwidth decreases The analyzer has been designed to minimize the effect of frequency shift when a short cable is connected between RF OUT and RF IN When a long cable or a device with long electrical delay is connected however it is possible for the measurement to be affected especially at the analyzer s fastest sweep rates If frequency shift is suspected use the following techniques to reduce its effect e increase sweep time e decrease frequency span e select a wider system bandwidth e use shorter cables to connect the DUT to the analyzer e use broadband detection to completely eliminate the effect of frequency shift Calibrating for Increased M easurement Accuracy Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy This chapter first explains measurement calibration in the section titled Measurement Calibration Overview
85. shape of a measurement trace but not concerned with the absolute amplitude For example Figure 4 16 shows limit lines created for tuning a filter to a particular shape If the shape is more important than the amplitude you can make the limit lines relative to the peak point of the trace using the reference tracking function In this example you would press 5 Refer Peak The limit lines are now to the peak point on the measurement trace rather than set at an absolute amplitude For more information on reference tracking see Using Reference Tracking later in this chapter 4 44 To limit lines On and Off To Delete limit lines Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing Other Limit Line Functions on and it does not delete them You can still use the limit test function pass fail without the limit lines appearing on the display screen lb access this key press Limit Menu Limit ptions 1 To select a limit line or point to delete you must be in the main limit line menu 2 Ib easily ensure you are in the main limit line menu press DISPLAY 3 Use the front panel knob or the 1 Z keys to select the limit you wish to delete The selected limit will appear in inverse video in the limit table 4 Press Delete Limit The analyzer then gives you the option to cancel the deletion go ahead with the individual deletion or delete all the currently set limits 4 45
86. that of the active marker and modifies the frequency span accordingly If markers are off it first turns on marker 1 at its previous setting or at the center frequency default Access Keys MARKER Marker Funct ions y Reference nil HARDKEY Se y gt Softkey in marker functions menu adjusts the electrical delay to balance the phase of the DUT This is performed automatically regardless of the format and the measurement being made Enough line length is added to or subtracted from the receiver input to compensate for the phase slope at the active marker position This effectively flattens the phase trace around the active marker and can be used to measure electrical length or deviation from linear phase Additional electrical delay adjustments are required without constant group delay over the measured frequency span Since this feature adds phase to a variation in phase versus frequency it is applicable only for ratioed dd Softkey in marker functions menu Makes reference level of graticule equal to marker value does not change reference position If markers are off it first turns on marker 1 at its previous setting or the center frequency default Softkey in menu Invokes menu to select delta marker mode marker to center marker to reference marker to electrical delay and marker math functions Softkey in marker functions menu Brings up menu to select statistics flatness
87. the Keyboard Ib connect a keyboard first turn off the analyzer Then connect a PC AT compatible keyboard with a mini DIN connector to the rear panel DIN KEYBOARD connector See Figure 1 4 in Chapter 1 for the location of the keyboard connector Turn the analyzer back on after the keyboard connector is fully inserted into the connector NOTE If your keyboard has a standard large 5 DIN connector you will need to use a DIN to mini DIN small 6 adapter to connect the keyboard to the analyzer These adapters are available as HP part no 1252 4141 Contact the nearest HP sales or service office for more information 4 97 Using Instrument Functions Using a Keyboard To Use the Keyboard to Edit Using a keyboard makes editing of file and directory names or program lines quick and easy You can edit these items from the front panel of the instrument using the front panel knob and the softkeys however this process is very tedious Following is an example procedure to use a keyboard and the Re Save State function to save an instrument state that you want to call mixer 1 Set up the instrument with the measurement parameters that you want to save See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results earlier in this chapter for more information 2 Press SAVE RECALL Sel ct Disk and choose where to store the instrument state 4 Use the keyboard to backspace over the existing file name don t worry the
88. the display press Ri osition Enter Figure 2 3 shows how each reference position is identified 5 To change the reference level to 0 dB press R amp nce Level 0 Enter o N o gt Oc CO O Figure 2 3 Reference Positions 2 Entering the Active Measurement Channel and Type of Measurement Getting Started Entering Measurement Parameters The and keys allow you to choose which measurement channel is active and measurement parameters for that channel When a particular measurement channel is active its display is brighter than the inactive channel and any changes made to measurement parameters will affect only the active measurement channel Some measurement parameters cannot be independently set on each measurement channel For these parameters both channels will be affected regardless of active channel status 1 Ib measure transmission on measurement channel 1 and reflection on measurement channel 2 press the following keys 2 Both channels measurements are now visible on the analyzer s display screen Note that the active measurement channel s channel 2 measurement trace is brighter than the other measurement channel s trace 2 10 Getting Started Entering Measurement Parameters D4 Transmission Log Mag 10 0 dB Ref 0 00 dB 2 Reflection Log Mag 10 0 dB Ref 0 00 dB dB 40 Abs
89. the filter response magnitude is removed from the measurement 4 Replace the through cable with the mixer as shown in Figure 3 14 Center MHz to change the center frequency so that the mixing product of the mixer is in the passband of the IF filter 3 38 Making Measurements Measuring Conversion Loss Connect the DUT NETWORK ANALYZER i oo 00 goes D 00 0000 00 00 00 00 LOCAL OSCILLATOR Filter at IF frequency removes unwanted mixing products 166 Figure 3 14 Equipment Setup For a Conversion Loss Measurement Making Measurements Measuring Conversion Loss View and Interpret the Conversion Loss Results 2 To interpret the conversion loss measurement refer to Figure 3 15 or your analyzer s display if you are making this measurement on your instrument a The values shown on the horizontal axis represent the source RF output The values shown on the vertical axis are the power ratio in decibels dB of the transmitted signal through the device divided by the incident power Ib display the result in logarithmic magnitude format designated by Log Mag at the top of the measurement screen the analyzer computes the measurement trace using the following formula Ptr Conversion Loss dB 10 of a Pine where Ptrans the power measured at the IF output of the mixer and where Pinc the incident power at the RF input b A level of
90. the instrument will allow the limit test line to float high The line can then be connected to an external switch which should only pull the signal to ground or let it float an external circuit should not drive this line push button or foot switch can then be attached to the line to pull the signal to ground The state of the signal can be monitored by the automated system to determine when the operator is ready for some action The state of the Limit TTL line can be read with either the SCPI commands 20 INTEGER X 30 OUTPUT 716 DIAG PORT READ 15 2 40 ENTER 716 X or using the IBASIC 3 0 X READIO 15 2 7 37 Automating Measurements Operator Interaction Finally the LIMIT TEST TTL IN OUT line can be used as a general purpose output line With limit testing turned off the state of the line can be set to logic high or low with either the SCPI command DIAG PORT WRITE port number or with the IBASIC command WRITEIO number value Following is an example of reading the LIMIT TEST TTL IN OUT line when used as an input 30 Limit READIO 15 2 40 The Limit variable will be set to O if the signal is low 50 and 1 if the signal is high Automating Measurements Operator Interaction Analyzer Port Numbers Writeable Ports Table 7 2 Writeable Ports port Number Register Description Outputs I bit data to the Cent_DO thru 07 lines of the Centronics port Cent D is the leas significant bit Can
91. the item you want to change You can also use the analyzer s keypad to input the number of the item you want to change Refer to the table below to identify item numbers Description Background ive Text Text ing Text icule Trace 1 1 e2 2 4 102 Using Instrument Functions Using an External VGA Monitor For example to change the color of the text on the external monitor from white to a different color perform the following steps 1 Press Select Item 2 Press 16 item number for text from the list above and then ENTER 3 Press Saturation ENTER 25 ENTER More Display 4 Press Lun the desired hue NOTE All of the above color settings are retained when the analyzer is turned off or is preset To 1 p ns restore the default colors press DISPLAY 4 103 Using Instrument Functions Synchronizing and Positioning the Display The analyzer provides a CRT adjustment feature which can be used to get an external monitor to synchronize properly and to optimize the display s position The following list explains how to use the CRT adjust features CAUTION The CRT adjust settings also affect the analyzer s built in display ijust When this key the monitor s If iss don t want the 1 Press system options Sys is pressed a test pattern app 2 If your external monitor is a sync on green signal monitor press
92. to enter the frequency range for your measurement Also allows you to change the resolution of the displayed frequency See Entering Measurement Parameters in Chapter 2 for an example of how to enter frequency range Softkey Reference F Softkey in annotation options menu Toggles the frequency annotation at the bottom of the display on or off Access Keys DISPLAY Mor See Customizing the Display in Chapter 4 for more information Frequency Softkey in add max point and add min point menus Sets the frequency of a limit point See lb Create a Single Point Limit in Chapter 4 for an example of how to set a limit point Access Keys Limit Menu Add Min Point Add Max Point or Softkey in menu This key is used to return the analyzer to frequency sweep mode after it has been used in power sweep mode ption 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in the IBASIC display menu Displays the IBASIC program on the full screen without measurement data Access Keys svsrEM options BA 9 30 Softkey Reference 6 Softkey in define hardcopy menu Defines hardcopy to print both graph and marker table NOTE The marker table prints only if one or more markers are on See Define the Output in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Define Hardcopy Graph Softkey in define hardcopy menu Defines hardcopy as the graph Only See Define the Output in Chapter 4 for more infor
93. to accept HP GL commands Send the printer an IP command You will need to send the printer an IP command to specify a specific rectangular region on the paper This is done by sending the printer the IP HP GL command The IP command specifies the size and the position of the printed image on the paper The units are thousandths of an inch so 8500 units would be 8 5 inches The arguments to the IP command are IP LowerLeftX LowerLeftY UpperRightX UpperRightY The paper is numbered as shown in Figure 7 12 7 77 Automating Measurements Saving Measurement Results 0 11000 8500 11000 HARDCOPY 0 8500 11000 8500 IMAGE HARDCOPY MAGE 0 0 8500 0 A S ZE 5 1 ZE PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE ORIENTATION ORIENTATION po676b Figure 7 12 Paper Numbering Typically a margin around the image of 0 5 to 1 0 inches 500 to 1000 units is used 7 78 Automating Measurements Saving Measurement Results Tip When performing hardcopies of the measurement graph only excluding the marker table the hardcopy image looks best with an aspect ratio of approximately 1 30 1 x yl Example command For example to print the hardcopy image on the top of a portrait A size sheet of paper you can use about 7 5 inches of the paper s 8 5 inch width The width of the image would be 7500 units beginning at the left margin of 500 units and ending at the right margin of 8000 units Using an aspect ratio of
94. to change the 3 dB bandwidth target level to 6 dB 3 If you want to change the marker frequency resolution press Disp F Each marker s dedicated use is listed in the following table Figure 4 6 shows a 6 dB bandwidth marker search 4 13 Using Instrument Functions Using Markers Dedicated Use of Markers in Bandwidth Search Mode Dedicated Use Measurement Channel 1 Measurement Channel 2 maximum power value marker 1 marker 2 bandwidth cutoff point left marker 5 marker 7 tanin idth ctr poi ii 1 The center frequency is defined by the analyzer as the midpoint between the two bandwidth cutoff points Pi Transmission Log Mag 20 0 dB Ref 60 00 bo off BW 53 ef 174 7696P9 MHZ Q 2 52 Loss 1 178 dB Center 175 000 000 MHz Span 349 000 000 MHz Figure 4 8 dBBandwidth Marker Search To Search for Notch Values Press MARKER 11 off Marker Search Using Instrument Functions Using Markers NOTE The notch search function is intended for transmission or power measurements in log mag format only 1 To follow along with this example you will need to connect a notch filter to the analyzer in place of the bandpass filter shown in Figure 4 2 3 The notch search feature analyzes a notch filter and calculates the bandwidth center frequency and Q see note below for the specified notch level The default notch search level is 6 dB The resulting information is displayed in
95. type N male 75 connector calibrations for 3 5 mm female or 3 5 mm male 50 Q connector calibrations for Type F 75 connector calibrations select the type of connector type by pressing Gal KiE and then selecting the appropriate type 3 25 Making Measurements Measuring Reflection Response Chapter 6 provides detail about when this calibration is necessary If you wish to calibrate your instrument for a reflection one port measurement perform the following steps 1 Press CAL Port 2 The instrument will prompt you to connect three standards open short and load and measure them See Figure 3 7 NETWORK ANALYZER 00 a i 00 n 1 1 1 1 1 t 2 AN cn ra ml e gt 13 Figure 3 7 Equipment Setup For a Reflection Response Calibration 3 Press Measure Standard after connecting each standard 4 The analyzer will measure each standard and then calculate new calibration coefficients The message Calibration complete will appear for a few seconds when the analyzer is done calculating the new error correction array 5 The calibration may be saved in memory for later use if you wish See Chapter 6 for information on saving calibrations 3 26 Making Measurements Measuring Reflection Response Connect the DUT NETWORK ANALYZER NETWORK ANALYZER
96. type of calibration The analyzer stores data into memory and divides subsequent measurements by the stored data to remove frequency response errors Follow these general steps when performing a normalization calibration 1 Setup the analyzer for your measurement Select the type of measurement Enter operating parameters other than the default 2 Connect your equipment as you would for an actual measurement but omit the DUT 3 Press DISPLAY 4 Notice that the top of the display on the analyzer now shows the type of measurement followed by M to indicate that the displayed data is actually the measurement divided by memory The normalization cal will be invalidated if any frequency settings are changed after calibration There is no correction interpolation with a normalization cal If you decide to perform any other type of calibration be sure to turn off normalization first by pressing DISPLAY Data Note that the indicator disappears when normalization is turned off 6 10 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method To Perform a Transmission Calibration Transmission calibrations remove systematic errors caused by frequency response isolation and source match These calibrations are for narrowband measurements only For an example of performing a response calibration for a transmission measurement refer to Measuring Transmission Response in Chap
97. volatile RAM disk and then on the 3 5 disk and if found load it and run it This feature simplifies the task of turning on an automated test station at the beginning of a working day or test session 7 53 Controlling Peripherals The analyzer lets you access its rear panel interface ports from your measurement control program Using this capability you can communicate with peripherals such as material handlers custom DUT interface circuits external switch boxes and printers Communication with the DIN KEYBOARD interface the USER TTL and LIMIT TEST TTL connectors is described in detail in the earlier section titled Operator Interaction This section will focus on use of the Centronics parallel port and the RS 232 serial port Using the Parallel Port The analyzer s parallel port can be used as an 8 bit TTL output port and as a 5 bit TTL input port The eight TTL outputs are for output only and cannot be read or used as bidirectional I O lines The parallel port does not support the IEEE 1284 defined Extended Capabilities Port ECP Mode or Enhanced Parallel Port EPP Mode The outputs signals are driven by standard TTL drivers They should be buffered for heavy duty applications to avoid damaging the analyzer The inputs are standard TTL inputs designed to accept signals in the OV to 5V range The analyzer provides two ways to access the parallel port You can use the SCPI commands OUTPUT GRfna DIAG PORT WRITEX
98. 0 10 broadband measurement 3 30 line 10 18 narrowband measurement 3 30 output specifications 10 5 probe 8 12 10 17 Power 9 60 POWER 2 8 9 60 power cable configurations 8 21 power cables 8 21 power level entering 2 8 preset 2 8 power level preset 2 8 power module 8 21 power requirements 1 5 8 24 power switch 8 17 precautions electrostatic 1 8 10 19 PRESET 2 6 9 60 preset conditions 2 6 12 2 7 preset power level 2 8 preset state parameters 12 2 preventive maintenance 1 18 printer address 1 15 Printer Resolution 9 61 printing and plotting 4 90 7 77 baud rate 4 84 printing device definition 4 85 printing speed 4 96 Index 23 print overrun error 4 86 Plot HP IB print times 4 96 Print width 9 61 probe power 8 12 10 17 procedure creating flat limit lines 4 33 creating single point limits 4 37 deleting limiting segments 4 45 increasing dynamic range 5 10 increasing sweep speed 5 3 set sweep to auto mode 5 4 test with limit lines 4 31 turn off alternate sweep 5 7 using delta A markers 4 27 using polar format markers 4 30 widen system bandwidth 5 4 programming languages 7 15 Programs 9 61 prompting how to display pop up messages 7 20 Level at Preset 9 61 9 61 Sweep Range 9 62 9 63 rack installation 1 17 rack kit part number 1 17 RAM disks 7 46 range frequency 2 7 R detector 3 6 R detector 3 4 read
99. 0 MHz press amp 4 You can also set the frequency range by using the Center and Span softkeys For instance if you set the center frequency to 160 MHz and the span to 300 MHz the resulting frequency range would be 10 to 310 MHz NOTE When entering frequencies be sure to terminate Your numeric entry with the appropriate softkey to obtain the correct units If you use the ENTER key to terminate a frequency entry the units default to Hz The default displayed frequency resolution is kHz You can change the resolution by pressing 2 7 Getting Started Entering Measurement Parameters Entering Source Power 1 Press the key to access the power level softkey menu Level ENTER 3 Ib change the power level to 1 6 dBm press L ENTER rel dBi NOTE Your analyzer s power level depending upon its option configuration may not be settable to below 0 dBm 4 To change the power level that will always be restored when you preset the analyzer press Preset Pwr Level and dBm or ENTER This entry does not affect the current power level 2 8 Scaling the Measurement Trace Getting Started Entering Measurement Parameters 1 Press the SCALE key to access the scale menu 2 To view complete measurement trace on the display press Div 5 Enter 4 RI move the reference position indicated by the symbol on the left side of the display to the first division down from the top of
100. 0 dB would indicate a perfect device no loss or gain Values greater than 0 dB indicate that the mixer has gain Values less than 0 dB indicate mixer conversion loss 3 If you wish you can quickly determine the loss by pressing MARKER Marker Sear Making Measurements Measuring Conversion Loss m1 Conv Loss M Log Mag 0 2 dB Ref 6 80 dB off dB eee op E Center 900 000 MHz Span 15 000 MHz Figure 3 15 Example of a Conversion Loss Measurement NOTE For the measurement to be valid input signals must fall within the dynamic range and frequency range of the analyzer See Chapter 5 for techniques to increase the dynamic range of the analyzer 3 41 Measuring AM Delay Option 1DA or 1DB An AM delay measurement characterizes the group delay or envelope delay of a device To perform this measurement you must have ordered either Option IDA AM Delay 50 ohm or Option IDB AM Delay 75 ohm These options include internal instrument hardware and firmware two external scalar detectors and a power splitter Group delay flatness can be a key specification for many components and systems Distortionless transmission of a signal requires constant amplitude and group delay response over the frequency bandwidth Group delay is the measurement of signal transmission time through a device It is defined as the
101. 2 16 HIRES ao uu See amp ai tind de HE 4 17 Limit Lanes 1 4 18 Limit Lines 2 4 19 Reference Positions 4 20 Split Display 4 2 1 Display Features 4 22 The Display Annotation 4 23 Normal Display 4 24 Expanded 4 25 Peripheral 4 26 Hardcopy Components and Formats Available 4 27 Trace List Values 5 1 Relationship Between Frequency Span Sweep Time and Number of Points 5 2 Compensating for Test Fixture Delay Contents 11 Contents 6 1 Sources of Errors 6 3 6 2 Mismatch Errors om a 6 4 6 3 The Calibration Reference Plane 6 6 6 4 Typical Directivity Error Term 6 30 6 5 Typical Source Match Corrected Error Term 6 31 6 6 Typical Source Match Uncorrected Error Term 6 32 6 7 Typical Load Match Error Term 6 33 6 8 Typical Transmission Tracking Error Term 6 34 6 9 Typical Isolation Error Term 6 35 6 10 Typical Reflection Tracking Error Term 6 36 7 1 Stand Alone Network Analyzer 7 6 7 2 Stand Alone Network Analyzer Running BASIC 7 8 7 3 Network Analyzer Wi
102. 2 dB and electrical length to be ten meters 10 14 Uncertainty nsec Specifications and Characteristics Instrument Specifications and Characteristics Group Delay Accuracy Aperture MHz 10 15 Specifications and Characteristics Instrument Specifications and Characteristics Display Characteristics Amplitude Display Resolution 0 01 dB division Reference Level Range 500 dB Resolution 0 01 dB Phase 180 Display Resolution 0 1 division Marker Resolution Reference Level Range 360 Resolution 0 1 polar Scale Range 10u t o 1M division 10 16 General Characteristics Front Panel Connectors RF Connectors Connector Type Type N female Nominal Impedance 50 Q standard 75 Option 1 Probe Power 15 V 200 mA 12 6 V 150 mA Rear Panel Connectors External Reference Frequency 10 MBz Level 5 dBm Impedance 50 Q Auxiliary Input Calibrated range 10 V Accuracy 3 of reading 20 mV Damage Level gt 15 Vdc External Trigger This rear panel female BNC connector allows external triggering of a sweep When the TTL level is pulled high a sweep is triggered When the TTL level is pulled to ground the sweep is inhibited 10 17 limit Test Output Specifications and Characteristics General Characteristics This connector outputs a TTL signal of the limit test results Pass TTL high Fail TTL low Video Output Color VGA This connector provides signals to
103. 30 18 10 30 50 70 Sel Transmission Coefficient Clin 511 Uncertainty Uncertainty ideg 51 11 Magnitude Uncertainty Teat Part Power 0 dBm 1 3 to 3 GHz 4 B 8 511 Reflection Coefficient 11 Phase Uncertainty Teat Part Power 0 dBm 1 3 to 3 GHz 2 4 B a 511 Reflection Coefficient 10 13 Specifications and Characteristics Instrument Specifications and Characteristics Delay Specifications AM Delay Options 1DA Aperture 55 56 kHz and 1DB ae Resolution 1 ns division Accuracy 4 ns specified at 0 dBm 16 averages well matched device calibrated Delay Range 30 psec 9000 m A mplitude Range 10 to 13 dBm Typical AM Delay Dynamic Accuracy calibrated at 10 dBm Power 101 o 20dBm 2015 Group Delay Group delay is computed by measuring the phase change within a specified Characteristics frequency step determined by the frequency span and the number of points per sweep Aperture M aximum aperture 20 of frequency spun M inimum aperture frequency span number of points 1 Range The maximum delay is limited to measuring no more than 180 of phase change within the minimum aperture Range 1 2 x minimum aperture Accuracy The following graph shows group delay accuracy at 1300 MHz with type N transmission calibration and 15 Hz IF bandwidth Insertion loss is assumed to be lt
104. 46 4 x 6 x 201 17 380 NOTE Most disks use a sector size of 256 or 512 bytes so there will usually be a small amount of wasted Space on the disk Memory Usage Notes In general memory usage increases with number of points and complexity of information saved Reflection calibrations use more memory than transmission calibrations because they use more error arrays When multiple types of information are saved together the total can be less than indicated above because redundant internal information is eliminated 12 19 Index Index Special 4 33 4 46 characters 10 MHz reference 8 5 10 17 1 through 8 9 3 3 3 5 mm 9 3 5 500 9 3 7 75 9 3 4 9 4 Abort Cal Check 9 5 absolute output power measuring 3 30 absolute power 3 33 absolute power accuracy specifications 10 10 ac line power 10 18 activating spur avoidance 5 15 i Marker Dff 9 5 active measurement channel 2 10 Add Max Point 9 5 Add Min Line 9 6 Add Min Point 9 6 address plotter 1 15 printer 1 15 2 addresses HP IB 1 15 detector 3 4 allocations memory changing 4 68 All Gftf 9 6 Alpha 9 6 alternate sweep 5 7 9 6 altitude conditions 10 19 Ait Sweep 9 6 AM delay theory 3 42 when to use amplification 3 9 when to use attenuation 3 9 AH Delay 9 6 AM delay calibration 6 16 AM delay specifications 10 14 amplification when to use in a measure
105. 5 disk drive This DISK function is used to make a backup copy of CC data See the Service Guide for more information Access Keys svsrEM oPrious Softkey in update correction constants menu Writes a copy of CC data from internal volatile RAM to EPROM This function is used so that current CC data is not lost when power to the analyzer is turned off See the Service Guide for more information Access Keys svsrEM oPrioNs Const SWEEP Hardkey in SOURCE area of front panel Displays menu to select automatic sweep tune fastest possible manual sweep alternate sweep or power sweep Softkey in user TTL config menu Sets the USER TTL IN OUT port on the rear panel to be pulled high during a sweep Access Keys svsrEM oerious 8781 Softkey Reference S Softkey in menu Sets the sweep time from fastest possible to three days 259 2 ks overrides auto sweep time Fastest possible sweeptime varies and depends on other analyzer settings See Chapter 5 Optimizing Measurements for more information on sweep time Softkey in menu Sets the network analyzer to sweep as fast as possible automatic or at the sweep time of your choice manual See Chapter 5 Optimizing Measurements for more information on sweep time Softkey in the system config menu For use with a muliport test set Refer to the multiport test set User s and Service Guide for more information WR Softkey in
106. 5 7 turn off spur avoidance 5 8 use auto mode 5 4 view single measurement channel 5 6 Sweep Time 9 79 me 9 79 Sweep switch foot 7 35 line power 8 17 line voltage selector 1 4 SWR 9 79 symbols and markings instrument 11 5 Sync Green on OFF 9 79 synchronization of external monitor 4 104 synchronization monitor 4 104 sync on green 4 104 system automated configuration 7 5 systematic errors 6 3 system bandwidth 5 11 Index 29 SystemBandgidth 9 79 system bandwidth change 5 14 system bandwidth how it works 5 11 System Config 9 80 system impedance 3 10 system lock up how to recover 9 60 SYSTEM_ OPTIONS 9 80 system performance 10 2 system specifications 10 2 System 29 9 80 T Talker Listener 9 81 Target Search 4 12 9 81 Target Value 4 12 9 81 techniques optimizing measurements 5 2 temperature conditions 10 19 template keyboard 7 32 testing with limit lines 4 31 test pattern 4 104 Tests andAdji theory measurement 3 3 10 throughput of an automated system 7 12 time 4 60 disk access 7 47 format 9 15 Title and Clock Titie CIk DN of title feature 7 31 Top Margin 9 82 topology measurement system 7 5 Touchstone 4 70 Touchstone Format 9 82 Trace 1 9 82 2 Pen 9 83 4 60 9 82 9 82 trace noise 10 8 activate averaging 5 13 Index 30 change system bandwidth 5 14 eliminate
107. 5 GOTO User pause 27 User keyl Define softkey 1 here 28 GOSUB Message Remove this line 29 GOTO User pause 31 User key2 Define softkey 2 here 32 GOSUB Message Remove this line 33 GOTO User pause 34 35 User key3 Example Marker Function 36 OUTPUT Hp87 14 CALC1 MARK1ON 37 OUTPUT Hp87 14 CALC1 MARK FUNCMAX 38 GOTO User pause 39 40 User_key4 Example Title Entry 41 INPUT Enter Title Line 1 Press Enter when done Name 42 OUTPUT QHp8714 DISP ANN TITL1 DATA amp amp 43 OUTPUT Hp8714 DISP ANN TITLON 44 GOTO User pause 45 46 User key5 Define softkey 5 here 47 GOSUB Message Remove this line 48 GOTO User pause 49 50 User_key6 Define softkey 6 here 51 GOSUB Message Remove this line 52 GOTO User pause 53 54 User_key7 Define softkey 7 here 55 GOSUB Message Remove this line 56 GOTO User pause 57 Automating Measurements Operator Interaction 58 Message 59 Stri This key is programmable 60 Str2 To modify select 61 Str3 System Options IBASIC Edit 62 OUTPUT QHp8714 DISP ANN MESS Str1 CHR 10 Str2 amp CHR 10 amp Str3 amp MEDIUM 63 RETURN 64 65 END programs see the AAS C Example Progrems Disk and the HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook supplement The disk and handbook are shipped with analyzers with the IBASIC Option 1C2 loading a A User B
108. 7 39 7 55 9 89 X axis annotation 4 60 X Y 9 89 y X 9 90 y axis annotation 4 61 Y axis LbI ON off 9 90 Y Axis EBF DN off 4 61 Y axis LE ABS 9 90 Y Axis rel ABS 4 61 Y R 9 91 Index 32 Y X 9 91 YYYY MMSDD HH MM 9 91 Z zeroing detectors 6 15 Index 33
109. AN capability only Softkey in system options menu Left Margin Level Limit Pressing this key calls up the menu to setup your LAN port and to turn the LAN state on or off Refer to the O ption 1F7 U ser s Guide Supplement for information Option 1F7 LAN capability only Softkey in select copy port menu Sets the recognized IP address of a LAN printer Refer to the Option 17 U ser s Guide Supplement for information Access Keys HARD COPY Select Copy Port Softkey in define printer menu Sets printer to print hardcopy so that paper is oriented with longer edge at top and shorter edges at sides Toggles with Portrait Access Keys HARD COPY Def ine Printer Softkey in more printer menu Sets left margin non printing space in mm 25 4 mm 1 00 inches Minimum setting is 0 00 mm default maximum is 200 mm Access Keys HARDCOPY Define Prin Softkey in menu Sets the RF power level of the analyzer s source See Chapter 10 Specifications and Characteristics for the minimum and maximum power levels for your analyzer Softkey in add max point or add min point menus Sets the amplitude of a limit point See To Create a Single Point Limit in Chapter 4 for an example of how to set a limit point 9 4 ftkey Reference L Softkey in limit options menu Disables the AN fail indicator from being displayed on the analyzer s screen Does not disable PASS or FAIL text
110. About this Manual We ve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support your product This manual is the best copy we could find it may be incomplete or contain dated information If we find a more recent copy in the future we will add it to the Agilent website Support for Your Product Agilent no longer sells or supports this product Our service centers may be able to perform calibration if no repair parts are needed but no other support from Agilent is available You will find any other available product information on the Agilent Test amp Measurement website www tm agilent com HP References in this Manual This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett Packard Please note that Hewlett Packard s former test and measurement semiconductor products and chemical analysis businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies We have made no changes to this manual copy In other documentation to reduce potential confusion the only change to product numbers and names has been in the company name prefix where a product number name was HP XXXX the current name number is now Agilent XXXX For example model number 8648 is now model number Agilent 8648A User s Guide HP 8712C and HP 8714C RF Network Analyzers Notice Safety Information Firmware Revision Acknowledgements HP part number 08712 90056 Printed in USA February 1998 Supersedes October 1997 The information contained in this docum
111. B bandwidth 200U TPUT6GR na CALC MARK FUNC RES Get result of bandwidth search 30 ENTER Rfna Bwidth Center_freq Q Loss For more details refer to the Example Programs chapter of the Programmer s Guide 7 74 Automating Measurements Saving Measurement Results Saving Measurement Results to Disk The analyzer provides two internal RAM disks and one internal 3 5 floppy disk to which measurement results can be saved For the fastest saves measurements should be saved to RAM disk From RAM disk they can be copied to the internal floppy disk by pressing SAVE RECALL File Utilities Copy A11 Files or using the SCPI command MMEM COPY MEM INT or MMEM COPY RAM INT The following mass storage specifiers can be used Disk SCPI name Non Volatile RAM Disk MEM fie Volatile RAM Disk RAM fie Internal 3 5 Disk INT fe The files can also be transferred over HP IB using the SCPI command MMEM TRANsf er Refer to the Example Programs chapter in the Programmer s Guide for details Automating Measurements Saving Measurement Results Using Hardcopy Features to Print or Plot Results The analyzer s HARDCOPY feature dumps the measurement display to a printer or plotter in any one of the following formats e measurement graph and marker table default e measurement graph only e marker table only e trace values at each point only The feature can also save the measurement
112. CALIBRATION REFERENCE a PLANE TEST FIXTURE OUTPUT INPUT NETWORK ANALYZER REFLEC TION RF OUT TRANSM ISS ION RF IN pp622c Figure 6 3 The Calibration Reference Plane 6 6 Determine if a Calibration is Necessary This section shows you how to determine if your measurement system requires a user defined calibration When a Calibration Is Not Necessary e Your test doesn t require the best accuracy possible e Your test device is connected directly to the reflection port with no adapters or intervening cables e Your test device impedance matches the impedance of the analyzer If your test setup meets these conditions you do not need to perform any additional calibrations however without a user calibration the analyzer is not guaranteed to meet its published measurement port specifications When a Calibration Is Necessary You want the best accuracy possible e You are adapting to a different connector type or impedance e You are connecting a cable between the test device and the analyzer test ports e You are measuring a narrowband or electrically long device e You are connecting any attenuator or other such device on the input or output of the test device 6 7 Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method Once you have decided that it is necessary to perform a calibration you will need to choose the calibration method suited to the type of measurement y
113. CONFORMITY according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer s Address Microwave Instruments Division 1400 Fountaingrove Parkway Santa Rosa CA 95403 1799 USA Jeclares that the product Product Name RF Network Analyzer Model Number HP 8711C HP 8712C HP 8713C HP 8714C Product Options This declaration covers all options of the above products xonforms to the following Product specifications Safety IEC 1010 1 1990 1 EN 61010 1 1993 CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92 EMC CISPR 11 1990 EN 55011 1991 Group 1 Class A IEC 801 2 1984 EN 50082 1 1992 4 kV CD 8 kV AD IEC 801 3 1984 EN 50082 1 1992 3 V m 27 500 MHz IEC 801 4 1988 EN 50082 1 1992 0 5 kV Sig Lines 1 kV Power Lines Supplementary Information The products herewith comply with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 13 23 and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and carry the CE marking accordingly K LZ ianta Rosa California USA 9 Sept 1996 John Hiatt Quality Engineering Manager European Contact Your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard GmbH Department HQ TRE Herrenberger Strasse 130 D 71034 B blingen Germany FAX 49 7031 14 3143 11 7 12 Preset State and Memory Allocation Preset State and Memory Allocation Preset and Peripheral States Preset State When the network analyzer is preset with the PRESET hardkey or SCPI command SYST PRESET it sets itself to the pre defined conditio
114. Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys MARKER Marker Search Win Search Softkey in the max search menu Moves the active marker to the next nearest peak to the left See To Use Marker Search Functions in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Marker Search Max Search None HARDKEY So N Softkey in the max search menu Moves the active marker to the next nearest peak to the right See Ib Use Marker Search Functions in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys MARKER Marker Searc fax Search Softkey in the select disk menu Selects the analyzer s internal non volatile RAM as the location where information is saved re saved or recalled See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys save recat Select Disk Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in IBASIC display menu Displays the measurement data on the full screen Does not show the IBASIC program on the display at all Softkey in and CAL menus Equivalent to selecting type of measurement calibration other than detector zero for power or conversion loss measurements This softkey is available under the CAL key only when making narrowband unratioed measurements NOTE This type of calibration is not interpolated changes in frequency or the number of points invalidate it See To Perform a Normalization Calibration in Chapter 6 for more information
115. Delta Amp1 in the limit test table Turn this limit function on by pressing the limit using the front keypad and terminating the entry with the ENTER key Min Limit and enter the minimum limit using the front panel keypad and terminating the entry with the key Delta Frequency Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing This marker limit test allows you to set marker 1 as a frequency reference against which marker 2 is limit tested 1 Press Limit Menu Mkr 1 Use the front panel knob or the 1 keys to select Delta Freq in Press Edit Limit M This limit test requires that you first use marker 1 to determine the reference frequency Press MARKER K2n use the front panel knob or the fr 00 keys to place marker 1 at the desired place on the measurement trace The frequency of marker 1 at this point becomes the delta reference for this marker limit test the marker limit test table Turn this limit function on by pressing the kr Limit on n S Note that the entry in the on off column of the table changes to Max Max Limit and enter the maximum limit using the front panel keypad and terminating the entry with the Press Edit Limit Min Limit and enter the minimum limit using the front panel eypad and terminating the entry with the key 4 43 Using instrument Functions Using limit Testing To Use Relative Limits There may be tunes when you are interested in the
116. E 900 Oo ooo a c 200 ca 555 0 E o DEVICE RF IN UNDER TES po612b Figure 3 11 Equipment Setup For a Power Measurement Making Measurements Making a Power Measurement using Broadband Detection View and Interpret the Power Measurement Results l To view the measurement trace press Autoscale 2 Figure 3 12 shows the results of an example power measurement 3 Ib interpret the power measurement refer to Figure 3 12 or your analyzer s display if you are making this measurement on your instrument a When making a power measurement the display shows the output power measured at the analyzer s RF IN connector This power is absolute power as opposed to a power ratio b Note that when making a power measurement the values associated with the vertical axis are in units of dBm which is the power measured in reference to 1 mW OdBm 1 mW 10 dBm 100 pw 10 dBm 10 mW 3 33 Making Measurements Making a Power Measurement using Broadband Detection P1 Power Log Mag 0 5 dB Ref 5 00 dBm ba Off Start 10 000 MHz Stop 1 300 000 MHz Figure 3 12 Example of a Power Measurement If the analyzer s RF output power level is set to higher than the specified output power for your analyzer the source could go unleveled See Chapter 10 for source and receiver specifications If your device requires input power greater than your analyzer s specified output po
117. EGIN program can be automatically loaded at power up if the y BEGIN program is named AUTOST An AUTOST program is loaded at power up Program from the internal non volatile memory or from a 3 5 floppy disk inserted into the analyzer s 3 5 disk drive When the User BEGIN key is pressed the program will remain idle until it is needed The program remains idle until a Softkey is pressed and code related to that softkey is executed After the code is executed the program returns to idle Refer to example programs provided User BEGIN does not restrict access to any normally available front panel feature nor does this key affect sweep update rates Modifying Bii Gil Automating Measurements Operator Interaction You can modify the Use BEGIN program with the built in editor an ASCII file editor on a computer or with keystroke recording For example to modify the default program to recall a setup 1 Select system options LBASIC F 15 OUTPUT Hp8714 DISP MENU2 KEY1 x WAI 2 Use an external keyboard to replace with Setup 1 3 Move the edit cursor to line 28 Delete the line 4 Use keystroke recording to create a setup function if you like or you can now insert code you have written Ib use keystroke recording to modify the program 5 Exit the editor by selecting Prior Menu Move the edit cursor to line 7 Now perform the keystrokes required for setup 1 8 When the setup is
118. FLECTION RF OUT port See Reference Plane and Port Extensions in Chapter 5 for more information Access Keys More Cal Softkey in amplifier filter broadband passive mixer and measurement menus Selects forward reflection type of measurement Power is output from the RF OUT port and also measured there See Measuring Reflection Response in Chapter 3 for more information Access Keys MEAS 1 or MEAS 2 or BEGIN Softkey in the cal check menu One of the corrected measurement uncertainties that can be viewed after performing a cal check Refer to Chapter 6 for more information on using cal check Access Keys CAL Cal Check View C k Remove Softkey in directory utilities menu First highlight the intended directory then press Remove Directory Deletes empty directories only Directory See 6 Use Directory Utilities in Chapter 4 for more information ry Utilities Access Keys save recat File Utilities Direct Adjus the display Access Keys system options System Rename Softkey in file utilities menu Displays character entry menu to rename the highlighted file See Other File Utilities in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys save RECALL Fils Utilities 9 65 amp Isolation Average Defaults HARDKEY t Reference Softkey in menu when measuring transmission or AM delay A measurement calibra
119. GROUNDED P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 10 SRQ NEAR ER WIRED S P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 8 IFC P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 8 NDAC Qr TWISTED PAIR Pid TWISTED PAIR WITH 7 NRFD P O TWISTED PAIR WITH 6 DAV REN E01 0108 0104 6107 0105 0106 0102 0105 DIOT THE HP IB LOGIC LEVELS ARE TTL COMPAT BLE i e TRUE STATE lt 08 V DC FALSE STATE 2 420 V DC pero FOR POWER SOURCE THAT DOES NOT EXCEED 45 25 V DC ANO REFERENCED TO LOGIC GROUND Figure 8 3 HP IB Connector and Cable HP IB Interface Cables Available HP IB Cable Part Number 4 m 13 2 ft 8 7 Front Rear Panel Connectors As many a 4 HP IB instruments can be connected to the analyzer 15 total instruments in the system The cables can be interconnected in a star pattern one central instrument with the HP IB cables emanating from that instrument like spokes on a wheel or in a linear pattern like boxcars on a train or a combination of the two See Figure 1 5 in Chapter 1 There are certain restrictions that must be followed when interconnecting instruments e Each instrument must have a unique HP IB address ranging from 0 to 30 In a two instrument system that uses just one HP IB cable the cable length must not exceed 4 meters 13 2 ft e When more than two instruments are connected on the bus the cable length to each instrument must not exceed two meters 6 6 ft e The total cable length between all instruments must not exceed 20 meters 66 ft H
120. Hz 5 MHz 60 dB 200 MHz 8 MHz SWR PASSBAND typical La Sed Cost per unit 24 95 Transmission Characteristics gt l Transmission Log Mag 26 8 dB Ref 6 08 38 b2 Off PP TRS dB 1994 412 14 14 34 62 176 7_ Lut p U Lass Start 18 828 Hz Stop 80 008 MHz IN STOCK IMMEDIATE DELIVERY For more information Call 1 800 Filter 7 81 Automating Measurements Statistical Process Control If you collect data on your production process you can use statistics to control and improve your process Ibols such as histograms Pareto diagrams and scatter plots can help you to quantify your process s behavior and identify trends cycles and other unnatural patterns You can purchase computer programs such as SAS and SPlus to perform statistical analyses HP VEE which you can use to control your analyzer also offers some statistical capability You can also use add in macros for popular spreadsheet programs Transferring Files Two example programs GETFILE and PUTFILE demonstrate how to transfer files from the analyzer s mass memory to and from mass memory of an external controller via HP IB Instrument states and program files may be transferred to or from the analyzer s internal non volatile memory MEM internal volatile memory RAM and the internal 3 5 floppy disk INT This can be a convenient method to archive data and programs to a centr
121. IBASIC only Softkey in programs menu This key is used to select how the IBASIC program is saved to disk It can be saved in either binary or ASCII format ASCII Save a program in ASCII format for ease of transportability Programs saved in ASCII format can be read by any HP BASIC computer or instrument running IBASIC bin ary Binary format is specific to this family of analyzers HP 8711C 12C 13C 14C A program saved in binary format is not readable by an IBASIC computer or other instruments running IBASIC Softkey Reference Binary format however is required if you are going to use the LOADSUB keyword See HP 8711C 12C 13C 14C Instrument BASIC U ser s andbook for more information on saving programs grams Softkey in save RecaLL menu Displays menu to rename delete or copy files format disk or memory and change or make directories See Other File Utilities in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in menu This key is used to set up the analyzer for transmission or reflection measurements of filters See Using the Key to Make Measurements in Chapter 3 for more information Fl Softkey in system bandwidth menu This is the narrowest system bandwidth 15 2 available Medium wide is the default system bandwidth See Chapter 5 Optimizing Measurements for information on how system bandwidth can affect your measurements Access Keys S Softkey in marker math menu Calculat
122. ISPLAY Full split display Display trace arke V axis Y axis e Clock E o evio Graticule easurement channel annotation Frequency annotation r annotation arker numbers label state abel mode Clock itle line ines it pass fail text ail icon pass fail indicator X position pass fail indicator Y position ker limits Limit test usly set limits Absolute Off Clock on line 2 Blank Blank 60 60 Off Off Deleted 12 5 Preset State and Memory Allocation CONFIGURE Key Settings continued CAL Active calibration last active cal if valid otherwise default cal Detector zero Autozero Cal kit Type N female System 20 50 ohms Velocity factor 1 0 speed of light Smith chart 20 50 ohms Port extensions Off port extensions 05 Trans port extensions 0s MARKER On off Delta marker state Search Bandwidth search level Notch search level Target search level Tracking FORMAT Format type log mag 1 75 ohms if your analyzer is Option 1 75 ohm test ports 2 See Peripheral State for analyzers with Option 100 12 6 Preset State and Memory Allocation CONFIGURE Key Settings continued AVG Averaging Off Average factor 16 System bandwidth Medium Wide Fault Window Medium Delay Aperture 0 5 minimum 1 Analyzers with Option 100 only SYSTEM Key Settings SAVE RECALL
123. Impedance Magnitude in Chapter 3 for more information Access Keys FORMAT More Format Insert Char Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in IBASIC edit menu Invokes the insert character menu for editing IBASIC programs See the HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook for more information Reference Softkey O ption 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in IBASIC edit menu Invokes the insert line menu for editing IBASIC programs See the Instrument BASIC U ser s H andbook for more information Access Keys svsreM oeriows BASIC Edit Softkey in define save menu When on allows save of instrument state See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys SAVE RECALL Def ine Save Install CC Softkey in update correction constants menu Loads a permanent copy of CC F Disk data from a floppy disk to internal EPROM This must be done after loading rom DISK hew firmware into the analyzer See the Service Guide for more information Access Keys options Service Update Corr Ci Softkey in service menu Displays information about the network analyzer firmware revision and date bootROM version serial number options system impedance and amount of memory Access Keys svsrEM options Service Softkey in the custom colors menu This key only affects the analyzer s internal display This key changes the brightness of the selected display item J Vdues
124. In c ison selecting Mixer as Your device type puts ther alyzer into broadband detectio e enabling frequency Slation measurements This apability allows new users to start making measurements with as few as four keystrokes 3 MEAS The measure keys select the measu s for each channel The analyzer s measurement capabilities include transmission reflection power conversion loss and AM delay Options IDA and 1DBonlyl 4 SOURCE The source keys select the desired source output signal to the device under test for example selecting source frequency range or output power The source keys also control Sweep time number of points and sweep triggering B CONFIGURE The configure keys control receiver and display parameters These parameters include receiver bandwidth and averaging display scaling and format marker functions and instrument calibration amp SYSTEM The system keys control system level functions These include instrument preset save recall and hardcopy output HP IB parameters end IBASIC are also controlled with these system keys 7 The Numeric Keypad Use the number keys to enter a specific numeric value for a chosen parameter Use the ENTER key or the softkays to terminate the numeric entry with the appropriate units You can also use the front panel knob for making continuous adjustments to parameter values while the q and keys allow You to change values
125. N OUT can be read using the SCPI commands 30 OUTPUT 716 DIAG PORT READ 15 1 40 ENTER 716 X or the IBASIC command 30 X READIO 15 1 When the foot switch is open the variable X will be set to 1 When it is closed the variable will be set to 0 Switch debounce is generally not problem due to the relatively slow polling rate of the program Refer to the section titled Analyzer Port Numbers for tables describing the various analyzer ports that you can access using SCPI or IBASIC commands Below are two example programs which shows how to display a message and read the foot switch to control your measurements The first program uses the SCPI DIAG PORT READ query while the second uses the IBASIC READIO function Following is an example program which shows how to display a message and read the foot switch to control your measurements This program is named TTL IO on your Example Programs Disk For an example which uses the IBASIC READIO command refer to the program USER BIT on your IBASIC Example Programs Disk 100 Filename TTL IO 110 120 This program reads the USER TTL IO 130 port and counts how many times a 140 switch connected to the port is pressed 150 7 35 Automating Measurements Operator Interaction DIM Msg 200 INTEGER X IF POS SYSTEM SYSTEM ID HP 871 THEN ASSIGN 8711 TO 800 ELSE ASSIGN Hp8711 TO 716 ABORT 7 CLEAR 716 END IF
126. N and RF OUT connectors to confirm that their dimensions are correct Mating plane Max 0 207 in Min 0 204 in po644 b c Figure 1 6 Maximum and Minimum Protrusion of Center Conductor From Mating Plane Getting Started Getting Started The HP 8712C and HP 8714C are easy to use fully integrated RF component test systems Each instrument includes a synthesized source a wide dynamic range receiver and a built in test set Controls are grouped by functional block and settings are displayed on the instrument CRT This section familiarizes new users with the layout of the front panel and the process of entering measurement parameters into the analyzer ON S 8 KOE 6 AFER WEE 9 5 0000 gana nooo nona 00600 2 po648b Figure 2 1 Network Analyzer Front Panel Features 2 2 Front Panel Tour 1 The CRT Display e analyzer s large CRT displays data markers limit lines Instrument BASIC IBASIC ogramming coda softkey menus and measurement parameters quickly and clearly Refer to Display in Chapter 8 for more i ation e key simpliiias t setups The begin key allows quick and easy election of basic measurement pa ers for a user specified class of devices amp g filters plifiers or mixers For examp en making a transmission measurement selecting ilter as Your device type puts the analyzer into narrowband detection mode maximizing easurement dynamic range
127. OS formatted disk in the disk drive you are using If your disk is not formatted refer to the procedure in Formatting a Floppy Disk located later in this section 2 Press SAVE RECALL Select Disk and press the key that corresponds to the disk where you are going to save data Press Noi 1 RAM Disk to save to the analyzer s internal non volatile memory Nonvolatile means that the information will be retained in memory when the power to the analyzer is turned off This is the default selection volatile me memory Volatile 1 means that the information will be lost if power to the analyzer is turned off o If you have the IBASIC Option 1C2 installed in your analyzer you can configure the volatile RAM disk by pressing the VOL_RAM softkey This softkey will not do anything on instruments without IBASIC o When this key is pressed message appears displaying the current percentage allocation between RAM disk and IBASIC memory Ib change the memory allocation press Mex the new RAM disk allocation o The power must be cycled on the analyzer for the changes in memory allocation to take effect ze then enter Press ternal 3 5 Disk if you are saving to the 3 5 inch disk in the analyzer built in disk drive Only MS DOS format disks can be used ig Men Def ine Save e Press Inst State OFF if you do not want the instrument state saved This will save measurement data only e
128. PAPER ACKNOWLEDGE DATA ren 5432 1 O STROBE ON LINE GROUND AUTO FEED RESET PRINTER SELECT PRINTER PRINTER ERROR View looking into connector Figure 8 4 Parallel Port Pin outs po622b 8 9 Front Rear Panel Connectors RS 232 The RS 232 connector is a rear panel connector used with serial peripherals such as printers and plotters The pin out is shown in Figure 8 5 The connector is a male DB 9 See Configure the Hardcopy Port in Chapter 4 for information on using this port with a printer or plotter SIGNAL SIGNAL DESCRIPTION NAME DataCarrier Detec Receive Data Tramssmtt Data Data Terminal Read Ground 0 V Data Set Ready Request to Send Clear to Send 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Ring Indicator View looking into connector po623b Figure 8 5 RS 232 Connector Pin out 8 10 Front Rear Panel Connectors VIDEO OUT COLOR VGA This rear panel connector provides signals to drive an external VGA compatible monitor The table below describes a VGA compatible monitor and Figure 8 6 shows the pin out for the VIDEO OUT connector looking into the connector Table 8 2 VGA Compatible Monitor Characteristics Resolution 640 x 480 analog red green blue 0 714 V Pixel rate 25 MHz positive 75 impedance Horizontal rate 31 41 kHz 31 84 us Separate TTL signals for vertical and horizontal sync Vertical rate 59 82 Hz 1 The analyzer
129. PCL5 printer in terms of color orientation autofeed and margins See Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in menu Displays menu to define the plotter in terms of x color pen numbers and autofeed See Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in HARDCOPY menu Displays menu to define the printer in terms of color orientation autofeed resolution and margins See Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters in Chapter 4 for more information Limits Softkey Reference D Softkey in save REcALL menu Displays menu to save the instrument state measurement calibration measurement data or combinations Allows choice of saving trace data in ASCII format for output to spreadsheets ASCII format is compatible with Lotus 1 2 3 See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in menu Sets the aperture in Hz or for group delay measurements Softkey in file utilities menu Deletes all files in the current directory Before the files are deleted you will be asked to confirm this selection Also deletes empty directories on DOS disks See Other File Utilities in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in delete limit menu Deletes all of the limit lines in the limit line table Asks for confirmation before deletion occurs
130. Press Cal ON if you want to save the active measurement calibration e Press Data ON if you want to save the measurement data that is displayed on the network analyzer screen 4 68 Using Instrument Functions Saving and Recalling Measurement Results NOTE Note that the 88 State toggle is automatically turned GN when Cad 2 Press Menu Saver Stats to save the instrument state file The filename appears on the screen as STATE STA where is a number the analyzer selects from 0 to 999 3 If you own older model network analyzers HP 8711A HP 8711B 12B 13B 14B and you need your saved files to be recalled on any of these older model analyzers select File Format ble with older model analyzers 4 69 To Save Measurement Data in ASCII Format Using Instrument Functions Saving end Recalling Measurement Results Your measurement data can be saved in an ASCII format that is compatible with many personal computer software packages save the measurement trace as an ASCII file 1 to where you want to save your file See Select the Disk earlier in this section e Lotus 123 format is a two column format that is compatible with many personal computer software packages Column 1 is the frequency point and column 2 is the measured value at that point e Touchstone format is useful for importing measurement data into CAE programs such as Hewlett Packard s Microwave Design System
131. Reader Devices under test DUTS are often labelled with a serial number and part number If the DUT is labelled with this information in barcode form a barcode reader can be used to enter the DUT information into the analyzer or into the computer controlling the analyzer Doing so provides a simple and safe link between the device under test and the measurement data Information such as the operator s name or test station number can also be entered to allow correlation of the devices tested with the test station Connect a barcode reader such as the HP KeyWand HBCK 1210 to the analyzers DIN KEYBOARD connector on the rear panel Once connected the barcode reader will send scanned barcode characters to the analyzer just as if they were typed on a keyboard The barcode characters will be followed by a carriage return The barcode wand and the external keyboard can be connected simultaneously See Using the Analyzer s Title Feature next in this section for more information on using the title feature with a barcode reader In addition to Hewlett Packard s barcode wand other vendors offer products such as cordless barcode readers laser scanner readers barcode label printers barcode fonts for Windows and barcode labeling software Automating Measurements Operator Interaction Data Entry Using an External Keyboard An IBM PC AT compatible keyboard can be connected to your analyzer s DIN KEYBOARD connector and used to quickly and con
132. ST PRES WAI 230 CLS 240 250 Set up the analyzer to measure 3 data points 260 OUTPUT Hp8711 SENS1 SWE POIN3 WAI 270 7 50 280 290 300 310 640 Automating Measurements Automated Measurement Setup and Control Select CW display and sweep OUTPUT Hp87 11 DISP ANN FREQ1 MODECW re oe Hp8711 SENS1 FREQ SPAN 0 Hz WAI Take a single sweep leaving the analyzer in trigger hold mode OUTPUT Hp87 11 ABOR INIT1 CONTOFF WAI Turn on Marker 1 OUTPUT Hp87 11 CALC MARK1ON Count 0 TO TIMEDATE Step from 175 MHz 463 MHz by 6 MHz FOR Freq 175 TO 463 STEP 6 Take a sweep Freq_str VAL Freq amp MHZ OUTPUT Hp87 11 SENS1 FREQ CENT Freq_str OUTPUT Hp87 11 INIT1 WAI Set marker to frequency OUTPUT Hp87 11 CALC MARK X Freq_str Query the marker value OUTPU I Hp8711 CALC MARK Y ENTERHp8711 Response Display the first three numbers in the array Msg amp Freq_str amp amp VAL Response amp OUTPUT Hp87 11 DISP ANN MESS Msg PRINT Msg Count Count l NEXT Freq TI TIMEDATE PRINT Sweeps per second Count T1 TO DISP Sweeps per second Count T1 TO END 7 51 Automating Measurements Automated Measurement Setup and Control Responsive Communication using SRQs Service Requests SRQs are a method by which you can instruct the analyzer to tell your computer program when a condition changes or
133. SWEEP TIME ms cw 1GHz 2GHz 3GHz FREQUENCY SPAN pp617c Figure 5 1 Relationship Between Frequency Span Sweep Time and Number of Points Note the following in the graph above e As the frequency span decreases the sweep time generally decreases e As the number of points decreases the sweep time decreases To View a Single Measurement Channel If you are viewing both measurement channels but only need one you can decrease measurement time by turning one of the channels off Select the channel you wish to turn off with either the or button Then select Meas OFF 5 6 Optimizing Measurements Increasing Sweep Speed To Turn Off Alternate Sweep Alternate sweep is turned off when the analyzer is preset but is automatically activated with some dual channel measurements The alternate sweep feature sweeps and measures one channel at a time By disengaging this feature you increase the sweep speed y 50 bed 1 Press and look at the Alt To Turn Off Markers and Marker Tracking When markers are on time is required to update the marker readouts Turning off markers can reduce sweep cycle time by up to 30 ms When the marker softkey menu is active it too must be updated adding up to 10 ms to the sweep cycle time Press MARKER Off When marker tracking is on the analyzer performs a search after each sweep searches like gt can take 10 to 20 ms per sweep L
134. The number of bytes available for storage are displayed in the upper right hand portion of the disk catalog window after the words Bytes Free 12 14 Preset State and Memory Allocation Save Recall Memory Allocation In addition each directory can only hold a limited number of files or directories The table below shows these limits Table 12 2 Maximum Number of Files and Directories RootDirectory Any Subdirectory Non volatile RAM Disk 128 gt 1000 Volatile RAM Disk 256 gt 1000 If you have more files than will fit in a single directory use additional subdirectories With fewer files in each directory your disk access time will be faster The save recat disk catalog window can display at most nine pages of files with 21 files or directories per page for a total of 189 This means that if you have over 188 files in addition to the parent directory you will not be able to see all of the files However even though you cannot see all of the files using the disk catalog window you can still access them programmatically using SCPI or IBASIC 12 15 Preset State and Memory Allocation Save Recall Memory Allocation Types of Storable Information The instrument states can contain the instrument state calibration data and trace data Inst State Cal Data Save ASCII 12 16 Instrument state Data sufficient to set up the network analyzer The amount of memory used is independent of the number
135. This effectively flattens the phase trace around the active marker You can use this to measure ine electrical length or deviation from linear phase See Electrical De information See Compensating for Phase Shift in Measurement Setups in Chapter 5 for more information on electrical delay Using Instrument Functions Using Markers To Use Polar Format Markers The analyzer displays the polar marker values as magnitude and phase You can use these markers only when you are viewing a polar 25 format The polar format is accessed by pressing P M To Use Smith Chart Markers In Smith chart format markers have a resistive value a reactive value and a complex impedance value For information on interpreting Smith chart values see Measuring Impedance Using the Smith Chart in Chapter 3 4 30 Using Limit Testing Limit testing is a measurement technique that compares measurement data to constraints that you define Depending on the results of this comparison the analyzer can indicate if your device either passes or fails the test Limit testing is useful for real time tuning of devices to specifications When limit testing is turned on pass fail results can be output to the display and also to the LIMIT TEST TTL IN OUT connector on the rear panel See Connectors in Chapter 8 for more information Limit testing is implemented by creating individual flat sloping or single point limits on the analy
136. To Move the Pass Fail Indicator Text and Icon To Tum the Pass Fail Indicator Text and Icon On and Off Using a Marker During limit Entry Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing The limit test pass fail indicator and text can be moved to any position on the display screen Ib move the position of the pass fail indicator 1 Press DISPLAY amp 2 Press Limit X Position and use the front panel knob or the f I keys to position the pass fail indicator along the horizontal axis You can also place the indicator along the horizontal by entering a percentage using the numeric keypad Enter a whole number from 0 to 100 where 0 represents the far left of the display and 100 represents the far right of the display 3 Press L Y Position and use the front panel knob or the f keys to position the pass fail indicator along the vertical axis You can also place the indicator along the vertical by entering a percentage using the numeric keypad Enter a whole number from 0 to 100 where 0 represents the bottom of the display and 100 represents the top of the display You can toggle on or off the pass fail indicator text which contains the measurement channel number and the word pass or fail such as 1 FAIL Text ON off You can toggle on or off the fail icon there is no pass icon only text by pressing DISPLAY Limit Menu Limit Options Limit Icon ON off Pressing the softkey while
137. Value Directivity 4 0 dB Source Match corrected 30 dB Source Match luncorrectedl 15 dB load Match lt 10 dB Transmission Tracking 0110 0 1 dB Isolation 100 to 70 dBm Reflection Tracking 0 05to 0 5 dB 1 Typical values include cables and fixtures Your results will vary depending upon your cables fixturin and connector type 6 29 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Check the Calibration Directivity is a reflection measurement error term Corrected directivity less than 40 dB is expected after calibrations have been performed This is the same value you would measure when measuring a load standard Directivity Log Mag 1 0 0 4dB Ref 70 00 dBC F1 Memory Pe Off dB TANG SOT SR DM ME LN MI a Stan 1 300 000 MHz Start 0 300 MHz Figure 6 4 Typical Directivity Error Term 6 30 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Check the Calibration Source Match Source match is an error term which can be used to determine the magnitude of re reflections from the source port RF OUT Reflection calibrations always correct for source match The two transmission calibration types that will correct for source match are Enhanced Response and Test Set Cal Test Set Cal is only available when using your analyzer with a multiport test set If you are using a multiport test set refer to its User s Guide f
138. able ports 7 40 7 55 Real 9 63 rear panel connectors 10 17 rear panel features 8 2 24 recall fast 7 41 recall from a disk or memory 4 71 7 41 recalling measurements 4 65 recalling states 7 41 7 46 Index 24 receiver damage level 10 9 receiver dynamic range 10 8 receiver input damage level 5 10 receiver input power increase 5 10 receiver inputs 3 4 receiver noise dithering 5 14 spur avoidance 5 15 receiver noise floor reduction 5 11 receiver specifications 10 8 recording keystroke 7 27 redefining softkeys with User 7 22 reduce number of measurement points 5 5 reduce receiver noise floor 5 11 reduce the amount of averaging 5 5 reducing mismatch errors 5 17 reducing trace noise 5 13 2 9 9 64 reference 4 27 reference plane adjustment 5 19 reference position 4 51 Reference Position 2 9 9 64 reference signal 3 4 external 8 5 10 17 reference tracking 4 52 en acking 4 51 4 52 9 64 jeference tracking using limits with 4 44 4 50 reference tracking using markers with 4 50 reflection calibration example 3 25 formula 3 28 Reflection 9 65 reflection calibration 6 13 reflection measurement calibration 3 26 reflection measurements 3 24 29 Reflection Racking 9 65 Refl Port Extension 9 64 renaming a file 4 72 requirements Index 25 and environmental 1 4 Re Save State 9 63 Response 9 66 response and isolation calibrat
139. above 60 dB With marker tracking ON the multi peak notch search will be performed after each sweep NOTE During a multi peak or multi notch search eight markers are always placed on the trace regardless of how many peaks or notches are found The markers that aren t placed on a peak or notch are placed at the far right of the display on the current maximum frequency point A maximum or minimum point is detected whenever an amplitude excursion greater than half of a division occurs The half of a division excursion requirement must be satisfied on both sides left and right of the peak or minimum The maximum or minimum point must be gt 60 dB See Figure 4 8 jue Division X Does Not Meet Peak Search Peak Search Criteria Criteria 618 Figure 4 8 Peak and Minimum Search Criteria 4 17 Using Instrument Functions Using Markers When the maximum or minimum point is at or near either edge of the display the excursion requirement is satisfied by a half of a division excursion on just one side of the maximum or minimum See Figure 4 9 NC NE PM IE DR CIVIL A NM ME IL 2 Division J Both Meet End Peak Criteria 1 Figure 4 9 Peak and Minimum Search Criteria at Display Endpoints Connect a multi pole Elter and press Marker Search More and Multi Peak if measuring a multi pole bandpass filter or M etch if measuring a multi pole notch Elter
140. ace of the printout in mm Minimum setting is 0 00 mm maximum setting is 200 00 mm b in Sets the left margin non printing space of the printout in mm Minimum setting is 0 00 mm maximum setting is 200 00 mm h Sets print width printing space of printout in mm Minimum setting is 80 mm maximum is 500 mm Width is defined relative to the printer It is the dimension at right angle to the travel of the paper Landscape mode is rotated one quarter turn relative to portrait mode Thus in landscape mode print width actually defines the height of the printed image PCL5 PRINT DVERRUN Errors and Page Protection When printing using PCL5 format the printed page s complexity may exceed the printer s ability to create the image and keep pace with the engine printing process If a page is too complex the page might print in parts or only part of the page might print Some print data loss is likely In such cases PRINT OVERRUN message appears in the printer s display To solve this problem some printers have a feature called Page Protection which reserves printer memory for the page image process allowing the printer to create the entire page in memory before physically moving the paper through the printer This process ensures that the entire page will be printed Enable the page protection feature by consulting your printer manual Note some printers require 2 MB of memory or more to support this page pro
141. al large mass storage hard drive These example programs are found on the Example Programs Disk that was shipped with your analyzer and are described and listed in the Programmer s Guide Ib run these programs connect an external controller to the analyzer with an HP IB cable 1 82 Front Rear Panel Front Rear Panel This chapter contains detailed information on various aspects of the analyzer front and rear panel Information on the following can be found in this chapter e Connectors e Display e Knob e Line Power Switch e Display Intensity Control e Disk Drive e Line Module The front panel keys are not documented in this chapter Refer to Chapter 9 for information on a particular front panel key 8 2 Connectors NETWORK ANALYZER REFLECTION PROBE TRANSMISSION RF OUT POWER RF IN po621b Figure 0 1 Analyzer Connectors Front Panel 8 3 Front Rear Panel Connectors LIMIT TEST TTL EXT TRIG PARALLEL VIDEO OUT N OUT N OUT PORT RS 232 COLOR VGA USER TTL EXT REF LAN DIN IN OUT HP IB ETHERTWIST KEYBOARD EXTDET EXTDET POWER CORD Y INPUT X INPUT RECEPTACLE AUX INPUT pp67c Figure 8 2 Analyzer Connectors Rear Panel 8 4 Front Rear Panel Connectors BNC Connectors AUX INPUT EXT REF IN EXT TRIG IN OUT LIMIT TEST ITL IN OUT NOTE This rear panel female BNC connector is for low frequency dc to approx
142. alibration is also for narrowband measurements only For an example of performing a reflection calibration for a transmission measurement refer to Measuring Reflection Response in Chapter 3 Otherwise follow these general steps when performing a transmission calibration 1 Setup the analyzer for your measurement e select Or Ref e enter operating parameters other than the default 2 Press CAL and then one of the following softkeys Reflection Calibration Interpolation Restoring the default calibration recalls error correction arrays that the network analyzer previously generated by an adjustment test and stored permanently in memory This calibration was performed at the factory or during servicing using full band entire frequency span and 401 frequency points It is quick and convenient but not as accurate at narrow frequency spans This calibration is also known as the default calibration A one port calibration prompts you to connect three measurement standards an open a short and a load The analyzer measures each standard across the frequency band you have defined using the number of points you have defined The measurements of these standards are used to remove systematic errors caused by directivity source match and frequency response Widening the frequency span after performing this calibration will invalidate it and restore the default calibration You may narrow the span and the analyzer will interp
143. amplifier and measurement menus suitable for power measurements See Making a Power Measurement in Chapter 3 for an example power measurement Access Keys BEGIN Ampl MEAS 1 Or MEAS 2 Hardkey in SOURCE area Sets the power level of the internal RF source and turns it on and off Also allows setting of parameters for power sweep Softkey in menu This softkey turns on a power sweep mode that is used to characterize power sensitive circuits In this mode power is swept at a single frequency The start and stop power values are selectable under the key This feature is convenient for such measurements as gain compression or automatic gain control AGC slope The span of the swept power is limited to being equal to or within one of the seven pre defined power ranges Power sweep is independent of level Use this function with frequency CW mode only Hardkey in SYSTEM area Pushing this key returns the analyzer to a known state See Chapter 12 for a complete list of preset state default parameters can also be used in the event that your analyzer system locks up or you receive an Unrecoverable error If this should happen cycle the power on the analyzer and press the key several tunes while the analyzer is booting up The key must be pressed at least twice after you hear the double beep Then follow the on screen instructions Resolution Softkey Reference P Softkey in more printer
144. and Plotters in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Select Copy Fort Softkey in character entry menu Adds the character selected by the pointer to the end of a title or file name O ption 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in insert line and insert character menus Adds character or word selected by pointer to an IBASIC program Access Ted svsrEM options BASIC Edit Insert Ling or Softkey in menu Displays menu to select the hardcopy output device and its operating parameters Default settings not affected by preset are HP printer PCL language parallel port Use the front panel knob or arrow keys to highlight the device then press Se NOTE Hardcopy Address applies only to HP IB devices Baud Rate Xon Xoff and DTR DSR apply only to serial devices See Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters in Chapter 4 for more information 9 71 t Key Reference HARDKEY S Softkey in SAVE recat menu Displays menu to select type of disk or memory location to save to or recall from internal non volatile memory internal volatile memory or built in 3 5 disk Also allows configuration of internal non volatile memory with IBASIC Option 1C2 See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information Service Softkey in system options menu Displays menus related to service 20 See the service Guide for more information Softkey in s
145. and its noise floor For a measurement to be valid input signals must be within these boundaries The dynamic range is affected by two factors e input power to the device under test DUT e receiver noise floor To Increase the Receiver Input Power You should maximize the receiver input power to achieve the highest dynamic range You can increase the analyzer s source output power so that the test device output power is within the measurement range of the analyzer Press Leveland enter the new source power level If your test device output power stays within the maximum input limits shown below the receiver compression will be minimized Maximum Recommended Input Power levels Maximum Input Level Narrowband Mode 10 dBm Broadband Mode 16 dBm Remember to not exceed the receiver input damage limit of 23 dBm NOTE The normalization power level may affect the analyzer s dynamic accuracy See Figure 10 1 in Chapter 10 Optimizing Measurements Increasing Network Analyzer Dynamic Range To Reduce the Receiver Noise Floor Receiver dynamic range is the difference between the analyzer s maximum allowable input level and its noise floor Changing System Reducing the system bandwidth lowers the noise floor by digitally reducing Bandwidth the receiver input bandwidth As system bandwidth is reduced more receiver measurements are used per frequency point increasing the sweep time However with system bandwidth reduc
146. and the residual errors are then calculated and can be displayed Using Calibration Check for Analysis and Troubleshoot ing The calibration check feature can be a useful tool to help you troubleshoot poor measurements and to help you determine how often to perform calibrations on your analyzer If you suspect that you may not be making valid measurements you can use the calibration check to confirm that your current measurement calibration is valid or to reveal that it is faulty Using a different set of calibration standards for the calibration check than the ones you used for the initial calibration will help you to rule out the possibility of degraded or faulty cal standards Using Calibration Check Using the calibration check feature can help you determine the optimum to Determine Calibration Interval calibration interval for your analyzer in your particular environment Calibrations can degrade over time due to temperature drift connector wear cable movements etc use the calibration check feature to determine the best calibration interval for your measurements Perform the type of calibration desired 2 Determine the residual errors by doing a calibration check 3 Plot the results to disk or to hard copy for later comparison Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Check the Calibration 4 Compare subsequent calibration checks against the initial one and keep track of the time interval betwee
147. ansmission the reflection port extension delay and the transmission port extension delay are each applied once Electrical Delay Another type of reference plane extension is Electrical Dele accessible from the SCALE key Electrical delay lets you add delay to your current measurement to compensate for phase shift Ib flatten the A response at a certain frequency use MARKER 5 Delay This automatically adjusts the electrical delay to conipensaie for the phase slope at the active marker position Unlike port extension electrical delay does not automatically adjust the applied delay when you switch between transmission and reflection measurements For this reason port extensions are preferred over electrical delay NOTE Reference plane extension only affects narrowband measurements Measuring Devices with Long Electrical Delay When making a narrowband measurement of a device with long electrical delay measured levels can be affected by the rate at which the source is changing frequency This sensitivity is related to the time required for the source signal to travel through cables or devices which are connected between the RF OUT and RF IN ports Since the source frequency is changing rapidly during a sweep a long distance or delay between RF OUT and RF IN will mean that the signal arriving at the RF IN port will be of slightly lower frequency than the RF OUT signal at the same moment in time This effect is
148. are equivalent to pressing softkeys 1 through 7 on the analyzer See Using a Keyboard in Chapter 4 for information on connecting and using an external keyboard Automating Measurements Measurement Setup and Control with Fast Recall Using Fast Recall with a Switch When fast recall is used in conjunction with a switch connected to the USER TTL IN OUT rear panel connector you can cycle through up to seven instrument states in sequence by activating the switch 1 Connect a switch to the USER TTL IN OUT rear panel connector as shown in Figure 7 7 BNC CABLE po699b Figure 7 7 Connect a Switch to the USER TTL IN OUT Connector 2 Make sure the analyzer is configured to use the USER TTL IN OUT connector for softkey sequencing press System Config User TTE Config Sof Step 3 With fast recall toggled to ON press the switch several times while observing the analyzer 4 Notice that with each press of the switch the files are highlighted boxed in succession and that after the last available file has been used the sequence starts again at the top of the softkey menu 7 43 Automated Measurement Setup and Control The production of RF components often involves several steps each step requiring a unique set of instrument settings Likewise the different test configurations at each step may require associated calibrations Requiring the operator to manually enter these sets of parameters or states or to cali
149. asic reflection response measurement In this example a bandpass filter like the one that was supplied with your network analyzer is used Enter the Measurement Parameters Press the following keys on the analyzer NOTE This example measurement uses the default instrument parameters for a reflection response measurement If your particular reflection measurement requires specific parameters such as frequency range source power level number of data points and sweep time enter them now Making Measurements Measuring Reflection Response Calibrate For a Reflection Response Measurement Your analyzer can provide highly accurate measurements without performing any additional user calibrations if certain conditions are met This example describes how to perform a reflection one port calibration A one port calibration uses known standards to correct for directivity source match and frequency response errors in narrowband measurements To perform a reflection one port calibration you will need one of the following calibration kits depending on the nominal impedance of your analyzer HP 850323 HP 85032B HP 850363 HP 85036B HP 85033D HP 85039B NOTE If you are going to be using calibration standards other than the default female type N you must for 50 Q type N female connector calibrations for type N female or type N male 50 Q connector calibrations for 75 Q type N female connector calibrations for type N female or
150. asurement channel 2 use markers 5 through 8 to define the passband and stopband At the end of each sweep this feature calculates the insertion loss and peak to peak ripple of the passband as well as the maximum signal amplitude in the stopband The insertion loss is defined as the minimum point between markers and 2 with respect to 0 dB The peak to peak ripple of the passband is defined as the difference between the maximum and minimum points in the passband as defined by markers 1 and 2 The reject parameter is defined as the difference between the minimum point in the passband and the maximum point in the stopband See Figure 4 14 for an example of an RF Elter stats search 4 25 Using Instrument Functions Using Markers P1 Transmission Log Mag 5 0 dB Ref 25 00 dB CHAN 1 ba off MKR MHz 053 4 1 150 00 E 2 P1 dB 4 26 dB Reject 35 89 dB 200 00 10 4 18 15 3 249 97 45 95 dB 20 4 337 55 40 70 dB Ch1 More 30 Markers A11 Off 35 4 40 1 Marker Functions 45 Marker Abs Search Start 100 000 MHz Stop 350 000 MHz 4 26 Figure 4 14 RF Filter Statistics Function Using Instrument Functions Using Markers To Use Delta A Marker Mode In marker delta mode a reference marker is placed at the active marker position All marker values are then displayed in reference to this delta marker When the amplitude
151. ave signals up to about 400 Hz with reasonable accuracy by placing the analyzer in CW mode with wide system bandwidth Auxiliary Input Characteristics Nominal impedance 0 Accuracy 313 of reading 20 mV Calibrated range 10 v Usable range 15 Max input 15 v Damage Level 15 1 v 3 48 Measuring Group Delay The phase linearity of many devices is specified in terms of group or envelope delay This is especially true of telecommunications components and systems where phase distortion is critical Group delay is a measure of transit time through the DUT as a function of frequency It is approximated by A AfX360 where is the phase difference between two adjacent frequencies Af The quantity Af is commonly referred to as the aperture The minimum aperture is equal to the analyzer s frequency span divided by the number of points minus one and can be entered as a frequency or a percent of span Ib measure group delay correctly the phase difference at a specific aperture must be less than 180 degrees satisfying the following relationship number of points 1 approximate DUT delay lt _ frequency span If this relationship is not satisfied incorrect measurements will occur since the measurement of the phase difference at adjacent points will be undersampled This section uses an example measurement to describe how to calibrate and make a basic phase derived delay group delay measurement In this
152. ay Using the mouse the user clicks on the front panel keys to control the instrument similar to IBASIC keystroke recording For information on VEE including literature and preview disks please call the HP Test and Measurement Call Center at 1 800 452 4844 extension 9141 Outside the U S contact your nearest HP Sales or Service office Refer to Chapter 10 for a table of sales and service offices QuickBasic has been a popular programming language since it runs on PCs It does not offer a rich keyword set as does HP BASIC and is not optimized for instrument control lb control the analyzer via HP IB an HP IB card and driver library must be installed The driver library will provide subroutines such as IOOUTPUT and IOENTER which let you control your analyzer If you are using C or C you will need to link in a driver library to use your HP IB card HP offers a library called Standard Instrument Control Library SICL SICL is available for PCs running Microsoft Windows and using HP s HP IB card SICL is also available on HP series 700 UNIX workstations For LAN communication with your analyzer or are often used Multi threaded programs can be created to allow easy and precise control of many analyzers operating asynchronously This approach maximizes speed and throughput 7 16 Example Programs Automating Measurements Configuring Your Test System The Programmer s Guide contains detailed information on controlling
153. bes methods for changing instrument settings rapidly under program control It then briefly discusses how to synchronize the modihcation of instrument settings with the collection of data and how to use Service Requests SRQs to signal instrument states Finally it describes how to utilize both measurement channels and a feature to automatically start an IBASIC control program For information on techniques that can improve you sweep speed refer to Chapter 5 Optimizing Measurements 7 45 Recalling Instrument States From Disk Automating Measurements Automated Measurement Setup and Control Setting the Instrument State A DUT will often undergo several different tests while at a single test station The analyzer s parameters such as sweep frequencies output power markers and limits must be set to the desired values before each test is done In an automated test system the controlling computer modifies the instrument settings for the operator The analyzer offers several techniques for quickly changing the instrument s measurement parameters e Recall of instrument states from disk The learn string HP IB command LRN e SCPI commands that change specific parameters The analyzer has two built in memory RAM disks Non Vol RAM Disk and Volatile RAM Disk In addition the analyzer has a built in 3 5 floppy disk drive accessible on the front panel A RAM Disk is a block of memory inside the analyzer which you ca
154. brate at each step in the manufacturing process is slow prone to error and costly An automated measurement system can be used to achieve fast and consistent transitions between measurement setups In an automated system the instrument parameters are set under program control The control program can be an IBASIC program running inside the analyzer or be in another language running on an external computer The control program sends SCPI and IEEE 488 commands to the analyzer s HP IB or LAN interface The HP IB commands rapidly change the instrument settings or calibration COMPUTER NETWORK ANALYZER CONTROLLING PROGRAM Learn String Commands LRN SYST SET FULL INSTRUMENT STATE Instrument State a m Single t gt i Porometer t Dota Single Parameter SCPI Corrmands File Transfer Commands MMEM TRANS or FTP SAVE RECALL MMEM LOAD STAT MMEM STOR STAT ANALYZER DISK or 3 5 Floppy e COMPUTER DISK Hard Disk or External Floppy 14 Figure 7 8 Measurement Control 7 44 Automating Measurements Automated Measurement Setup and Control The HP IB interface can also be used to trigger sweeps read measurement values or signal events within the analyzer Most operations that can be done from the front panel can also be done over the HP IB interface See the Programmer s Guide for details This section descri
155. cal load Match Error Term 6 33 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Check the Calibration Transmission Tracking 6 34 Transmission tracking is a transmission measurement error term It is a measure of the corrected THRU standard A typical transmission tracking error is 0 1 dB Most likely this term will be dominated by trace noise P41 Memory Log Mag 0 1 dB Ref 0 00 dB C De Off Start 0 300 MHz Stoo 1 300 000 MHz Figure 6 6 Typical Transmission Tracking Error Term Calibrating far Increased Measurement Accuracy Chock the Calibration Isolation Isolation is a measure of crosstalk between RF signal paths For example there may be leakage between the RF OUT and RF IN signal paths inside the analyzer The isolation term displays the best possible noise floor of a transmission measurement with no external signal path This measurement can be in the range of 100 to 70 dBm gt 1 Memory Log Mag 10 0 dB Ref 80 00 dB C Start 0 300 MHz Stoo 1 300 000 MHZ Figure 6 9 Typical Isolation Error Term Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Reflection Tracking 6 36 Reflection tracking is a reflection measurement error term It is a measure of how well the open or load standards have been corrected A typical reflection error tracking error is 0 05 dB 91 Memory Log Mag 0 1 dB Ref 0 00 dB C D2 Off ijj Sta
156. can enter frequency and limit values using the front panel knob or the 1 GD keys as well as the numeric keypad Figure 4 16 shows limit lines created that dictate the specified shape of a bandpass filter In this example a Elter was connected and tuned to fall within the created limit lines The pass fail indicator gives constant feedback regarding status 4 35 Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing gt 1 Transmission Log Mag 5 0 dB Ref 15 00 dB be off 10 Chi 20 25 30 35 Abs Center 175 000 MHz Span 200 000 MHz Figure 4 16 limit lines 4 36 CAUTION Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing To Create a Single Point Limit Sometimes you may only be interested in the level at one particular frequency In this case you may wish to use a single point limit Using the setup from the previous examples and building on them let s assume that when testing your bandpass filter it is specified that the insertion loss at 174 MHz must be less than 3 dB The following example creates a single point limit at 3 dB at 174 MHz Limit tests are only performed on actual data points mot the interpolated values between When setting a single point limit the limit is actually applied to the closest data point to the frequency of the set limit See Additional Notes on Limit Testing later in this chapter for more information 1 Press Prior Menu Add Limit Add Min Point 2 Press
157. cannot save to a LIF disk e The file format for the A and B model analyzers is different from the new C model format When saving data you can save it either in a format that is compatible with older analyzers infor mation 4 66 Using Instrument Functions Saving and Recalling Measurement Results Saving Instrument Data When you save data to a file the analyzer automatically selects a file name for you Since these names may not be as descriptive as desirable you may change the name of the file after it has bee saved or you can save it to a file name of your choice by using the 8 function See Other File Utilities later in this chapter for information on how to change a file name When saving a file using the Its Save function enter the Ele name in one of the following ways e Use an external keyboard connected to the analyzer s rear panel DIN KEYBOARD connector and type in the filename For information on using a keyboard see Using a Keyboard later in this chapter e Use the front panel knob and 8 each character of the new hlename Then press key to point and select NOTE Refer to Chapter 17 at the end of this guide for information on the analyzer s instrument state memory allocation 4 67 Select the Disk Define and Save Data 1 Press P Using Instrument Functions Saving and Recalling Measurement Results 1 If you are using a floppy disk place a D
158. completed select SYSTEM options IBA 9 To verify your change select BEGIN User BEGIN ON 10 Select softkey 1 which should be labelled Setup 1 This should return you to your correct setup 11 You may save this program as an AUTOST file or other file for later recall Refer to the manual supplement Using HP JBASIC with the HP 871 1C 12C 13C 14C provided in the HP Instrument BASIC U ser s Handbook for more information about editing saving and recalling program files Automating Measurements Operator Interaction Using User Defined When user defined is used in conjunction with a switch connected to Shith IN OUT rear panel connector you can cycle through up to seven softkeys in sequence by activating the switch 1 Connect a switch to the USER TTL IN OUT rear panel connector as shown in Figure 7 6 BNC CABLE SWITCH po699b Figure 7 6 Connect a Switch to the USER TTL IN OUT Connector 2 Make sure the analyzer is configured to use the USER TTL IN OUT connector for press svsrEM OPTIONS g User 8y Auto Step 3 Press the switch several tunes while observing the analyzer 4 Notice that with each press of the switch the softkey labels are highlighted boxed in succession and that after the last available key has been used the sequence starts again at the top of the softkey menu 7 28 Automating Measurements Operator Interaction Data Entry Using a Barcode
159. continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same type and rating T 5A 250 V The use of other fuses or material is prohibited WARNING 8 23 Front Rear Panel The Voltage Selector Switch VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH pp68c Figure 8 13 Voltage Selector Switch location Use a screwdriver to set the line voltage selector switch to the proper position either 110 V or 220 V The power source must meet the following requirements Nominal AC Line Power Setting 115 V 90 to 132 Vac 47 to 66 Hz 230 V 198 to 254 Vac 47 to 66 Hz If the ac line voltage does not fall within these ranges an autotransformer that provides third wire continuity to ground may be used 8 24 Reference key Reference 5 This chapter provides a brief description of each of the analyzer s hardkeys and softkeys This chapter is arranged alphabetically for ease of use 9 2 Softkey Reference Numeric Entries De Numeric Entries Markers number one through eight in the menu Pressing any one of these softkeys makes the marker the active marker and if previously oft turns it on 1n front of the marker number means the marker is the active marker means the marker is not the active marker it may be on or off See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for an explanation of active marker and for more information on using markers 3 5 mm
160. d by the insertion of cables adapters and fixtures into the measurement path Port extension is particularly useful if you are unable to perform a calibration directly at your DUT See Figure 5 2 for this discussion For example you might have a test fixture with type N connectors where you can easily perform an accurate calibration However calibrating at this connector does not remove the electrical length within the fixture The desired calibration reference plane is on the other side of the test fixture where you may have device specific connectors Port extension lets you compensate for this delay within your fixture thereby removing the phase shift that it causes DESIRED DUT REFERENCE PLANE DEVICE SPECIFIC CONNECTORS NETWORK ANALYZER x TYPE N REFLEC TION TRANSMISSION OUTPUT RF OUT RF IN po675b Figure 5 2 Compensating for Test Fixture Delay 5 19 Optimizing Measurements Compensating for Phase Shift in Measurement Setups Port Ex independently to both the reflection port and the transmission port Ib use the port extension feature press CAL More Cal xt son OFF When port extension is turned on you can add delay 1 add between the REFLECTION RF OUT port and your DUT press The iind values that you enter will be applied appropriately to both transmission and reflection measurements When measuring reflection the reflection port extension delay is applied twice When measuring tr
161. d by the velocity factor reciprocal of the dielectric constant Loss Loss is used to specify energy loss due to skin effect along a one way length of coaxial delay The value of loss is entered as ohms nanosecond or Gigohms second at 1 GHz For many applications the loss value can be set to zero without noticeable degradation 6 21 Step 2 Create a Cal Kit ASCII File Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method For further information on calibration kits and standard characteristics determination refer to HP Product Note 8510 5A HP Part No 5954 1559 Create a cal kit ASCII file or edit the one provided on the Example Programs disk Remember that these files are compatible with MS DOS and thus you could use any IBM Compatible PC and a text editor that can modify ASCII files Just be sure to include the line numbers as if it were an IBASIC program The example file CALKIT provided on the Example Programs disk is listed on the next page 6 22 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method When reading the cal kit file the analyzer recognizes only the information after the and ignores everything after a You can add comments after The first line of a cal kit file must contain a with a directly after it No characters are allowed between the and the on the first line ofacal
162. d calibration is performed the analyzer compares the measurement data of known calibration standards to ideal measurement data The network analyzer then calculates the difference between the measurement data and the calibration standard models to create error correction arrays The network analyzer uses the error correction array data to correct subsequent measurement data Ib perform a quality calibration e Use the highest quality standards available and take care of them e Be sure to select the correct cal kit by pressing CAL Cal e Make consistent connections use a torque wrench with 3 5 mm connectors if possible of the standards and e Minimize temperature variations e Minimize movement of cables The Calibration Reference Plane For the most accurate calibrations and measurements it is important that you calibrate at the appropriate reference plane The reference plane is where you will actually be connecting your DUT Most often you will not be connecting your DUT directly to the analyzer s front panel More likely you will be connecting your DUT to some sort of test fixture that 1s connected to the analyzer See Figure 6 3 It is important to calibrate out the effects of the test fixture and its associated cables and hardware Whenever possible connect your calibration standards to the calibration reference plane 6 5 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Measurement Calibration Overview
163. dB of the target value to the right The target value is in reference to 0 dB Press Search Right and notice the marker moves to the first occurrence Left and notice the marker moves to the first occurrence of the target value to the left i or Search Left the marker moves to the next occurrence of the target level If no occurrence is found the message Target not found appears momentarily on the display To Search for Bandwidth Values Using Instrument Functions Using Markers NOTE The bandwidth search function is intended for transmission or power measurements in log mag format only 1 Press MARKER Marker Search Bandwi The bandwidth search feature analyzes a bandpass filter and calculates the bandwidth center frequency and Q see note below for the specified bandwidth level The default bandwidth search level is 3 dB The bandwidth information is displayed in the upper right corner of the network analyzer screen The bandwidth feature puts marker 1 in delta marker mode Delta marker mode is explained later in this chapter NOTE Center frequency is defined as the halfway point between the left and right bandwidth cutoff points Loss is the amplitude of the center frequency marker Q stands for quality factor and is defined as the ratio of a circuit s resonant frequency to its bandwidth Your analyzer calculates Q es the center frequency divided by the bandwidth 2 Press
164. dband Passive 9 12 broadband power measurement Index 4 example 3 30 button box 7 35 C programming language 7 16 programming language 7 16 cabinet dimensions 10 19 cabinet installation 1 17 Cable 9 13 cables interface 4 80 CAL 9 13 cal check directivity 9 22 isolation 9 39 load match 9 44 reflection tracking 9 65 source match 9 75 transmission tracking 9 84 Cal Check 9 13 calibration AM delay 6 16 conversion loss 6 15 enhanced response 6 12 for a reflection measurement 3 25 3 26 for a transmission measurement 3 19 isolation 9 66 normalization 6 10 one port 6 13 reflection 6 13 response 6 11 9 66 response and isolation 6 12 transmission 6 11 when it is necessary 6 7 calibration information to save 4 65 calibration kit sex of connectors 9 13 calibration kits 3 25 calibration saving 4 68 cal kit sex of connectors 9 13 Cal Kit 9 13 cal kit file to create 6 22 cal kits model numbers 3 25 Index 5 cal kit standards downloading 6 18 Cal om GFF 9 13 X 9 14 caution receiver input damage level 5 10 caution definition 11 4 CE mark definition 11 5 Center 2 7 9 14 Centronics interface 10 18 change directories 4 76 Chang Directory 4 76 9 14 changing directories 4 76 channel selecting 2 10 viewing 2 12 characteristics definition 10 2 check operator s or confidence 2 13 19 checking the shipment 1 3 cleaning instr
165. dcopies using If your printer supports PCL5 be sure to select PCLS format under a PCL5 Printer Customizing Page layout Select Copy Pert PCL5 uses HP GL format resulting in very fast high resolution hardcopies PCL5 can result in a speed improvement of up to 10 times compared to using raster formats such as PCL Epson compatible or PCX Since the analyzer measurement speed decreases while performing hardcopy rasterization using PCL5 format will restore your measurements to full speed more quickly Some printers that support PCL 5 include e HP LaserJet 4 5 HP Color LaserJet e HP PaintJet 1200 XL Custom hardcopy output such as 2 or 4 plots per page can be done using a PCL5 printer and IBASIC or SCPI commands lb do this you should 1 Put the printer into HP GL mode 2 Send the printer an HP GL command 3 Perform a hardcopy dump in HP GL format These steps are discussed in detail below Put the printer into HP GL mode In order to send HP GL hardcopy output to your PCL 5 printer you must first instruct the printer to accept HP GL commands On some printers this can be done using the printer s built m menu You can also send the printer a PCL 5 escape sequence to instruct it to accept HP GL This can be done using IBASIC or SCPI commands Refer to your printer manual for details Refer also to the example program titled FAST PRT on the Example Programs Disk This program configures your PCL5 printer
166. derivative of the phase characteristic with respect to frequency If the device under test is a frequency translator the device input and output frequencies will by deiinition be different This generally makes the measurement of the device phase response and therefore group delay very difficult The AM Delay option overcomes this difficulty by using an amplitude modulation technique to measure group delay In this technique a small amount of amplitude modulation is applied to the RF output of the analyzer Scalar detectors are used to detect this modulation both before and after the device under test The group delay can then be calculated from the phase difference between these two signals modulation envelopes Since broadband detection is used the Option 1DA IDB analyzer can measure delay through nearly any device including frequency translators There are several important considerations in an AM delay measurement 1f the device is a limiter or has AGC automatic gain control this will tend to distort or remove the amplitude modulation used for the measurement Any limiting or AGC in the device should be disabled before making an AM delay measurement The broadband detection used for AM delay is susceptible to spurious signals and noise High level spurious signals should be removed with filtering The signal levels at both the reference and test detectors should be kept as high as possible The specified incident power range for both
167. detectors in an AM delay measurement is 10 to 13 dBm If the device input power must be outside this range amplification or attenuation must be used directly before the device If the device output power is outside the 10 to 13 dBm range attenuation or amplihcation must be used directly after the device 3 42 Making Measurements Measuring AM Delay Option 1DA or 1 DB Enter the Measurement Parameters Connect the detectors and power splitter to the analyzer as shown in Figure 3 16 and then press the following keys on the analyzer You may also press the following keys to access AM delay Pressing these keys will result in a connection diagram being displayed on the screen of the analyzer Mixer A M Delay NOTE This example measurement uses the default instrument parameters for an AM delay measurement If your particular AM delay measurement requires specific parameters such as frequency range source power level number of data points and sweeptimel enter them now 3 43 Making Measurements Measuring AM Delay Option 1 DA or 1DB Calibrate For an AM Delay Measurement 1 Connect the equipment as shown N ETWO R K EXT DET EXT DET ANALYZ R X INPUT Y INPUT m l u n ooo ra 000p oo a 5 c 000 CJ o oo ooo On op ooo 0 i1 Replace DUT with POWER through cable or SPLITTER A connect detector directly lt gt
168. difying Display Annotation When you first turn on your analyzer or use the PRESET key to return it to the default condition most of the display annotation is visible You may want to modify or turn on or off some of the annotation to customize the display to your preferences Figure 4 22 shows the display screen and points out the different annotation areas Some of these areas can be modified and all of them can be turned on or off 4 57 Using Instrument Functions Customizing the Display Measurement Y axis Title and Marker Channel Pass Fail Marker Annotation Clock Number Annotation Indicator Annotation Line 1 title goe 1996 09 06 20 33 53 H 40 4 30 LI LI 20 i 1 10 I eem rt ME 1 Eu 1 LI 1 20 LI 30 t 1 1 40 Rel gt 4 Start 0 300 MHz Stoo 360 264 2 Frequency Annotation 21 Figure 4 22 The Display Annotation 4 58 Using Instrument Functions Customizing the Display The following display annotation areas can be modified or turned on or off e Measurement title and clock e Measurement channel annotation e Frequency annotation e Marker annotation e Marker number e Y axis labels e Y axis relative or absolute scale e Limit test Pass Fail text e Limit icon e Limit test
169. duce capital expense e Allow for future expansion with minimal effort e Minimize the space required for a system Figure 7 1 shows a stand alone network analyzer NETWORK ANALYZER D U T po amp 68b Figure 7 1 Stand Alone Network Analyzer 1 6 Stand Alone Analyzers Running IBASIC Automating Measurements Configuring your Test System In this configuration the measurement is controlled by an IBASIC program running inside the analyzer With IBASIC the measurement setup and control can be highly automated reducing the burden on the operator Since the measurement is under programmatic control statistics can be collected in order to monitor your process and quality IBASIC s keystroke recording lets you construct programs quickly without needing to refer to the programming documentation Using AUTOST files the analyzer will load and run your program when power is turned on Since no external computer is required there are fewer system components to purchase maintain connect and synchronize Configure your system as a stand alone instrument with IBASIC Option 1C2 if you would like to e Simplify test system configuration e Allow for future expansion e Minimize the space required for a system e Simplify programming with keystroke recording Use key macros Automate measurement setup and control Simplify measurements Collect data Run application programs on the analyzer 7 7 Automating Measure
170. e baud rate of your device You can set the baud rate to 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 baud If you are sending graphics to the hardcopy device the fastest supported baud rate is recommended 2 Choose between Xon Xoff the default specifies a software handshake and DTR DSR specifies a hardware handshake 4 84 Using Instrument Functions Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters Define the Printer or Plotter Settings You will only have to do this setup once if you make all your hardcopies with the same printing or plotting device Def ins P that only one of these choices is selectable at a time Three procedures follow Use Defining a PCL5 Printer or Defining a Printer if you are using a printer Otherwise go to Defining a Plotter Defining a PCL5 Printer Make the following selections in the analyzer menus m m m 15 91 in 2 Select the type of printer you have either Monochrome or Color 3 Select the orientation of the paper to the information printed either Portrait or Landscape The portrait choice orientates the printout vertically the landscape orientates the printout horizontally 4 f you do not want auto feed active press Auto Feed Off 4 85 Using instrument Functions Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters 5 Press Mor PELS to change the margins and print width Top M Sets the top margin non printing sp
171. e IBM PC AT compatible Print capabilities When you use the analyzer function to dump a graph you don t get the softkey menu that appears on the right hand side of the analyzer display Pressing Shift on a keyboard will dump the current graph along with the current softkey menu 4 100 Using an External Monitor The rear panel VIDEO OUT COLOR connector can be connected to a compatible monitor for enhanced measurement viewing This section describes how to customize the color on an external VGA monitor Refer to Chapter 8 for more information the VIDEO OUT COLOR connector 4 101 Using Instrument Functions Using an External VGA Monitor Customizing Color on an External Monitor Although the analyzer s built in monitor is monochrome you can connect an external color monitor to the analyzer for customized viewing Your analyzer is equipped with a standard VGA compatible connector on the rear panel See Chapter 8 for information on this connector The analyzer s default colors selected by pressing DISPLAY Wore Di It were chosen for optimal viewing of measurement data and text on an external VGA color monitor However you can customize the color of various display items if desired To customize the color on an external display press DISPLAY DISPLAY More Display change by pressing ihe Select Item ee and then using the front panel knob or the keys to select
172. e analyzer to calculate equivalent electrical length Values entered should be less than 1 however the analyzer accepts values from 0 01 to 1 2 Access Keys CAL More Cal Softkey in more CRT adjustment menu CRT timing adjustment for use with external monitors Also affects network analyzer s internal CRT Default setting is 31 84 psec This setting is not affected by an instrument preset See Using an External VGA Monitor in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in more CRT adjustment menu CRT timing adjustment for use with external monitors Also affects network analyzer s internal CRT Default setting is 16 68416 msec This setting is not affected by an instrument preset See Using an External VGA Monitor in Chapter 4 for more information fig CRT Adjust more Softkey in the CRT adjustment menu Changes the vertical positioning of the display on both the internal CRT and an external monitor Accepts whole number values from 1 to 100 with 1 representing as far up as possible and with 100 representing as far down as possible The default value set at the factory and obtained by pressing Restore Defau not affected by an instrument preset See Using an External VGA Monitor in Chapter 4 for more information on using an external display 9 86 Volatile RAM Disk CAUTION Key Reference V Softkey in the cal check menu After a cal check has been performed this key will allow you to display
173. e brightness of the selected color Use the Hue key to select the color Luminance values are expressed as a percentage O to 10055 with O resulting in black and 100 resulting in the brightest color available See Using an External VGA Monitor Access Keys More 01 in Chapter 4 for more information 9 45 HARDKEY So Softkey in more format menu Displays choices for various magnitude units for y axis scale Access Keys FORMAT More Softkey in the directory utilities menu Displays character entry menu for entry of directory name See Ib Use Directory Utilities in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys save recat File Utilities ory Utilities Softkey in menu Compensates for detector drift once when selected Recommended setting with external RF source at detectors to coordinate RF off and zeroing This key is only available when using internal or external broadband detectors Softkey in add max line add min line add max point and add min point menus Adds a marker to the data trace and allows it to be moved to identify trace frequencies and amplitudes Access Keys DISPLAY Limit Menu Add Limit Add Max Li Add Min Line or Add Max Paint or Add Min Point Hardkey in the CONFIGURE area Displays menu to set markers use marker search and delta markers See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in marker functions menu Changes the center frequency to
174. e for absolute output power the network analyzer uses the broadband detection mode and measures the total power of all frequencies present in the transmitted signal B This signal may contain frequencies other than the source frequency such as when the DUT is a mixer This section uses an example measurement to describe how to normalize the data and measure the total output power of an amplifier NOTE Broadband power measurements are only specified for measurements with a start frequency of 210MHz 3 30 Making Measurements Making a Power Measurement using Broadband Detection Enter the Measurement Parameters Press the following keys on the analyzer NOTE This example measurement uses the default instrument parameters for a power measurement If your particular power measurement requires specific parameters such as frequency range source power level number of data points and sweep time enter them now Damage to your analyzer will occur if the receiver input power exceeds 23 dBm or 25 Vdc The analyzer s source cannot significantly exceed this level however if your DUT has gain then attenuation on the RF IN port may be necessary See When to Use Attenuation and Amplification in a Measurement Setup earlier in this chapter for more information CAUTION Making Measurements Making a Power Measurement using Broadband Detection Connect the DUT NETWORK ANALYZER 2 ann
175. e protective conductor inside or outside the instrument is likely to make the product dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited 1 6 Installing the Analyzer Step 2 Meet Electrical and Environmental Requirements If this instrument is to be energized via an external autotransformer for WARNING voltage reduction make sure that its common terminal is connected to a neutral earthed pole of the power supply 5 Install the analyzer so that the detachable power cord is readily identifiable and is easily reached by the operator The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument The front panel switch is only a standby switch and not a LINE switch Alternatively an externally installed switch or circuit breaker which is readily identifiable and is easily reached by the operator may be used as a disconnecting device 6 Ensure there are at least two inches of clearance around the sides and back of either the stand alone analyzer or the system cabinet TWO INCH CLEARANCE No TWO INCH CLEAR ANCE ANALYZER a EDGE BENCH po64b Figure 1 3 Ventilation Clearance Requirements 1 7 Installing the Analyzer Step 2 Meet Electrical and Environmental Requirements 7 Set up a static safe workstation Electrostatic discharge ESD can damage or destroy components Building Gro
176. e selections under the CAL KIT menu e You are using a built in connector type but your standards such as a short have different characteristics than the built in kit uses when performing a calibration e You are using a test fixture The following steps explained later in detail should be performed when defining your own cal kit 1 Determine the standard characteristics for the connector type you plan to use 2 Create a cal kit ASCII file or edit the one provided on the Example Programs Disk NOTE Calibration kit definitions must be in DOS format LIF format is not supported for cal kit definitions 3 Verify performance Determine the standard characteristics for the connector type you plan to use In particular these are the characteristic impedance Zo the delay and the loss These characteristics are common for the four supported types used by the analyzer Additionally the capacitive model parameters CO Cl C2 and C3 are necessary for fully defining the open These electrical characteristics can be mathematically derived from the physical dimensions and material of each calibration standard or from its actual measured response 6 19 Calibrating for increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method About Calibration Standards A calibration standard is a specific well defined physical device used to determine systematic errors Each standard has a precisely known or predictab
177. e setting of the values Any of the values that can be set through the numeric entry pad or the step keys can also be set using the knob However the rate at which the active parameter varies for a given amount of knob rotation is dependent on the parameter that is being controlled 8 16 Line Power Switch NETWORK ANALYZER 0000 0000 LINE POWER SWITCH po626b Figure 9 9 The Analyzer Line Power Switch The line POWER switch turns power to the analyzer to either on or standby 4 The analyzer line POWER switch is located at the bottom left corner of the front panel When set to standby the analyzer circuitry is powered off but a portion of the power supply stays on The detachable power cord is the product s disconnecting device It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument The front panel switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE switch disconnecting device Tip When not using the analyzer leave it plugged in and switched to standby When in standby the analyzer supplies power to the non volatile memory thereby increasing the life of the interna non volatile memory battery 8 17 Front Rear Panel line Power Switch Before turning the analyzer on make sure that it is grounded through the protective conductor of the power cable to a mains power receptacle provided with protective earth contact Any int
178. e specifications can result in improper instrument operation or damage to the analyzer Both outputs are fused with 0 75 Amp fuses which are located on a circuit board on the inside front panel of the analyzer The fuses are plastic bi pin type The replacement HP part number for these fuses is 2110 0424 8 12 REFLECTION RF OUT TRANSMISSION RF IN CAUTION Front Rear Panel Connectors RF Connectors The standard front panel RF OUT connector is a female type N 50 2 connector When Option 1EC is ordered this front panel connector is a female type N 75 Q connector This port outputs the RF signal and also serves as an input for reflection measurements The standard front panel RF IN connector is a female type N 50 connector When Option 1EC is ordered this front panel connector is a female type N 75 connector This port receives the RF signal for internal transmission measurements While 50 Q and 75 Q Type N connectors are similar in appearance they are not compatible 75 Q type N connectors have a smaller center pin Connector damage can result if you attach a 50 Q male connector to a 75 Q female connector lb adapt from 50 Q to 75 Q always use a minimum loss pad e For adapting from 50 Q female to 75 Q female use an HP 11852B Option 004 minimum loss pad e For adapting from 75 Q female to 50 Q female use a standard HP 11852B minimum loss pad 8 13 Display The analyzer display shows various
179. e systematic errors caused by frequency response and crosstalk Transmission Calibration Interpolation This method of calibration is superior to the standard response calibration This calibration prompts you to connect four measurement standards an open a short a load and a through cable The analyzer measures each standard across the frequency band you have defined using the number of points you have defined The measurements of these standards are used to remove systematic errors caused by frequency response and source match Widening the frequency span after performing any of these calibrations will invalidate them and restore the default calibration You may narrow the span and the analyzer will interpolate correction for the narrower span Note that after you have calibrated a appears in the upper right hand corner of the display This C indicates that a user defined cal is in use If you change to a narrower span note that the changes to indicating the analyzer is now interpolating between calibrated measurement points The notation also appears when other system parameters such as power number of points or sweep time have changed 6 12 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method To Perform a Reflection Calibration A reflection calibration removes systematic directivity source match and frequency response errors This type of c
180. e the BASIC keyword DISP to display a small one line message near the bottom of the screen For example DISP Connect device to REFLECTION port 7 20 Automating Measurements Operator Interaction Using Graphics to Create On Screen Diagrams Diagrams showing how to connect devices or perform measurements can be a powerful tool You can draw diagrams on the analyzer s display using the following SCPI commands DISPlay WINDow 1 2 10 GRAPhics command These commands let you draw lines rectangles circles and text onto the screen The number specified in the WINDow part of the command selects where the graphics are to be drawn WINDowl draws the graphics to the measurement channel 1 window WINDow2 draws the graphics to the measurement channel 2 window WINDow10 draws the graphics to the IBASIC display window Using split display you can display the measurement in one half of the screen while displaying a connection diagram in the other half For more details on SCPI graphics commands refer to Using Graphics in the Programmer s Guide If you are using IBASIC you can use the BASIC graphics keywords such as MOVE and DRAW to draw diagrams in the IBASIC window MOVE XLYI DRAWX2 Y2 Since IBASIC s keywords always draw to the IBASIC window you cannot use them to draw in the same window as your measurement Ib draw in the measurement window your IBASIC program must use the standard SCPI commands DISP WIND1 GRAPHICS c
181. ed to disk 12 17 Preset State and Memory Allocation Save Recall Memory Allocation Table 12 3 Sizes of Instrument State Components Item Saved Si ze bvtes File header State header Instrument s ithout memory trace 9580 9580 1 Npts ith 2 memory traces 3580 2 x 6 x Npts ith 1 memory trace par active channel Of each channel active 3 Cal Ipar active channel Off response response and isolation 4 4 enhanced response 4 reflection l Sizes are subject to change with future firmware revisions 2 If the file format chosen is HP 8711A B Compatible the file header size is 788 3 Npts number of measurement points 4 Calpts number of points over which the calibration was performed Memory traces are saved with the instrument state for each active channel in the DISPLAY menu 12 18 Preset State and Memory Allocation Following are some examples state saving instrument state only Size 0 140 9580 9720 Using 201 points with Data Mem on channel 1 channel 2 Size 0 140 9580 6 x 201 10 926 e Using 201 points with Data Mem on channel 1 channel 2 off and saving both the instrument state and data Size 0 140 9580 6 x 201 178 201 12 310 e Same as above but after performing a transmission calibration and saving the calibration Size 0 140 9580 6 x 201 178 6 x 201 2
182. ed to the analyzer s built in disk drive Files saved in HP GL or PCX format can be imported to many personal computer PC applications such as word processors and drawing programs This allows a simple method for screen dumps to be used in reports memos or other communications In addition if you have the LAN option 1 7 you can use FTP to directly get a hardcopy file in either HP GL or PCX format See the LAN U ser s Guide Supplement for information NOTE If you are sending hardcopy to an external device printer or plotter you should have already configured the analyzer for use with the printer or plotter See the previous section Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters for more information 4 9 Using Instrument Functions Printing and Plotting Measurement Results Define the Output The first step in defining the output is deciding which hardcopy components you want in your printout plot or file To select your choice of format press HARDCOPY Define copy and then one of the following selections Figure 4 26 and Figure 4 27 show the available components and formats outputs both the graph and marker table outputs only the graph This selection allows printing of the limit line table as well outputs only the marker table This selection allows printing of the limit line table as well 4 92 Graph Marker Table Chl Using Instrument Functions Printing and Plotti
183. eed Eight Pen Graphics Plotter HP LaserJets LaserJet 4 and 5 support PCL5 for fastest hardcopies All HP De amp Jets HP DeskJet 1200C can also be used to plot HP DeskJet Portable HP PaintJet 3630A Epson printers which are compatible with the FX 86e FX 800 printer control language also called Epson ESC P1 language By definition newer printers that support the Epson ESC P2 language also work 4 79 Using Instrument Functions Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters Select an Appropriate Interface Cable If your peripheral is to be connected to HP IB choose one of the following cables 10833A HP IB Cable 1 0 m 10833B HP IB Cable 2 0 m 10833D HP IB Cable 0 5 m If your peripheral is to be connected via the parallel or serial port on the analyzer choose from the following recommended cables e 2950 Parallel Interface Cable 2 0 m HP C2951A Parallel Interface Cable 3 0 m e HP 2946 Parallel Printer Cable 3 0 m e HP 2947 Parallel Printer Cable 10 m HP C2913A RS 232C Serial Interface Cable 1 2 m HP 245426 Serial Interface Cable 3 m 9F to 25M If your peripheral is to be connected via the LAN port Option 1F7 only on the analyzer you will need a LAN hub and 2 Bther twist cables Choose from the following HP J2610B AdvanceStack 10Base T Hub 8U typical 8 port hub HP J2611B AdvanceStack 10 Hub 16U typical 16 port hub
184. ement make sure you use a cable with the characteristics described in Equipment List Getting Started Performing the Operator s Check Make a Reflection Measurement l Leave the cable connected to the analyzer 2 Press MEAS 1 Reflection SCALE Enter 3 Verify that the data trace falls completely below 16 dB See Figure 2 8 for a typical result bl Reflection Log Mag 10 0 dB Ref 0 00 dB D2 Off Results must fall below this line EE Start 0 300 MHz Stop 3 000 000 MHz po654b c Figure 2 8 Verify Reflection Measurement 4 Disconnect the cable and connect a known good load to the RF OUT port as shown in Figure 2 9 2 17 Getting Started Performing the Operator s Check NETWORK ANALYZER ca ce c c3 oO C3 Figure 2 9 Connect the load 5 Verify that the data trace falls below 30 dB If the data trace is off the moves up onto the screen 2 18 Getting Started If the Analyzer Fails the Operator s Check First repeat the operator s check using a different cable and load to eliminate these as a possible cause of failure If your analyzer does not meet the criteria in the operator s check your analyzer may need adjustment or servicing Have a qualified service technician check the instrument or contact any Hewlett Packard Sales or Service Office for assistance Refer to Table 10 1 in Chapter 10 for t
185. ement channel is always saved in nonvolatile battery backed memory and will be used the next time the analyzer is preset see note below or turned on See Chapter 6 for information on saving calibrations to the analyzer s internal memory the analyzer s random access memory or to a floppy disk NOTE Changing sweep frequencies land other source parameters may affect your calibration See Chapter 6 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy for more information 3 20 Making Measurements Measuring Transmission Response Connect the DUT NETWORK ANALYZER a ooon naaa 0000 0000 DEVICE UNDER TEST IN po612b Figure 3 5 Equipment Setup For e Transmission Response Measurement Making Measurements Measuring Transmission Response View and Interpret the Transmission Measurement Results 1 To view the entire measurement trace on the display press SCALE Aut le 2 Ib interpret the transmission measurement refer to Figure 3 6 or your analyzer s display if you are making this measurement on your instrument a The values shown on the horizontal axis are the frequencies in MHz The values shown on the vertical axis are the power ratios in decibels dB of the transmitted signal through the device divided by the incident power Ib display the result in logarithmic magnitude format designated by Log Mag at the top of the
186. ement is used to remove systematic frequency response errors Widening the frequency span after performing this calibration will invalidate it and restore the default calibration You may narrow the span and the analyzer will interpolate correction for the narrower span Refer to Measuring AM Delay in Chapter 3 for more information about AM delay measurements 6 16 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method To Perform a Calibration With Non Standard Connectors When using a calibration kit other than one that is compatible with the standard type N female connectors cal kit model number HP 85032B E for 50 Q analyzers or HP 85036B E for 75 Q analyzers you can either select a connector type that is stored in the analyzer or input your own cal kit definitions The following table shows the connector types that are stored in the analyzer along with the appropriate cal kit model number Connector Type Cal Kit Type N Im 50 Qj 85032B E Standard 50 Q Type N tm 175 QI HP 85036B E Option 1EC 75 HP 85039A Option 1EC 75 HP 850330 Standard 50 Analyzer Type Type F 9 3 5 mm To select the connector type by pressing Cal Kit and then the connector type applicable to your measurement If you are calibrating with type F connectors you must follow the procedure in the 85039A Calibration Kit User Information For other connecto
187. emory or to a DOS formatted disk in the analyzer s built in 3 5 disk drive Instrument State Cal Data Instrument state settings consist of all the stimulus and response parameters that set up the analyzer to make a specific measurement including markers limit lines memory traces and user defined calibrations Instrument state information is saved and recalled for both measurement channels The measurement calibration information is the measurement correction data that the analyzer creates when you make a calibration Measurement calibration information is saved and recalled for both measurement channels The measurement data consists of the actual measurement data trace You can save any combination of the above three and recall them to be displayed on the network analyzer You can also dump the measurement channel data to an ASCII format file that you can use for graphing and manipulation in spreadsheets and CAE programs NOTE When saving calibration information the instrument state settings will also be automatically saved 4 65 Using Instrument Functions Saving and Recalling Measurement Results Special Note for HP 8711A HP 8711B 12B 13B 14B Owners If you own one of these older model analyzers there are some compatibility issues you should be aware of e A and B model analyzers allowed you to save to a LIF formatted floppy disk Your C model analyzer allows you to read from a LIF disk but you
188. ence 5 Spur Avoid Softkey in spur avoid options menu If this option is selected the analyzer switches between the default and an alternate configuration during a sweep to avoid spurs NOTE Sweeptime usually increases when this option is selected See Reducing Trace Noise in Chapter 5 for more information The measurement calibration must be performed with the same spur avoid option used in the measurement your results may be invalid Access Keys MENU Spur Avoid Opt ions opur Avoid Softkey in source MENU Displays selections for spur avoidance dither spur Op SEM T avoid or none Option 100 only Softkey in reflection or cable menu Sets up the analyzer to perform structural return loss SRL measurements See your Option 100 User s Guide Supplement for information Stack Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in utilities menu 2 Access Keys svsreM options IBASIC Utilities 5 Start Softkey two menus and HARD COPY 1 In menu sets the start frequency of source Minimum frequency is 300 kHz When start is selected the other frequency parameter is stop See Entering Measurement Parameters in Chapter 2 for more information 2 In HARD COPY menu starts print or plot as set in select copy port menu See Printing and Plotting Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in secure menu See the HP Instrument BASIC User s Handboo
189. engthy can add over 100 ms to each sweep l Press Marker Search and look at the Trac Softkey 2 If the word ON is in capital letters toggle the softkey to the OFF position g on OFF 5 7 Optimizing Measurements Increasing Sweep Speed To Turn Off Spur Avoidance When spur avoidance is on preset default is off the analyzer breaks each sweep into segments Between sweep segments the analyzer stops and changes internal frequencies to move mixing products Since the analyzer sweep is not interrupted when this feature is off turn off spur avoidance to increase sweep speed Avoid softkey 2 If the Non Avoid key is highlighted with box around it press the key NOTE If Spur Avoid must be used in your measurement set the start frequency as high as possible to obtain the fastest possible sweeps 5 8 Optimizing Measurements Increasing Sweep Speed To Avoid Frequency Bandcrossings by Minimizing the Span HP 8714C only Sweep time is increased when the analyzer encounters a bandcrossing point The frequency bandcrossing points are approximately 1900 MHz 2310 MHz 2620 MHz Press and then change the start frequency stop frequency or span to avoid sweeping through these band crossing points when possible 5 9 CAUTION Increasing Network Analyzer Dynamic Range Receiver dynamic range is the difference between the analyzer s maximum allowable input level
190. ent Accuracy Measurement Calibration Overview Frequency response errors transmission and reflection tracking are errors that are a function of frequency Isolation errors result from energy leakage between signal paths In transmission measurements this leakage is due to crosstalk In reflection measurements it is due to imperfect directivity Mismatch errors result from differences between the DUT s port impedance and the analyzer s port impedance Source match errors are produced on the source network analyzer RF OUT side of the DUT load match errors on the load network analyzer RF IN side If the DUT is not connected directly to the port the mismatch errors due to cables adapters etc are considered part of the source or load match errors NETWORK ANALYZER po642b Figure 6 2 Mismatch Errors The analyzer has several methods of measuring and compensating for these test system errors Each method removes one or more of the systematic errors using an equation called an error model Measurement of high quality standards short open load through allows the network analyzer to solve for the error terms in the error model The accuracy of the calibrated measurements is dependent on the quality of the standards used for 6 4 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Measurement Calibration Overview calibrating Since calibration standards are very precise great accuracy is achieved When a user define
191. ent Configurations from the Key 346 DISK ACCESS mi i Ge ods we eR Grass ey CHR 4 74 4 2 Typical Print Times 4 96 5 1 Relationship Between System Bandwidth and Sweep Speed 5 4 6 1 Calibration Types 6 9 6 2 Calibration Check Error Terms 6 27 7 1 Keyboard Template Definition 7 33 7 2 Writeable Ports 7 39 7 3 Readable Ports 7 40 7 4 Writeable Ports 7 55 7 5 Readable Ports 7 55 1 6 Parallel PORC PIS uu E oem s Rs Ae 7 57 8 1 General Bus Management Lines 2 8 8 8 2 VGA Compatible Monitor Characteristics 8 11 10 1 Hewlett Packard Safes and Service Offices 10 24 12 1 Disk Capacities 12 14 12 2 Maximum Number of Files and Directories 12 15 12 3 Sizes of Instrument State Components 12 18 Contents 13 Installing theAnalyzer Installing the Analyzer This chapter will guide you through the four steps needed to correctly and safely install your network analyzer The four steps are 1 Check the Shipment 2 Meet Electrical and Environmental Requirements 3 Check the Analyzer Operation 4 Configure the Analyzer 1 2 Step 1 Check the Shipment After you have unpacked your instrument it is recommended that you keep the packaging materials so they may be used if yo
192. ent is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shah not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material For safety and regulatory information see Chapter 11 For warranty and assistance information see Chapter 10 This manual documents analyzers with firmware revisions C 04 50 and above Some features will not be available or will require different keystrokes in analyzers with earlier firmware revisions For full compatibility you can upgrade your firmware to the latest version Contact your nearest Hewlett Packard sales or service office for information ExcelTM is a product of Microsoft Corp Lotus 1 2 3 are U S registered trademarks of Lotus Development Corporation Microsoft is a U S registered trademark of Microsoft Corp QuickBasic is a product of Microsoft Corp Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp Portions of the software include source code from the Info ZIP group This code is freely available on the Internet by anonymous ftp asftp uu net pub archiving zip unzip51 tar Z and from CompuServe asunz51 zip in the IBMPRO form library 10 data compression Copyright Hewlett Packard Company 1996 1997 1998
193. er frequency range and number of points are the same the location where your desired file exists 2 If necessary change directories to the directory that contains the desired file as described in To Use Directory Utilities in the next section 3 Press Prior Menu and turn the front panel knob to move the highlighted bar to the file you want to recall 4 Press Recall State to recall the desired file to the network analyzer NOTE Refer to Measurement Setup and Control with Fast Recall in Chapter 7 for information on using the analyzer s fast recall feature to quickly recall often used instrument states 4 71 To Rename File Using Instrument Functions Saving and Recalling Measurement Results Other File Utilities 1 Press save RECALL Select Disk and press the key that corresponds to the disk where the desired file is located 2 Use the front panel knob to move the highlighted bar to the file you want to rename 3 Press 4 Use the B key repeatedly or press Clear current filename from the analyzer screen 5 Enter the new filename in one of the following ways e Use an external keyboard connected to the analyzer s rear panel DIN KEYBOARD connector and type in the new filename For information on using a keyboard see Using a Keyboard later in this chapter e Use the front panel knob and Select Character key to point and select each character of the new filename Then press E
194. er 4 for detailed information on using limit lines Access Keys DISPLAY Limit Menu Add limit Softkey in the menu that turns off all of the markers the delta marker and marker tracking on the active measurement channel See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for detailed information on using markers Formats the real time internal clock to display the first three letters of the month rather than a number for example Mar for March instead of 03 Cle Softkey in menu When on alternate sweep allows operation with different instrument states on its two displayed measurement channels When on the settings of the two measurement channels can differ frequency span detection option type number of points system bandwidth trigger sweep time When off the preceding settings match Note some settings such as power level always match AM Delay Options IDA and IDB only Softkey in mixer menu and or menus Used to measure AM delay See Measuring AM Delay in Chapter 3 for more information Access Keys BEGIN Mixer or or Softkey Reference A Softkey in BEGIN menu Displays menu of measurements suitable for amplifier measurements transmission reflection and power Softkey in define graph menu When annotation is on printed or plotted ON aff hardcopies will contain screen annotation such as the marker readout that T appears in the upper right corner of the display When off the screen annotation i
195. eristics General Characteristics Front Panel Connectors Rear Panel Connectors Environmental Characteristics Warranty Limitation of Warta ty Exclusive Remedies Hewlett Packard Sales and Semis Offices 11 Safety and Regulatory Information Safety Information Warnings Cautions Statement of Compliance Cleaning Instructions Shipping Instructions Instrument Markings Regulatory Information Notice for Germany Noise Decl ratiof Declaration of Conformity 12 Preset State and M emory Allocation Preset and Peripheral States Preset State Do Peripheral State Volatile Settings Save Recall Memory Allocation Types of Storage Disks Types of Storable Information How to Determine the Size of Disk Files Memory Usage Notes Contents 8 12 2 12 2 12 8 12 13 12 14 12 14 12 16 12 17 12 19 Figures 1 1 Voltage Selector Switch Location 1 2 Protective Earth Ground 1 3 Ventilation Clearance Requirements 1 4 Analyzer Rear Panel Line Module and Selected Connectors 1 5 HP IB Connection Configurations 1 6 Maximum and Minimum Protrusion of Center Conductor From Mating Plane vu sided ee X Ik Network Analyzer Front Panel Features Connect the Filter to the Analyzer Reference Positions Both Measurement Channels Active s Sp Display stipe tul a gen a utes eos
196. erruption of the protective grounding conductor inside or outside of the analyzer or disconnection of the protective earth terminal can result in personal injury WARNING 8 18 Display Intensity Control NETWORK ANALYZER T a E co qd ca ooo cC 200 C3 CJ O c3 cacara3 pz B DISPLAY INTENSITY CONTROL po627b Figure 8 9 Display Intensity Control The intensity control adjusts the brightness of the display 8 19 Disk Drive DISK DRIVE gt O ogo ca g c3 rj ooo o c3 ooo CI On oo ooo On oo coon UJ 2 35 A NETWORK ANALYZER Figure 8 10 Disk Drive po628b The built in 3 5 inch disk drive offers permanent information storage capacity You can use the disk drive to save and recall instrument states and IBASIC programs In conjunction with IBASIC Option 1C2 it allows the analyzer to enter a known state or an automated routine at power on The disk drive recognizes double sided 3 5 inch disks formatted in DOS and will utilize both high density HD disks 1 44 MB and 720 KB disks The analyzer s firmware and calibration constants can be updated when necessary using the appropriate disk in this drive Refer to the HP 8711C 12C 13C 14C Service Guide for more information 8 20 WARNING
197. ersion Loss in Chapter 3 for more information Access Keys BEGIN Mixer or MEAS 1 or MEAS 2 Softkey in file utilities menu Used to copy files See Other File Utilities in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys SAVE recat File Utilities Softkey C Softkey in file utilities menu Used to copy files See Other File Utilities in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys save RECALL Fi Utilities y to Softkey in copy file menu Used to select the analyzer s built in disk drive as diim y the destination drive for copying of files Displays character entry menu to 15 rename file if desired prior to copying Access Keys _ save_RECALL Fi lities Copy or Softkey in copy file menu Used to select the analyzer s internal non volatile RAM as the destination drive for copying of files Displays character entry NonVol RAM menu to rename Ele if desired prior to copying Access Keys savE recatt File Utilities Copy File or Files Copy to Softkey in copy file menu Used to select the analyzer s internal volatile RAM as the destination drive for copying of files Displays character entry menu to rename Ele if desired prior to copying Access save File Utilities Copy File or Copy A11 Files CRT Softkey in system configuration menu Displays menu to set external CRT Adjust position and timing paramete
198. ervice menu Displays menu of service functions See the Service Guide for details Softkey in the system configure menu Displays menu to set real time internal clock of network analyzer and its format m Config Access Keys system options Set Day Softkey in set clock menu Use this key to set the day of the month Access Keys _ system options Sy Softkey in set clock menu Use this key to set the hour value on the clock Access Keys system OPTIONS System Config set Clock HARDKEY 8 S Softkey in set clock menu Use this key to set the month When selecting the month you will always input a number that corresponds to the month desired If the clock format is set to alpha however the displayed month will be a three letter abbreviation such as Mar for March Access Keysi System C Softkey in define plotter menu Displays set pen numbers menu to assign pen numbers to items to be plotted like traces graticule etc In color setting different items can be plotted with different pens In monochrome setting all items are printed with the same pen See Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in reference tracking menu Allows you to identify a particular frequency as a point of interest After the frequency point is set and frequency tracking is turned on by pressing Track Freq
199. es the flatness of a user defined trace segment See Ib Use Marker Math Functions in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys MARKER Marke Hardkey in the CONFIGURE area Pressing this key displays a menu of choices for the display format of your measurement The choices available are Log Mag Lin Mag SWR Delay Phase Smith Chart Polar Real Imaginary and Impedance Magnitude For more information on each of these choices see its entry in this chapter 3 5 Disk Format Disk Menu CAUTION Vol RAM CAUTION Softkey Reference F Softkey in format disk menu Formats a disk in the internal disk drive in DOS format See Formatting a Floppy Disk in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in file utilities menu Displays format disk menu to select disk Disk can be internal non volatile memory internal volatile memory or built in 3 5 disk See Formatting a Floppy Disk in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in format disk menu Formats the internal non volatile RAM disk Formatting the internal non volatile RAM disk erases all existing files and directories on the disk Access Keys save recat File Utilities Format Disk Menu Softkey in format disk menu Formats the internal volatile RAM disk Formatting the internal volatile RAM disk erases all existing files and directories on the disk Hardkey in SOURCE area Displays the frequency menu which allows you
200. et condition reducing the averaging factor or turning it off altogether will increase the analyzer s measurement speed Averaging requires multiple sweeps which increases measurement time Turning off averaging and using a narrower system bandwidth may produce faster results l Press Avg Factor and enter an averaging factor that is less than the value displayed on the analyzer screen and press ENTER 2 f you want to turn the averaging off press To Reduce the Number of Measurement Points Ib reduce the number of measurement points press MENU of Points and use the front panel knob the fr keys or the numeric keypad to enter the reduced number Generally as the number of points is decreased so is the sweep time However other factors will affect the sweep time such as e using frequency bands that contain very low frequencies below approximately 20 MHz e the number of band crossing points encountered in a sweep at approximately 1900 MHz 2310 MHz and 2620 MHz HP 8714C only e if the MHz msec rate is above the maximum rate at which the source can be swept The following graph shows an example of the relationship between the number of points frequency span and sweep time This graph was created with data from a setup on an HP 8714C using a center frequency of 1500 MHz and a system bandwidth setting of medium Optimizing Measurements Increasing Sweep Speed 200 00 100 00
201. et measurements NOTE Phase derived delay measurements can benefit from the noise reduction techniques discussed in Chapter 5 3 54 Measuring Impedance Using the Smith Chart The amount of power reflected from a device is directly related to the impedances of both the device and the measuring system Each value of the complex reflection coefficient p uniquely defines a device impedance for example p 0 only when the device impedance and the system impedance are exactly the same The Smith chart is a tool used to map the complex reflection coefficient p to the DUT s impedance In a Smith chart the complex impedance plane is reshaped to form a circular grid from which the resistance and reactance can be read See Figure 3 23 for more information on the Smith chart Marker features on the analyzer display the resistance and reactance in units of ohms and the equivalent capacitance or inductance in units of farads or henrys This section uses an example measurement to describe how to measure the input impedance of a filter 3 55 Making Measurements Measuring Impedance Using the Smith Chart Enter the Measurement Parameters Press the following keys on the analyzer NOTE This example measurement uses the default instrument parameters for a reflection measurement If your particular measurement requires specific parameters such as frequency range source power level number of data points and sweeptime enter them
202. ewlett Packard manufactures HP IB extender instruments Models HP 37204A and HP 37204B that overcome the range limitations imposed by the cabling rules These extenders allow twin pair cable operation up to 1 km 3 280 ft and telephone modem operation over any distance HP Sales and Service Offices can provide additional information on the HP IB extenders Table 8 1 General Bus Management lines Mnemonic Description Attention Controls whether the bus is in Command Mode TRUE Data Mode FALSE Interface Clear Initializes the interface to an idle state no activity on the bus Service Request Alerts the Controller to a need for communication Remote Enable Enables devices to respond to Remote Program Control when addressed to listen End Or Identify Indicates last data byte of multibyte sequence also used with to parallel poll devices for their status bit 8 8 Front Rear Panel Connectors PARALLEL PORT This rear panel connector is used with peripherals with parallel interface such as printers and plotters The pin out is standard IBM PC compatible Centronics interface using a female DB 25 connector as shown in Figure 8 4 pins are ESD protected data and strobe pins have 2200 pF capacitors voltage levels are TTL compatible output pins can source 15 mA and sink 24 mA See Configure the Hardcopy Port in Chapter 4 for information on using this port with a printer or plotter OUT OF
203. existing file will not be written over and then use the keyboard to type in mixer 5 Press ENTER on the keyboard or the analyzer and the current instrument state will be saved to a file titled mixer Using Instrument Functions Using a Keyboard Front Panel Control Using a Keyboard A keyboard template was supplied with your shipment If you place the template on your keyboard you will always have the following information on hand Should you misplace your keyboard template you can reorder with HP part number 08712 80028 You can use the key combinations below with a keyboard connected to the rear panel of the analyzer to activate the indicated front panel hardkeys and softkeys Softkeys are the eight unlabeled keys to the right of the display They are numbered from one top through eight bottom Keyboar Front Panel Key Equivalents Keyboard Front Panel Equivalents Function Key Cu cer s s Tn ema Using Instrument Functions Using a Keyboard For example to select measurement channel 1 as the active channel on the keyboard press with t1 To preset the network analyzer with the keyboard press with In each case hold down the first key as you press the second key Ib select Softke amp y 1 press alone In case of difficulty make sure that the keyboard is connected to the DIN KEYBOARD connector on the rear panel The keyboard must b
204. ey in file utilities menu Displays menu to change make or remove directories on DOS disks See Ib Use Directory Utilities in Chapter 4 for more information Utilities Access Keys save recat File Utilities Softkey Reference D q Softkey in menu Selects the resolution of the displayed frequency resolution as MHz kHz or Hz For example a frequency of 1 234 567 Hz can be displayed as 1 MHz note rounding down 1 235 MHz note rounding up or 1 234 567 MHz Default is kHz Hardkey in CONFIGURE area of front panel Displays menu with selections Dither CAUTION concerning type of data to be displayed split or full screen title and limit lines Option 100 only Softkey available under the MENU key and the add max point and add min point menus Used to perform fault location measurements See your O ption 100 U ser s Guide Supplement for information Softkey in spur avoid options menu When selected shifts spurs which may be visible in low level measurements See Reducing Trace Noise in Chapter 5 for more information The measurement calibration must be performed with the same spur avoid option used in the measurement or your results may be invalid Access Keys Spur Avoid Options Softkey in the cal check menu Initiates a calibration check See Chapter 6 for more information on using cal check Access Keys Cal Check R Softkey in select copy port menu A hardware handshake
205. falls on the reference line Note that the y axis is now a relative scale with all amplitude values referenced to the reference line Also note that a small arrow appears underneath the measurement trace at the point where the frequency of interest intersects the reference line 4 lb turn reference tracking off press SCALE Ref erence ng Off The y axis reverts to its previous scale format and the reference level is readjusted so that the measurement trace is placed correctly on the display for absolute measurements 4 52 Customizing the Display The analyzer s display can be customized in several ways e You can choose to view one or both measurement channels using the split display feature e You can turn on or off features such as the display graticule and limit lines e You can also modify and or turn on or off most of the display annotation e You can expand the measurement display to the full screen size and eliminate all annotation except marker annotation Refer to Displaying Measurement Results in Chapter 7 for more information on customizing the display 4 53 Using Instrument Functions Customizing the Display Using the Split Display Feature When using both measurement channels you can choose to either view both of them simultaneously on one full size display or use the split screen feature To use the split display feature press M y Figure 4 20 shows a split display
206. for more information Access Keys or Detection Options Softkey in menu Enters the averaging factor number in powers of 2 Acceptable values are 1 2 4 8 16 32 and 64 The default averaging factor is 16 the maximum is 64 See Reduce the Receiver Noise Floor in Chapter 5 for more information on how averaging works 9 8 Softkey Reference Softkey in menu Toggles the averaging function on and off Averaging reduces random noise by averaging the measurement data from sweep to sweep on OFF See Ib Reduce the Receiver Noise Floor in Chapter 5 for more information on how averaging works Hardkey in the CONFIGURE area Displays the menu that allows selection of averaging parameters as well as system bandwidth and delay aperture selections See To Reduce the Receiver Noise Floor in Chapter 5 for more information on how averaging works 9 9 Reference HARDKEY Softkey in the narrowband internal menu Selects tuned receiver transmission measurement of input B power transmitted to RF IN port See Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer in Chapter 3 for more information on input B Access keys MEAS 1 or MEAS 2 Detec Softkey in broadband internal menu Selects diode detector measurement of input B power transmitted to RF IN port This is the power measurement detector See Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer in Chapter 3 for more
207. for some serial devices Toggles with Xon Xof Access Keys HARD COPY Selec 9 23 Edit Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in IBASIC menu Displays the IBASIC edit menu and a rudimentary word and character editor See the HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook for more information Access Keys SYSTEM options IBASIC Softkey in limit line menu Displays menu to change the frequency or amplitude of previously entered limits or add a data trace marker Access Keys DISPLAY Limit Menu Softkey in marker limit menu Displays a menu to set the maximum and minimum limits on the selected marker limit test See Ib Use Marker Limit Functions in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys DISPLAY Limit Mkr Limits Softkey in the menu Adjusts the electrical delay to balance the phase of the DUT It simulates a variable length lossless transmission line which can be added to or removed from a receiver input to compensate for interconnecting cables etc This function is similar to the mechanical or analog line stretchers of other network analyzers Delay is annotated in units of time with secondary labeling in distance for the current velocity factor Softkey in add max line and add min line menus Sets the end or stop frequency of a limit line See Using Limit Lines in Chapter 4 for more information on limit lines Add Min Line HARDKEY So End Softkey in add max line and add min l
208. g indicator only displays that channel s averaging factor 5 12 Reducing Trace Noise You can use three analyzer functions to help reduce the effect of noise on the data trace e activate measurement averaging e reduce system bandwidth e eliminate spurious responses To Activate Averaging for Reducing Trace Noise The analyzer uses weighted running average for averaging The noise is reduced with each new sweep as the effective averaging factor increments 2 Enter a value followed by ENTER 3 Press Average ON off Averaging is explained more fully in the previous section 5 13 Optimizing Measurements Reducing Trace Noise To Change System Bandwidth for Reducing Trace Noise By reducing the system bandwidth you reduce the noise that is measured during thesweep However the decreased bandwidth may slow down the sweep While averaging requires multiple sweeps to reduce noise narrowing the system bandwidth reduces the noise on each sweep See the previous section for a more detailed explanation of system bandwidth Press Narrower system bandwidths cause longer sweep times When in auto sweep time mode the analyzer uses the fastest sweep time possible for any selected system bandwidth Auto sweep time mode is the default analyzer setting To Eliminate Receiver Spurious Responses Spurious responses are undesirable signals that result from various internal mixing products The analyzer has two features
209. g the open as follows CO is used to enter the CO term which is the constant term of the cubic polynomial and is expressed in Farads Cl is used to enter the Cl term expressed in F Hz Farads Hz 6 20 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method C2 is used to enter the C2 term expressed in F Hz C3 is used to enter the term expressed in F Hz Short Short defines the standard type of a short for calibrating reflection measurements Load Load defines the standard type of a load used for calibrating reflection measurements Through Through defines the standard type as a transmission line of specified length for transmission calibrations For all four standard types the Zo characteristic impedance Delay and Loss must be set NOTE When creating a cal kit file if a standard is not defined the currently defined values for that standard will be retained The best practice is to define all of your standards and characteristics when loading in a new cal kit Zo Zo is usually set to the system characteristic impedance usually either 50 or 75 ohms Delay Delay is equivalent to a uniform length of transmission line between the standard being defined and the actual measurement plane The DELAY is entered as the one way travel time from the measurement plane to the standard in seconds Delay can be determined from the precise physical length of the standard multiplie
210. ge screen external monitor The following sections explain how to use these features and show several examples 7 18 Automating Measurements Operator Interaction Figure 7 5 shows an example test system setup which utilizes the extensive connectivity capabilities of the analyzer All of the interface ports shown are standard equipment on your analyzer NETWORK ANALYZER DIN USER TTL PARALLEL KEYBOARD IN OUT PORT LAN HP IB mog 2 518 V Dee BARCODE KEYPAD FOOT PERSONAL LASERJET COMPUTER PRINTER READER SWITCH DUT W BARCODE 13 Figure 7 5 Example Test System Setup 7 19 Automating Measurements Operator Interaction Prompting the Operator You can display a message in the center of the analyzer s display by using the following SCPI command DISPlay ANNotation MESSage STRING For example OUTPUT Rfna DISP ANN MESS Connect device then press button You can specify how long you want the message to remain on the screen by using one of the following timeout words SHORt MEDium LONG NONE For example OUTPUT QRfna DISP ANN MESS Test passed MEDIUM To clear the message immediately use the command DISPlay ANNotation MESSage CLEar The message string can contain a maximum of 25 lines with up to 47 characters per line However it cannot be more than 254 characters in length including carriage returns and line feeds If you are using IBASIC you can us
211. gh they are not typically seen values greater than 0 dB do occur under certain circumstances such as when the measurement needs to be enhanced by calibration or when the device is active an amplifier for instance and perhaps oscillating Making Measurements Measuring Reflection Response 1 Reflection Log Mag 5 0 dB Ref 15 00 dB b2 off Ch1 Mkr 1 60 1848 MHz dB 22 360 dB ie ke te 5 cht 20 25 EM 30 35 Abs Start 0 300 MHz Stood 3 000 000 MHZ Figure 3 10 Example of a Reflection Measurement Display da 3 To quickly determine the filter s return loss press and then use the front panel knob the f keys or the numeric keypad to read the value of return loss at the desired frequency 4 See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for detailed information on using markers to interpret measurements Making Power Measurement using Broadband Detection Power measurements can be made using either narrowband or broadband detection The example in this section is of a broadband power measurement If you are only interested in the output power of your device at the same frequency as the iudi S source 0 790 select MEAS 1 Detection Options Narrc measurement narrow and power measurement only measures the power within the tuned receiver s bandwidth centered at the source frequency When you measure a devic
212. h errors in a reflection measurement is to perform a reflection calibration directly at the DUT connector using the exact frequency parameters that you will be using for the measurement 1 Set up your reflection measurement and frequency parameters 3 Follow the instructions on the display For more information on calibrations see Chapter 6 Optimizing Measurements Reducing Mismatch Errors Reducing Mismatch Errors in a Transmission Measurement Source match errors in transmission measurements can be reduced by performing an enhanced response calibration See Chapter 6 Load match errors can be reduced by using an attenuator on the analyzer s TRANSMISSION RF IN port NOTE Always use high quality attenuators Six to tan dB of attenuation should be sufficient to significantly reduce mismatch errors Reducing Mismatch Errors When Measuring Both Reflection and Transmission When you want to measure reflection and transmission simultaneously or without changing the test setup perform both a reflection calibration and an enhanced response calibration using the exact frequency parameters that you will be using for the measurement and put a 6 to 10 dB pad directly on the output of the DUT NOTE Using an attenuator on the output of the DUT will reduce the system dynamic range Compensating for Phase Shift in Measurement Setups Port Extensions The port extension feature is used to compensate for the phase shift cause
213. haracteristics Signal Purity Parameter HP8712C HP 8714C VonharmonicS purious gt 50 kHz from carrier lt 1 MHz lt 20 dBc 30 dBe gt 1 MHz 30 dBc lt 30 Be 25 dlc lt 25 dBc Residual AM lt 50 dBc lt 50 dBc Residual L5 kHz peak lt 15 tz peak lt 50 kHz from carrier 1 at 10 kHz offset 2 in 100 kHz bandwidth 3 30 Hz to 15 kHz Specifications and Characteristics Instrument Specifications and Characteristics Receiver Specifications Frequency Range Type of Detection 8714 Narrow band 0 3 to 1300 MHz 0 3 to 3000 MHz Broadband 10 to 1300 MHz 10 to 3000 MHz Dynamic Range HP 8712 60 ohm HP 8712 75 ohm HP 87146 50 ohm HP 8714 76 ohm Narrow band lt 5 MHz gt 60 dB gt 100 dB 25182 gt 100 dB gt 100 dB Broadband All gt 66 dE gt 56 185 10 to 50 dBm 10 to 47 dBm 10 to 90 dBm 10 to 8 7 dBm 16 to 5 0 dBm 16 to 47 dBm gt Ne Maximum Input Type of Detection HP8712C HP8714C narrowband 10 dBm 10 dBm broadband 16 dBm 16 dBm 1 at 0 5 dB compression 2 at 0 55 dB compression Specifications and Characteristics Instrument Specifications and Characteristics Trace Noise Bandwidth HP8712C HP8714C medium 0 2 dB 0 2 dB narrow band 50 1 dB 30 05 dB e 0 dBm excluding frequency response transmission measurement Damage Level 23 dBm or 25 Vdc Receiver Dynamic Dynamic Acc
214. he detectors are zeroed In manual zero mode the analyzer zeros the detectors only when the Manual Zero softkey is pressed NOTE When zeroing the detectors the analyzer turns off the internal RF source If you are measuring an external source with the broadband detectors use 5 before the external source is connected to the TRANSMISSION port 6 15 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method To Perform an AM Delay Calibration Option 1DA or 1DB only For an example of performing an AM delay calibration refer to Measuring AM Delay in Chapter 3 Otherwise follow these general steps when performing an AM delay calibration 1 Setup the analyzer for an AM delay measurement select or AM Del e enter operating parameters other than the default 2 Press CAL and then one of the following softkeys AM Delay Calibration Interpolation This selection removes all frequency response correction Absolute group delay measurements will be uncalibrated The accuracy of relative group delay group delay flatness measurements will not be degraded as long as the delay of the cables and adapters connected to the DUT is negligible A response calibration prompts you to connect a through cable in place of the DUT as the calibration standard and then measures it across the frequency band you have defined using the number of points you have defined This measur
215. he nearest office 2 19 aking M easurements Making Measurements This chapter provides an overview of basic network analyzer measurement theory a section explaining the typical measurement sequence a segment describing the use of the key and detailed examples of the following measurements Measuring Transmission Response Measuring Reflection Response Making a Power Measurement using Broadband Detection Measuring Conversion Loss Measuring AM Delay Option 1DA or 1DB Making Measurements with the Auxiliary Input Measuring Group Delay Measuring Impedance Using the Smith Chart Measuring Impedance Magnitude Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer This section provides a basic overview of how the network analyzer measures devices The analyzer has an RF signal source that produces an incident signal that is used as a stimulus to the device under test Your device responds by reflecting a portion of the incident signal and transmitting or perhaps altering and transmitting the remaining signal Figure 3 1 shows how a device under test DUT responds to an RF source stimulus Source INCIDENT REFLECTED TRANSMITTED ad620a Figure 3 1 DUT Response to an RF Signal 3 3 Making Measurements Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer Refer to Figure 3 2 for the following discussion regarding detection schemes and modes The transmitted signal routed to input B and the reflected signal in
216. he network Displaying Measurement Results It is often helpful to eliminate unnecessary information and annotation that might distract an operator and only show the information necessary to perform a particular task The analyzer provides several features to let you customize the information shown on the display as shown in the following Egure Many of the features discussed in this section can also be implemented using the analyzer s user interface See Customizing the Display in Chapter 4 for more information Meas Chan 1 info here Chan 2 info here Mejas 1 MKr 10 583 Sfx pp Ed ae dB 10 500 Sfx Freq 1 Label 10 600 Sfx 11 500 Sfx Freq 2 Label 11 600 Sfx Figure 7 1 1 Customized Annotation Customizing features such as limit testing annotating the X axis and using the title feature are described in this section 7 62 Automating Measurements Displaying Measurement Results Graticule On Off The graticule is the set of grid lines that designate increments of value on the x axis and y axis of the measurement If the operator is comparing the trace against limit lines or marker values turning off the graticule makes it easier to view the measurement trace limit lines and markers Ib turn the graticule off press More Display Graticule ON off or use this SCPI command DISPlay WINDow 1 2 TRACe GRATicule GRID OFF where the wind
217. he power sweep ranges menu There are i 7 predetermined power ranges to choose from Range p See Poser Sweep entry in this chapter for more information on the power sweep function 9 62 Reference R HARDKEY Softkey in narrowband internal menu Selects tuned receiver type of e Program measurement of input R reference signal See Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer in Chapter 3 for information on receiver inputs Access Keys MEAS 1 or MEAS 2 Detec wband Internal Softkey in broadband internal menu Selects diode detection type measurement of input R broadband internal reference signal See Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer in Chapter 3 for information on receiver inputs Access Keys MEAS 1 ov MEAS 2 MEAS 2 De Int ernal Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in programs menu Displays character entry menu to re title program and save it to memory or disk See the HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook for more information Access Keys Softkey in save RECALL menu Displays character entry menu to re title file and save it to memory or disk Also can be used when saving a file for the first time if you wish to give the file a specific name rather than having the analyzer automatically name it Softkey in more format menu Displays only the real resistive portion of the measured data on a Cartesian format This is si
218. ia 3130 Trans Canada Highway Shueng Yu Shu 943041316 161 3 895 2895 Kirkland Quebec H3J2X8 Hai Oian District 14151 857 5027 Canada Beijing China 514 697 4232 86 1 256 6888 Singapore Taiwan Hewlett Packard Japan Ltd Hewlett Packard Singapore Pte Ltd Hewlett Packard Taiwan 9 1 Takakura Cho Hechioji 150 Beach Road Bth Floor H P Building Tokyo 192 J apan 29 00 Gateway West 337 Fu Hsing North Road 181 426 60 2111 Singapore 0718 Taipei Taiwan 165 291 9088 1886 21 712 0404 10 24 11 Safety and Regulatory Information Safety and Regulatory Information This chapter contains required safety and regulatory information that is not included elsewhere in the manual 11 2 Warning Definition WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING Safety Information Much of the required safety information is distributed throughout this manual in appropriate places This section contains all required safety information that is not included elsewhere in this manual Warnings Warning denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Warnings applicable to this instrument are No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel Ib prevent electrical shock do not remove covers If this product is n
219. imately 360 Hz low voltage measurements This input is calibrated for inputs up to 10 V but will accept signals up to 15 V See Making Measurements with the Auxiliary Input in Chapter 3 for more information This rear panel female BNC connector accepts a gt 5 dBm 10 MHz signal from an external time base reference The nominal input impedance is 50 2 This rear panel female BNC connector allows external triggering of a sweep When the TTL level is pulled high a sweep is triggered When the TTL level is pulled to ground the sweep is inhibited This is an open collector signal which you can drive low but must not drive high since the analyzer also drives it This rear panel female BNC connector provides a bidirectional open collector TTL high signal The output goes high when the limit test passes The output goes low if the limit test fails This is an open collector signal which you can drive low but must not drive high since the analyzer also drives it Limit tasting can be set independently on each of the two measurement channels If both measurement channels are being used and the limit test is ON for both channels both measurement channels must pass for the output to go high See the following table 8 5 Front Rear Panel Connectors USER TTL IN OUT Measurement Channel 1 Measurement Channel 2 limit Test TTL Output High pass Low fail Low fail If limit testing is turned off on bo
220. ine menus Sets the end or stop linke amplitude height of a limit line See Using Limit Lines in Chapter 4 for more information on limit lines Access Keys DISPLAY Limit Add Min Line nd Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in secure menu of instruments with IBASIC option See the HP Instrument BASIC U ser s Handbook for information on the secure function Access Keys SYSTEM IBASIC Softkey in CAL menu when measuring transmission measurement calibration that corrects for frequency response tracking errors load match and input match See Ib Perform a Transmission Calibration in Chapter 6 for more information Softkey in title and clock menu Displays menu to edit screen title on line 1 of display Maximum number of characters is 36 Access Keys DISPLAY More Display Title and Clock Softkey in title and clock menu Displays menu to edit screen title on line 2 of display Maximum number of characters is 36 measurement display to the full screen size and eliminate all annotation except marker annotation See Expanding the Displayed Measurement in Chapter 4 for more information 9 25 HARDKEY E tn Softkey in source MENU When on sets network analyzer to use external vw 10 MHz signal as frequency standard When on if signal is not present at EXT REF IN connector network analyzer will not sweep Default is off NOTE External refere
221. ing command to enable user defined annotation DISPlay ANNotation CHANnel i 2 USER STATe 01001 For example DISPlay ANNotation CHANnell USER ON To specify the string to be displayed use the command DISPlay ANNotation CHANnel 1 2 USER LABel DATA STRING For example DISP ANN CHANI USER LABel 1 SuperNotch filter test 3 e lb restore the default measurement channel annotation use DISPlay ANNotation CHANnell USER OFF Ib turn the measurement channel annotation on or off press re D Annotation Options M as Annot ON i these SCPI commands DISP ANN 112 ON DISP ANN CHAN 112 ON 7 68 Automating Measurements Displaying Measurement Results Markers The active marker s value is displayed in the upper right area of the graticule If marker bandwidth or notch search is selected the bandwidth or notch information is displayed instead This marker information can be used to view exact measured data at critical frequency points Note the customized measurement channel notation in Figure 7 11 In addition to the active marker s readout four of the marker s values are displayed in the softkey area during front panel use This makes it easy to quickly read the measured data at several marker positions The triangular marker symbols can also be used to graphically indicate critical frequency points of the measurement For example a marker can be set at the desired center freque
222. ing Measurements Using the BEGIN Key to Make Measurements NOTE If the new measurement selected is a broadband measurement such as power conversion loss or AM delay the start frequency is limited to at least 10 MHz Therefore if your customized setup contains start frequency below 10 MHz and you choose power conversion loss or AM delay the start frequency will be changed to 10 MHz The stop frequency will remain unchanged unless it was sat to below 10 MHz The BEGIN Kay and The BEGIN key is designed to work when measurement channel is active Measurement Channels However it does change the measurement mode of measurement channel 2 as well If measurement channel 2 is active when the BEGIN key is used to select a new device type measurement channel 2 is turned off and measurement channel is made active If measurement channel 2 is active when the key is used to select a new measurement type measurement channel 2 will be left on and active However the analyzer then proceeds to setup channel 1 for the requested measurement type even though channel 2 is the active channel 3 14 Making Measurements Using the BEGIN Key to Make Measurements Using the Key To Configure Measurements This procedure shows you how to configure the network analyzer for measurements Press PRESET Presetting the instruments puts it into a known state with predefined parameters 1 Press and then use a softkey to select
223. ing view of the limit line press More Display Graticule ON off to toggle the graticule off Ib see if your filter meets the minimum limit you have just set up press The display will now indicate on the display whether the DUT has passed or failed when compared to the current limits If you are using the filter that was shipped with your instrument you should see a PASS indicator To edit a current limit line and to see what a fail indicator looks like press Edit Limit and set the Begin t and End Limit to0dB Notice the display now shows the FAIL indicator Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing NOTE You can move the position of the pass fail indicator turn on or off the pass fail text and turn on or off the fail icon in the limit options menu Press DISPLAY Limit Menu Limit 0 For more information see Customizing the Display later in this chapter 13 Before continuing to the next section edit the limit line to change it back to having a begin and end limit of 3 dB Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing To Create a Sloping Limit Line A sloping limit line has different values for its begin and end limits For example create a sloping limit line between 130 MHz and 155 MHz with a beginning level of 35 dB and an ending level of 3 dB Fr quency 2 Press End Frequency MHz 3 Press Begin Limit Enter 4 Press NOTE When creating limit lines you
224. ion Softkey in limit menu Sets limit test status When limit test is enabled FAIL or PASS notation may be displayed on the CRT Pass fail information is also routed to the LIMIT TEST TTL IN OUT connector on the rear panel of the analyzer The limits need not be visible set to ON for the limit test to be valid See Using Limit Testing in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys DISPLAY L Softkey in limit options menu Allows you to enable or disable the PASS or FAIL text when limit testing is on Does not enable a ble the imit I softkey See Customizing the Display in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys DISPLAY L t Menu Limit Options Softkey in menu Displays a transmission trace in terms of transmission coefficient displays a reflection trace in terms of reflection coefficient displays an aux input trace in volts from 1 mV div to 20 V div Softkey in define hardcopy menu Defines the hardcopy as a list of data trace values Trace values for Cartesian format are in two columns frequency and amplitude Trace values for polar format are in three columns frequency magnitude and phase Trace values for Smith chart format are also in three columns frequency resistance and complex impedance L NOTE Plotting lists with many data points can be very time consuming See Printing and Plotting Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Har
225. ion 6 12 response calibration 6 11 9 66 response errors frequency 6 4 onse amp Isolatic restrictions HP IB 8 8 return loss 3 29 RF connectors 8 13 RF Filter Stat RF BN off 9 67 RF power out setting 2 8 ripple marker limit test 4 40 Round Seconds 9 67 rpg knob 8 16 RS 232 serial port 1 11 4 82 4 84 8 10 Run 9 67 S safety information 11 3 safety Warnings 11 3 Save SCEI 9 68 Save AUTGST 9 68 save definition 4 68 Save Meas 1 9 68 Save Meas 2 9 69 Save Program 9 69 SAVE RECALL 7 47 9 69 Save 8 9 69 saving a calibration 4 68 saving and recalling measurement results 4 65 oe data 4 67 2 9 9 69 9 69 Index 26 screen annotation 9 7 Search Left 4 12 9 70 search marker 4 8 Search Off 9 70 Search right 9 70 S Right 4 12 Seconds ON off 9 70 secure 9 70 segment deleting 4 45 Select Char Word 9 71 Select Copy Port 9 71 Select Disk 4 68 9 72 selecting the disk 4 67 selector switch voltage 8 24 serial port 1 11 4 82 4 84 7 61 8 10 Service Utilities 9 72 Set CXock 9 72 Set 9 72 set Hour 9 72 setting HP IB addresses 1 15 setting the line voltage 1 4 setting up the analyzer 1 10 Set Year 9 74 shift spurs 5 14 shipment contents 1 3 shipment weight 10 19 shipping instructions 11 5 SICL 7 16 signal detection 3 6 Index 27 signal purity specifications 10
226. itude and phase response should be used NBS traceable or HP standards are recommended to achieve verifiable measurement accuracy The published specifications for your analyzer system include accuracy enhancement with compatible calibration kits Measurement calibrations made with user defined or modified calibration kits are not subject to those analyzer specifications 6 24 Save the Calibration After you have performed your calibration you will probably want to save it for future use To save your calibration Disk and select where you want the calibistion saved See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results Chapter 4 for information on the three available selections 3 Press Prior Menu S ve Stats to save the calibration 4 The analyzer will save the calibration along with the current instrument state to a Ele on the disk you have selected 5 Refer to Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information on saving renaming and copying files 6 25 Troubleshooting with Calibration Check Check the Calibration Your analyzer has a calibration check feature that can compute and display corrected measurement uncertainties residual errors that apply to the current instrument settings and calibrations During a calibration check you are prompted to connect calibration standards to your measurement ports These standards are measured with the current calibration corrections applied
227. ium Wide Medium Wide Medium Wide Medium Wide Narrow 1 Options 1DA and 1DB only 2 HP 8712C 3 HP 8714C 4 Preset power level is user defined by using the Preset Pwr Level softkey The factory default is 0 dBm 5 Maximum power is dependent upon the option configuration of your analyzer See Chapter 10 to determine the maximum specified power for your analyzer 3 16 Making Measurements Using the BEGIN Key to Make Measurements The User BEGIN Function Option 1C2 only The User BEGIN softkey gives you the capability to redefine the key menu and install user defined macro functions The User BEGIN key is only available if your analyzer has IBASIC Option 1C2 installed Use this key to define macros such as e Softkeys to implement fast save recall e Softkeys to implement most used functions or features e Softkeys to implement often used features that involve a number of steps Macros must be defined within an IBASIC program If no program is currently installed either by AUTOST or Re analyzer will automatically create a default program BEGN ox OFF selects the key menu to user mode when and to normal operation when OFF Once you have changed the User BEGIN mode to ON the same menu will be displayed for subsequent key presses of the hardkey This is not true if your IBASIC program has changed If the program has changed the User BEGIN mode is reset to OFF Use of the User BEGIN func
228. k Use a keyboard if connected or the front panel knob and the softkeys to enter a subdirectory on the destination disk before pressing Enter 4 73 To Access Files From SCPI IBASIC or FTP Non Volatile RAM Disk Volatile RAM Disk Internal 3 5 Disk Internal Date Disk Using Instrument Functions Saving and Recalling Measurement Results Files on each disk can be accessed via HP IB using SCPI commands directly from IBASIC with Option 1C2 or over a LAN with Option 1F7 The table below shows the names used for each disk You will notice that when using the file utilities the analyzer displays the SCPI name in the disk catalog window and in the filename entry windows Table 4 1 Disk Access Stmme IBkSimame MEM file fie MEMORY 0 0 fib MEMORY 0 1 fib INTERNAL FTP directory nvram fie ran fib int fk data fie RAM INT fe DATA fie not supported e For more details on HP B programming refer to your analyzer s Programmers Guide e For more details on IBASIC disk access refer to the IBASIC MASS STORAGE IS keyword in the HP Instrument Basic U ser s andbook Option 1C2 only e For more details on FTP disk access via LAN refer to your analyzer s LAN User s Guide Supplement Option 1F7 only 4 74 Make a Directory CAUTION Using Instrument Functions Saving and Recalling Measurement Results To Use Directory Utilities This section describes how to make directorie
229. k for more information Softkey in menu Sets starting point in dBm for a power sweep measurement Power Sweep in SWEEP menu must be selected before setting the start and stop power points See Power f p entry in this chapter for more information on the power sweep function Softkey in marker math menu Measures a user defined segment of a measurement trace and calculates the frequency span mean and standard deviation of the amplitude response and the peak to peak ripple See To Use Marker Math Functions in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys MARKER Mar Option 102 IBASIC only Softkey in IBASIC menu When a program is ready to run this softkey steps through the program one line at a time Good de bugging tool See the HP Instrument BASIC U ser s Handbook for more information Access Keys svsreEM options IBASIC Softkey Reference 5 Stop Softkey in menu Sets the stop frequency of source Maximum frequency is 1 3 GHz for HP 8712 and 3 0 GHz HP 8714C Softkey in menu Sets stopping point in dBm for a power sweep measurement Power in SWEEP menu must be selected before setting the start and stop power points See Power Sweep entry in this chapter for more information on the power sweep function Store CC Softkey in update correction constants menu Writes a copy of CC data from To Disk internal volatile RAM to a disk in the analyzer s built in 3
230. k menu The cal check feature will compute and display corrected measurement uncertainties residual errors that apply to the current instrument settings and calibrations This information may be used as an analysis or troubleshooting tool when making transmission and reflection measurements See Chapter 6 for more information on using cal check Softkey in CAL menu Allows selection of type of cal kit Type N female default Type N male 3 5 mm for use with 50 2 systems Type F female for use with 75 Q systems or user defied By convention cal kits indicate the sex of the port with which they are used For example the default cal kit for the analyzer is type N female because the front panel RF ports are female the calibration standards in turn are male This same convention applies to whatever test port the standard is attached to be it an adapter cable fixture etc See Chapter 6 for more information on calibrating the analyzer al Softkey in define save menu Toggle to ON if you want to save the active on OFF measurement calibration along with the current instrument state See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for information on saving instrument states and measurement results to files Access Keys save RECALL Def ine Save 9 13 HARDKEY ASof tkeyn C Softkey available when editing titles file names directory names and IBASIC programs from the front panel of the analy
231. kitfile Standard Definitions for HP 85054B Precision Type N Cal Kit Definitions for 50 Ohm jack FEMALE center contact test ports plug MALE center contact standards OPEN HP 85054 60027 Open Circuit Plug zo 50 0 Ohms DELAY 57 993 12 Sec LOSS 0 8 9 Ohms Sec 88 308 15 Farads Cl 1667 2 27 Farads Hz C2 146 61E 36 Farads Hz 2 C3 9 75313 45 Farads Hz 3 SHORT HP 85054 60025 Short Circuit Plug zo 50 0 ohms DELAY 63 078E 12 Sec LOSS 8 E 8 Ohms Sec LOAD HP 00909 60011 Broadband Load Plug zo 50 0 ohms DELAY 0 0 Sec LOSS 0 0 Ohms Sec THRU HP 85054 60038 Plug to Plug Adapter zo 50 0 ohms DELAY 196 0E 12 Sec LOSS 2 2 9 Ohms Sec Step 3 Verify Performance CAUTION Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method Once a measurement calibration has been generated with a user defined calibration kit its performance should be checked before making device measurements Ib check the accuracy that can be obtained using the new calibration kit a device with a well defined frequency response preferably unlike any of the standards used should be measured The verification device must not be one of the calibration standards measurement of one of these standards is merely a measure of repeatability Ib achieve more complete verification of a particular measurement calibration accurately known verification standards with a diverse magn
232. le magnitude and phase response as a function of frequency The response of each standard is mathematically defined in the error models used by the network analyzer A standard type is one of four basic types that define the form or structure of the model to be used with that standard e g short or load Standard characteristics are the numerical physical characteristics of the standards used in the model selected Typical calibration standards are cables or throughs opens shorts and loads They are used singly or in combination depending on the type of cal In essence for each type of measurement error that is to be corrected one standard is measured Open Open defines the standard type of an open circuit used for calibrating reflection measurements As a reflection standard an open circuit offers the advantage of broadband frequency coverage At high frequencies however an open rarely has perfect reflection characteristics because the fringing capacitance effects cause phase shift that varies with frequency These effects are impossible to eliminate but the calculation built into the analyzer includes an open circuit capacitance model This capacitance model is a cubic polynomial as a function of frequency where the polynomial coefficients are user definable The capacitance model equation is c CO C1 f 2 C3 f9 where f is the measurement frequency The terms in the equation are defined when specifyin
233. lett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co 9780 So Meridian Blvd 301 E Evelyn 1421 South Manhattan Ave 24 Inverness Place East Englewood CO 80112 Mountain View CA 94841 Fullerton CA 92631 Englewood CO 80112 1800 4524844 1415 694 2000 17141 999 6700 303 649 5512 Atlanta Annex Illinois Now Jersey Texas Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co Hewlett Packard Co 2124 Barrett Park Drive 545 E Algonquin Rd 150 Green Pond Rd 930 E Campbell Rd Kennesaw GA 30144 Arlington Heights IL 60005 Rockaway NJ 07866 Richardson TX 75081 1404 648 0000 847 342 2000 201 586 5400 214 231 6101 EUROPEAN FIELD OPERATIONS Headquartem France Germany Great Britain Hewlett Packard S A Hewlett Packard France Hewlett Packard GmbH Hewlett Packard Ltd 150 Route du Nant d Avril 1 Avenue Du Canada Hewlett Packard Strasse Eskdale Road Winnersh Triangle 1217 Meyrin 2 Geneva Zone D Activite De Courtaboeuf 61352 Bad Homburg Wokingham Berkshire RG41 5D Switzerland F 91947 les Ulis Cadex Ger many England 41221 780 8111 France 49 6172 16 0 44 7341 696622 33 11 69 82 60 60 INTERCON FIELD OPERATIONS Headquarters Australia Canada China Hewlett Packard Company Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd China Hewlett Packard Company 3495 Deer Creek Road 3141 Joseph Street 17500 South Service Road 38 Bei San Huan XI Road Palo Alto California USA Blackburn Victor
234. limit testing on or off See To Use Marker Limit Functions in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Limit Menu kr Limits Softkey in limit menu Displays marker limits menu where limit testing can be placed on statistics flatness marker searches and delta amplitude or frequency See To Use Marker Limit Functions in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys DISPLAY Limit Menu Softkey in annotation options menu Allows you to toggle the marker numbers but not the triangular indicators on or off See Customizing the Display in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys More Display Ati tation Options Softkey in define graph menu When on default setting prints or plots contain marker symbols Reference NOTE Graph and Mkr Table or Graph nly must beselectedfor marker symbols to print or plot Access Keys Def ine Hardcopy Def ine Graph Softkey in define hardcopy menu Defines the hardcopy output as a table of marker values frequency and amplitude Access Keys COPY Def ine Hardcopy Softkey in max search menu Places the active marker at the frequency point of maximum amplitude If tracking is off marker remains at that frequency If tracking is on marker moves to the maximum point with each sweep See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys M h er Search Max Softkey in min search menu Place
235. lyzer determines which spurs need to be avoided with an algorithm based on frequencies number of points sweep time and system bandwidth Ib activate spur avoidance 1 Press MENU Spur Avaid Options 2 Make a user defined measurement calibration Refer to Chapter 6 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy for calibration procedures NOTE Using spur avoid increases sweep time Since there are more spurs at the lower frequencies the time penalty can be reduced by setting the start frequency of the measurement as high as possible The measurement calibration must be performed with the same spur avoid mode used in the measurement or your results may be invalid 5 15 Optimizing Measurements Reducing Trace Noise CAUTION You will invalidate the measurement calibration if you turn spur avoid off 5 16 Reducing Mismatch Errors Mismatch errors result from differences between the DUT s port impedance and the analyzer s port impedance Source match errors are produced on the source analyzer RF OUT side of the DUT load match errors on the load analyzer RF IN side If the DUT is not connected directly to the port the mismatch errors due to cables adapters etc are considered part of the source or load match errors Source match and load match error terms can be reduced by using the methods described in this section Reducing Mismatch Errors in a Reflection Measurement The best way to reduce mismatc
236. lyzer is in the narrowband detection mode the receiver is tuned to the source frequency This technique provides greater dynamic range by decreasing the receiver s bandwidth Figure 3 3 shows the transmitted signal for narrowband detection input as B and the reference signal as R 3 6 REAR PANEL Making Measurements Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer External Detectors Aux Input x Y To processor and display FRONT PANEL narrowband Detector broadband Detector Rd 06 Input Input B Source D Incident Transmitted Transmission RF in Reflection RF Out Device Under Test 16 Figure 3 3 Block Diagram 3 8 Making Measurements Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer The following table shows the correlation between different types of measurements input channels and signals Detection Mode Input Channels Input Signals Transmission Narrow band transmitted incident Reflection Narrow band reflected incident Power Broadband transmitted Conversion loss Broadband transmitted incident When to Use Attenuation CAUTION When to Use Amplification Making Measurements Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer When to Use Attenuation and Amplification in a Measurement Setup For accurate measurements use external attenuation to limit the power at the RF IN port to 10 dBm for narrowband measurements or 16 dBm fo
237. m Minimum setting is 80 mm maximum is 500 mm Width is defined relative to the printer It is the dimension at right angle to the travel of the paper Landscape mode is rotated one quarter turn relative to portrait mode Thus in landscape mode print width actually defines the height of the printed image 4 88 Using Instrument Functions Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters Defining a Plotter Make the following selections in the analyzer menus 1 Press Restore Defaults to restore the default parameters for a plotter The defaults are Parameter Monochrome Color Color Plotter Pen Numbers 2 1 Pen3 2 4 aticule Pen 5 aphics Pen 8 2 Select the type of plotter you have either monochrome or color 3 Use 88 en Numbers to select the pen number s for the data traces selecting pens 4 f you do not want auto feed active press Auto Feed Off Printing and Plotting Measurement Results To print or plot measurement results perform the following steps 1 Select the appropriate copy port e Printer or e Plotter or e Internal 3 5 in floppy disk 2 Define the output 3 Generate the output e Hardcopy or e Plot to 3 5 in disk 4 90 Using Instrument Functions Printing and Plotting Measurement Results To Select the Copy Port Press Select Port Use the front panel knob to highlight a printer plotter or an HP GL or PCX file dump
238. mation Access Keys Def ins Hardcopy Graphics Softkey in set pen numbers menu Sets pen number assignment color for the annotation on a hardcopy Access Keys HARDCOPY Defin Pan ibers Graticule Softkey available in two different menus the more display menu and the ON off define graph menu This softkey toggles the display graticule grid on and off When pressed in the more display menu the graticule are suppressed from showing on the CRT When pressed in the define graph menu the graticule are suppressed from printing or plotting on a hardcopy Access Keys DISPLAY More Display or HARDCOPY Def raph Softkey in color options menu for use with an external VGA monitor Select grey scale when using a monochrome external monitor HARDKEY S jy Reference H Hardkey in the SYSTEM area of the front panel Displays the menu to start or stop prints or plots set up the printer or plotter and determine the appearance of the copy See Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters and Printing and Plotting Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in operating parameters menu Dumps all of the operating parameter screens to the currently selected hard copy device Access Keys system options Operating Softkey in operating parameters menu Dumps the currently viewed operating parameter screen to the d selected hard copy device Access Keys _ s
239. measurement screen the analyzer computes the measurement trace using the following formula Transmission dB 10 inc where Ptrans the power transmitted through the device and where the incident power b A level of 0 dB would indicate a perfect through cable or device no loss or gain Values greater than 0 dB indicate that the DUT has gain Values less than 0 dB indicate loss 3 16 quickly determine the filter s minimum insertion loss press 4 Note the marker readout in Figure 3 6 provides the frequency and amplitude of the minimum insertion loss point Making Measurements Measuring Transmission Response b1 Transmission Log Mag 20 0 dR Ref 60 00 C be Off ae f m rm Chi Mkr1 169 26h MHz dB 2 22 dB 20 peee 20 40 F eU RUE 100 120 T 2 1 gel E zx 140 Abs Start 0 300 MHz Stop 3 000 000 MHz Figure 3 6 Example of a Transmission Measurement Display 5 See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for more detailed information on using markers to interpret measurements NOTE For the measurement to be valid input signals must fall within the dynamic range of the analyzer See Chapter 5 for techniques to increase the dynamic range of the analyzer 3 23 Measuring Reflection Response This section uses an example measurement to describe how to calibrate for and make a b
240. measuring a device you will probably want to save the measurement results in order to perform statistical analysis on them Statistical quality control SQC can be a powerful tool to indicate process drift or variation You may also want to produce a print or plot of the DUT s response and ship this to your customer along with the DUT Querying Measurement Data To save the complete measurement trace use the SCPI command CALC1 DATA or TRACE1 DATA CHA1FDATA Refer to the chapter titled Trace Data Transfers in the Programmer s Guide for more details From IBASIC you can also use Read fdata which is faster Refer to the chapter titled Using Subprograms in the supplement to the Instrument BASIC U se s Handbook 7 72 Automating Measurements Saving Measurement Results Saving the Measurement to Disk Save ASCII The analyzer has a Save ASCIT feature which saves the measurement trace in a format compatible with many popular spreadsheet programs such as Lotus 1 2 3 and Microsoft Excel The measurement can also be saved in Ibuchstone format for importing data into CAE programs The measurement is saved to a file on the analyzer s disk The following program segment shows how to save the measurement in Lotus 1 2 3 format to a file on the analyzer s non volatile RAM disk and then how to transfer that file into your program and store it as a file on your computer disk 10 DIM A 32000 20 Dest SAV_DUT1
241. ment 3 9 Amplifier 9 7 amplitude delta marker limit 4 42 annotation frequency 4 60 marker number 4 61 measurement channel 4 60 x axis 4 60 4 61 Annotation DN off 9 7 annotation options 4 53 Annotation Options 9 7 anti static mat 10 19 aperture 3 49 Aperture 9 7 ture Hz 9 8 i 9 4 arrays error correction 6 3 atmospheric conditions 10 19 attenuation when to use in a measurement 3 9 automation 7 2 82 selecting a controller 7 13 auto step 7 28 7 43 AUTOST files 7 7 7 53 AUTOST program 7 26 Autozero 6 15 9 8 Index 3 auxiliary input 3 48 8 5 10 17 AUX INPUT connector 3 48 8 5 10 17 Average Factor 9 8 Average om OFF 9 9 averaging 5 13 averaging changing 5 12 averaging how it works 5 12 averaging indicator 5 12 AVG 9 5 9 10 Bx 9 10 bandwidth system 5 11 bandwidth change 5 14 bandwidth changing 5 11 barcode reader 7 29 basic functions front panel 2 3 battery 12 14 baud rate 4 84 Baud Rate 9 11 B detector 3 6 B detector 3 4 BEGIN 3 12 17 9 11 customized 3 17 7 22 user program structure 7 23 Begin quency 9 11 BEGIN y measurement configurations 3 12 network analyzer internal configurations 3 16 user defined 3 17 7 22 Begin Limit 9 11 BNC connectors 8 4 6 B R 9 10 B R 9 10 broadband detection mode 3 6 roadband External 9 12 Broadband Emternal 9 12 Broa
242. ments Configuring Your Test System IBASIC PROGRAM 10 NETWORK ANALYZER art DEM 30 ENTER 40 30 60 10 END D U T po670b Figure 7 2 Stand Alone Network Anelyrer Running IBASIC 1 8 Network Analyzers Without IBASIC Controlled by Computer s Automating Measurements Configuring Your Test System In this conhguration the measurement is controlled by a computer external to the analyzer using the LAN or the HP IB interface The measurement setup and control can be highly automated reducing the burden on the operator and statistics can be collected in order to monitor your process and quality You can connect one or more analyzers to each computer Since the computer can be connected to other computers via Local Area Network LAN measurement statistics can be easily tracked and archived using computer applications NOTE You must have Option 1F7 installed in your analyzer to use the LAN port If you have Option 1 7 refer to your Option 1F7 U ser s Guile Supplement for information on using your analyzer with a LAN Conligure your system as an analyzer controlled by an external computer if you would like to e Centralize automation and application programs e Develop a more sophisticated system e Add networking 7 9 Automating Measurements Configuring Your Test System PROGRAM NETWORK ANALYZER LAN or HP IB pp69c Figure 7 3 Network Analyzer Without IBASIC Cont
243. menu Displays the data formatted as SWR standing wave ratio Softkey in CRT adjust menu Default is OFF For use with a sync on green external monitor _ Access Keys SYSTEM options 9 C CRT Adjust zem Softkey in the menu Displays menu to set bandwidth of IF filters in receiver section of network analyzer Bandwidth See Reduce the Receiver Noise Floor and the table below for more information on system bandwidth Softkey Reference S System BW Dynamic Range Approximate BW Wide LOW 6500 Hz Medium Wide default Medium 4000 Hz Medium Medium 3700 Medium Narrow Medium 1200 Hz Narrow High 250 Hz Fine High 15 Hz m Softkey in system oeriows menu Displays menu to adjust clock setting set beeper volume adjust CRT settings and configure the rear panel USER TTL 8 IN OUT port System Softkey in HP IB menu Makes the network analyzer the system controller of ee the HP instrument bus Required mode for interfacing with HP IB peripherals I printers plotters and disk drives Also required by IBASIC to talk to HP IB peripherals This operation mode is not selectable with another active controller on the bus See the Programmer s Guide for more information Access Keys system options Hardkey in SYSTEM area of front panel Refer to When to the System Impedance in Chapter 3 for more information Access Keys More Cal Cal Kit HARDKEY
244. milar to the linear magnitude format but can show both positive and negative values Access Keys FORMAT More Format 9 63 Softkey Reference R l Option 1 C2 IBASIC only Softkey in IBASIC edit menu Access Keys SYSTEM options IBASIC Edit Option 1 C2 IBASIC only Softkey in programs menu Recalls to the network analyzer a program from internal memory internal disk or external disk See the HP Instrument BASIC U ser s H andbook for more information Access Keys save RECALL Pro Softkey in save RECALL menu Recalls instrument state files not plot files from internal memory internal disk or external disk See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in SCALE menu Sets the value of the reference line The reference value 15 noted on the screen as Ref Reference Softkey in menu Sets the position of the reference line from the top of the graticule 10 to the bottom 0 or in between Default position is middle 5 See Figure 2 3 in Chapter 2 Softkey in menu Allows you to track either a certain frequency or the peak point of the measurement trace by scaling the trace such that the point of interest always falls on the display reference line See Using Reference Tracking in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in more cal menu Allows compensation for phase shift due to an extended measurement reference plane on the RE
245. mission response calibration the analyzer performs correction at the selected number of data points across the selected frequency band Interpolation recalculates the error correction array for reduced frequency spans If the frequency span is increased the calibration is invalidated and the default response calibration is automatically restored Chapter 6 provides detail about when additional calibration is necessary and information about other calibrations available for transmission measurements If you wish to calibrate your instrument for a transmission response measurement perform the following steps 1 Press 2 The instrument prompts you to connect four standards open short load and through cable as shown below NETWORK ANALYZER NETWORK ANALYZER 00 O Dood B 00 00 ner mo H 5 1 1 H 1 E 1 1 1 or 1 1 3 s s 1 3 3 2 1 Open Short load Connections Through Cable Connection 3 19 Making Measurements Measuring Transmission Response 4 The analyzer will measure each standard and then calculate the new calibration coefficients The message Calibration complete will appear for a few seconds when the analyzer is done calculating the new error correction array 5 The calibration may be saved in memory or on a disk for later use if you wish However the current calibration for each measur
246. more information Save Program Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in programs menu Saves the current program to memory or disk See the HP Instrument BASIC U ser s andbook for more information Access Keys save RECALL P Hardkey in SYSTEM area of front panel Displays menus to save title define and recall states and programs rename delete and copy files and select configure and format disks See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for examples Save Softkey in save recat menu Saves information to memory or disk automatically naming the file STATE state See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information Hardkey in CONFIGURE area of front panel Allows changing of scale per division and reference level and position for optimum viewing of measurements Also accesses reference tracking function See Entering Measurement Parameters in Chapter 2 and Using Reference Tracking in Chapter 4 for more information Softkey in menu Sets the value of vertical divisions of graticule For example if the scale div is 10 dB each graticule line is 10 dB higher than the one below 9 69 5 Softkey in target search menu During a target search moves the active marker to the left lower frequency to the first occurrence on the data trace where the amplitude equals the target value That first occurrence may be an actual data point or an
247. n access in the same way that you access files on a floppy disk The Non Vol RAM Disk is non volatile meaning that its contents are preserved while the analyzer is turned off The contents of the Volatile RAM Disk are erased when the analyzer is turned off The Volatile RAM Disk can be configured to be much larger than the Non Vol RAM Disk allowing it to hold many more instrument states For all three types of disk the instrument settings and calibrations associated with several tests can be saved to instrument state files The instrument states can later be recalled during the test sequence The advantage of using RAM disks rather than the 3 5 floppy disk is that recalling a state from RAM Disks takes several seconds less than recalling a state from the floppy disk For example suppose the instrument settings are entered for the third test of a sequence of tests The instrument settings can be saved in a file with the name TEST3 STA on the Non Vol RAM Disk When the third test must be performed the control program can recall the instrument state from the non volatile RAM disk with this SCPI command MMEM LOAD STATI MEM TEST3 STA 7 46 Automating Measurements Automated Measurement Setup and Control Recalling a state from RAM disk typically takes 4 seconds but the time is dependent on settings such as number of points One strategy for managing a large set of recall states is to initially store them on a floppy
248. n supplied in a safe condition The instruction documentation contains information and warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in a safe condition Cleaning Instructions Clean the cabinet using a damp cloth only Safety and Regulatory Information Safety Information Shipping Instructions Always transport or ship the instrument using the original packaging or comparable Instrument Markings The instruction manual symbol The product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the manual The CE mark is the registered trademark of the European Community The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association ISMI A This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class A product The symbol is used to mark the position of the analyzer s line power switch The STANDBY symbol is used to mark the position of the y p analyzer s power switch The AC symbol is used to indicate the required nature of the line module input power 11 5 Regulatory Information Notice for Germany Noise Declaration LpA 70 dB am Arbeitsplatz operator position normaler Betrieb normal position nach DIN 45635 T 19 per ISO 7779 Declaration of Conformity 11 6 Safety and Regulatory Information Regulatory Information DECLARATION OF
249. n the analyzer is done calculating the new error correction array 6 The calibration may be saved in memory or on a disk for later use if you wish See Chapter 6 for information on saving calibrations Making Measurements Measuring Group Delay Connect the DUT NETWORK ANALYZER Figure 3 19 Equipment Setup For a Group Delay Measurement 3 52 Making Measurements Measuring Group Delay View and Interpret the Group Delay Measurement Results 2 Ib interpret the group delay measurement refer to Figure 3 20 or your analyzer s display if you are making this measurement on your instrument a The measurement trace depicts the amount of time it takes for each frequency to travel through the DUT 3 To quickly determine the filter s maximum delay point press 4 Note the marker readout in Figure 3 20 provides the frequency and delay in nanoseconds of the maximum delay point 3 53 Making Measurements Measuring Group Delay 1 Transmission Delay 5 ns Ref 5 ns be off NT chi Mer 4 50 000 MHz 30 37 ns 35 1 y Me 55 zi NEL MEINE _ 5 IN Beet mec Abs B Ch1 L Center 175 000 MHz Span 200 000 MHz Figure 3 20 Example of a Phase Derived Delay Measurement Display 5 See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for more detailed information on using markers to interpr
250. n the first calibration check and later ones 5 When the residual errors have drifted beyond what is acceptable note the time interval and use that information to determine what is the best calibration interval for your measurements 6 Repeat the process above enough times to feel confident that your calibration interval is correct To Perform a Calibration Check The calibration check feature can be used on any of the transmission or reflection calibrations available including the factory default calibration See Table 6 2 Table 6 2 Calibration Check Error Terms Meesurement Celibretion Standards Error Terms Type Type Needed Computed Transmission Default Response Response amp Isolation Enhanced Response Test Set Default One Port Test Set 10 Open S Short L Load T Thru 0 S L T OS LT 0 8 L12 T 0 S LT 0 S L T Sou Sou Source Sou Sou 2 See Error Term Descriptions and Typical Values later in this chapter 3 Used with HP 87075C multiport test set only Di Directivity Source rectivity Source irectivity Source acking Tracking Tracking 6 27 CAUTION Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Check the Calibration Ib perform a calibration check 1 Be sure that the analyzer is in the measurement mode and has implemented the particular calibration
251. n this key is pressed the Peak measurement trace is rescaled with each sweep so that the peak point on the trace lies on the display reference line See Using Reference Tracking in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Reference king Softkey in marker search menu When tracking is on the marker search s functions are updated with each sweep When tracking is off default setting the functions are performed only once when selected See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Marker Search 9 83 Reference T Softkey in more cal menu Allows compensation for phase shift due to an extended measurement reference plane on the TRANSMISSION RF IN port See Reference Plane and Port Extensions in Chapter 5 for more information Access Keys gt 1 Softkey in amplifier filter broadband passive and measurement menus Selects ratioed forward transmission type of measurement See Measuring Transmission Response in Chapter 3 for more information Softkey in the cal check menu One of the corrected measurement uncertainties that can be viewed after performing a cal check Refer to Chapter 6 for more information on using cal check Access Keys Cal Check View Cal Check Trigger Softkey in source MENU Displays menu with choices for triggering the analyzer The analyzer can be triggered continuously default setting or once It can be triggered internall
252. n tracking 9 65 source match 9 75 transmission tracking 9 84 measuring absolute output power 3 30 measuring devices 3 3 medium bandwidth 5 11 Med Narrow 1200 Hz 9 49 Med Wide 4000 Hz 9 49 memory 7 46 Memory 9 49 Pen 9 50 D 2 Pen 9 50 memory allocations changing 4 68 memory or disk recall 4 7 1 message string 7 20 MHZ 9 50 Min Limit 9 50 Min Search 4 9 9 50 mismatch errors 6 4 how to reduce 5 17 Mixer 9 51 Er Annot DN off 9 51 Mkr Limit on OFF 9 51 Mk Limits 4 38 9 51 Mkr Number DN off 4 61 Symbol ON off 9 51 Mkr Table Only 9 52 MM DD YYYY 9 59 modifying a program 7 27 monitor 10 18 external 7 40 8 11 Index 20 monitor adjustments 4 104 monitor external 4 102 monitor synchronization 4 104 Monochrome 9 53 Monochyome Pen 9 53 MOVE graphics keyword 7 21 MS DOS formatting 4 77 9 53 54 17 multi notch marker search 4 17 ak 4 17 9 54 marker search 4 17 Narrowband narrowband power measurement 3 30 narrow bandwidth 5 11 networking 7 12 Next Min Left 4 10 9 55 Next Wext Pea noise trace activate averaging 5 13 trace change system bandwidth 5 14 trace eliminate receiver spurious responses 5 14 trace reduction 5 13 noise floor 10 2 noise floor reduction 5 11 noise trace 10 8 None 9 56 non operating storage conditions 10 19 non volatile memory batte
253. nce should be disconnected from EXT REF IN or power reduced when not in use Softkey in trigger source menu Enables the analyzer to sweep to the next frequency point when externally triggered through EXT TRIG IN OUT rear panel connector one point per trigger gger Tr Softkey in trigger source menu Enables the analyzer to begin one complete sweep when externally triggered FastRe on OFF Fault Location Window Fault Max File Format File Type bin ASCII Reference F Softkey in the save menu Toggles the fast recall feature on or off See Measurement Setup and Control with Fast Recall in Chapter 4 for more information Option 100 only Softkey in reflection or cable menu Sets up the analyzer to perform fault location measurements See your Option 100 User s Guide Supplement for information Option 100 only Softkey in menu Used when making fault location measurements See your User s Guide Supplement for Option 100 for information Option 100 only Softkey in menu Used when making fault location measurements See your Option 100 User s Guide Supplement for information Softkey in the define save menu Allows you to choose between saving files in a format compatible with C model analyzers only or a format compatible with and model analyzers See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information Option 1C2
254. ncy for a notch filter and the operator can tune the filter until the notch is at the same frequency as the marker Marker search types include e max search mm search target search bandwidth e notch e multi peak e multi notch When marker tracking is turned on these searches will be automatically performed at the end of each sweep This can be useful in tuning applications Other marker functions that can be useful are the marker math functions e statistics e flatness RF filter stats 1 69 Automating Measurements Displaying Measurement Results These functions perform certain mathematical calculations on the amplitude data of user defined trace segments See Use Marker Math Functions in Chapter 4 for more information on these features 7 70 Automating Measurements Displaying Measurement Results Title and Clock The analyzer has two 30 character title lines One of these lines can be replaced with a real time clock readout The title line can be set to show the serial number and type of the DUT Doing so provides a simple and safe link between the device under test and the measurement data The title and clock lines are by default included on hardcopy printouts These can be configured using the HARDCOPY Define Hardcopy menu For more details and a simple example refer to the Operator Interaction section of this chapter 7 71 Saving Measurement Results After
255. nd Plotting Measurement Results NOTE The following table provides some typical print times for various HP printers These values are typical only they are not intended to necessarily represent the print times you will experience They are provided for comparison only In addition the number of measurement points measurement trace complexity number of traces user graphics continuous sweep and print size and format are among the many parameters that can have an affect on your particular print time Table 4 2 Typical Print Times Printer portrait Format min sec Landaoapo Format min sec dpi DeskJet DeskJet DeskJet DeskJet DeskJet DeskJet 870 680 1200C 870 680 1200C 1 Some DeskJets may not support 100 dpi resolution If your plot is 2 3 size use 150 dpi 2 These times were measured with the HP Deskjet 12000 in paper fast mode 3 Do not use a color cartridge for mono print on single cartridge DaskJets 4 Print width set to 181 mm to more closely match the size of PCL landscape print Using a Keyboard You can use an IBM PC AT compatible keyboard with your analyzer A keyboard is useful when entering and editing names for files and directories It is also useful for creating and editing IBASIC programs Option 1C2 of the analyzer front panel hardkey and softkey functions can be activated from a keyboard also See Front Panel Control Using a Keyboard later in this section To Connect
256. ng Measurement Results 1 Transmission Log Mag 10 0 dB Ref 38 60 dB be Off po657b c Figure 4 28 Hardcopy Components and Formats Available 4 93 Using Instrument Functions Printing and Plotting Measurement Results Blues outputs a list of the data trace point values This selection is only available for output to a printer List Trace Trace Values ERE ror RE CHANNEL Transmission FREQ MHz dB Mkr amp 9 300 47 91 2 047 66 92 3 794 71 87 5 541 76 94 7 288 82 18 9 035 89 23 10 782 77 77 12 529 82 95 14 276 89 84 16 023 85 46 17 770 79 86 19 517 88 97 21 264 89 75 23 011 83 53 24 758 87 51 26 505 84 91 28 252 83 51 29 999 86 01 Figure 4 27 Trace list Values NOTE Figure 4 27 shows the trace list values for a transmission measurement in log mag format Trace values for polar format will be frequency magnitude and phase while trace values for Smith chart format will be frequency resistance and complex impedance 4 94 Using Instrument Functions Printing and Plotting Measurement Rosults NOTE You may notice a decrease in measurement speed when the network analyzer is outputting to a printer or plotter that doesn t have a built in buffer For the fastest possible hardcopy dump to such devices press MENU r He before beginning the print or plot Refer to the following table for some typical print times 95 Using Instrument Functions Printing a
257. ng and Plotting Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information on using the menus 3 If this key is pressed in the CRT adjustment menu it restores the default CRT timing values Restor RF Filter Stats ON off Round Seconds Run Softkey in the cal check menu Returns to the measurement mode after viewing measurement uncertainties with View Cal Cheek This key also autoscales the display Refer to Chapter 6 for more information on using cal check Access Keys Cal Check Softkey in marker math menu Measures both the passband and stopband of a filter in one sweep See Ib Use Marker Math Functions in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys MARKER Marker Functions Marker M ath Softkey in POWER menu Turns the internal RF source off and on Default is ON Softkey in set clock menu Rounds off seconds to nearest minute Rounds down with less than 30 seconds rounds up to next minute with more than 30 seconds Access Keys system options System Config O ption 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in IBASIC menu that starts a program See the Instrument BASIC U ser s H andbook for more information Access Keys system options BASIC 9 67 HARDKEY Softkey in the custom colors menu Use this key to customize the colors of display items on your external monitor Saturation is the amount of pure color selected with the Hue key to be mixed with white Saturation values
258. ns shown below NOTE The command KRST is not the same as SYST PRESET Key Settings 12 2 Preset State and Memory Allocation MEAS Key Settings On Off On Measurement Transmission On Off Off Measurement Transmission SOURCE Key Settings FREQ Start freque 3 3 MHz Stop freque 1300 MHz Stop freque 3000 wt low pass Band pass pw pass Band pass max span 3 1299 700 MHz Band pass max span 2999 700 MHz Frequency resolution kHz SWEEP Sweep type Frequency Alternate sweep Off Sweep time Auto fastest possible 1 HP 87126 2 HP 8714C 3 Analyzers with Option 100 only 12 3 Preset State and Memory Allocation POWER Power level RF power Power sweep start power Power sweep stop power Trigger source Trigger mode umber of points Start distance Stop distance External reference Sour avoid options SOURCE Key Settings continued preset power level On 0 0 dBm 1 0 dBm Inter nal Continuous 201 0 00 ft 0 00 mi 100 00 130 48 ml Off 1 Preset power level is user defined by using the Preset Pwr Level key The factory default is 0 dBm 2 Analyzers with Option 100 only SCALE Scale div Reference level Reference position Reference tracking Electrical delay Phase offset CONFIGURE Key Settings 10 dB div 0 dB 5 Off Os 0 degrees Preset State and Memory Allocation CONFIGURE Key Settings continued D
259. nt will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument Hewlett Packard does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free 10 21 Specifications and Characteristics Warranty Limitation of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED HEWLETT PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Exclusive Remedies THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES HEWLETT PACKARD SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY 10 22 Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices If you should need technical assistance contact the nearest Hewlett Packard sales or service office See Table 10 1 on the next page 10 23 Specifications and Characteristics Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices Table 1 0 1 Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices US FIELD OPERATIONS US TMD Call Center California Northern California Southern Colorado Hew
260. ntents 6 7 39 7 40 7 41 7 41 7 43 7 44 7 46 7 49 7 50 7 52 7 52 7 53 7 54 7 54 7 56 7 59 7 60 7 61 7 62 7 63 7 64 7 66 7 68 7 69 7 71 7 72 7 72 7 73 7 74 7 74 7 75 7 76 7 80 7 82 7 82 8 Front Rear Panel Connectors X ouo S asume E SA 8 3 Connectors 2 2 2 8 5 Multi pin Connectors 8 7 RF Connectors 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 13 Display Sr LM IER 8 14 Knob T E 8 16 Line Power Switch Woo We APP 8 17 Display Intensity Control 8 19 Disk Drive lt lt ou uxo S os Reve edi a 8 20 Line Module 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 21 Power Cables 2 2 2 2 2 8 21 The Line Fuse 2 8 23 The Voltage Selector Switch 8 24 9 Set Numeric Entries 2 002 004 9 3 A 9 4 B 9 10 9 13 D 9 19 E 9 24 9 27 G 9 31 H 9 33 Ls 4 9 37 K 9 40 9 41 M 9 46 9 55 0 9 58 P 9 59 9 63 9 68 9 81 u 9 85 9 86 9 88 X 9 89 Y 9 90 Contents 7 10 Specifications and Characteristics System Specifications D D D Dynamic Measurement Port Specifications Instrument Specifications and Characteristics Source Specifications Receiver Specifications MEE es Typical M easurement Uncertainty Bite EE E NE Delay Specifications ZEE Display Charact
261. nter 4 72 To Delete a File To Copy a File CAUTION Using Instrument Functions Saving and Recalling Measurement Results 1 Highlight the file to be deleted by using the front panel knob or the 2 W keys 2 Press Delete File YES 3 Ib delete all files within the current directory press A11 Files YES 1 Highlight the file to be copied by using the front panel knob or the 1 keys 2 Press Copy File and then select the destination disk for the file to be copied You will then be given the opportunity to edit the destination file name if you wish 3 Use a keyboard if connected or the front panel knob and the softkeys to enter the destination filename There will be no warning from the analyzer if the destination file already exists It will be overwritten without warning For instance STATE1 STA on the internal memory disk and STATE1 STA on a floppy disk in the built in disk drive may contain completely different sets of data If you copy one of those files to the other without editing the file name the file will be overwritten with the source file 9 To copy all the files in the current directory press Copy 11 Files and then select the destination disk for the files to be copied 6 You will then be prompted to tell the analyzer where on the destination disk to put the files to be copied T Press Enter if you want the files to go into the main or root directory of the destination dis
262. o Max Limit and enter the maximum limit using ilie front d keypad and terminating the entry with the Grey using the front el and terminating the entry with the key NOTE Note that there are no iud Mat lines or on the display with Es limit test Therefore the Limit Peak to Peak Ripple Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing 1 Press L Use the front panel knob or the f keys to select Statistic in Press Press Ei This limit test requires that you first define a segment on the measurement trace using markers and 2 or markers 3 and 4 for measurement Sta i Statistics cule in this chapter for more information on using marker statistics the marker limit test table Turn this limit function on by pressing the on a Note that the entry in the on off column of the table changes to l Min Max Max Limit and enter the maximum limit using the front puse keypad and terminating the entry with the ENTER y Limit Min Limit and enter the minimum limit using the front panel and terminating the entry with the key NOTE Note that there are no limit lines or TIAS a on the display with limit test Function Therefore the Lan ES 4 40 Flatness Press Et Press Edit Limit Min Max Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing This limit test requires that you first define a segment
263. o generate and send hardcopy output to a PCL5 printer is 1 to 10 seconds e Use PCL or Epson language if your printer does not support PCL5 The analyzer uses Epson ESC P1 commands that are common to IBM mode devices and FX 86e FX 800 mode Epson compatible devices Use HP GL language for plotters 4 83 Selecting a Device Configuring the Analyzer for HP IB Devices Configuring the Analyzer for a LAN Printer Option 1F7 only Configuring the Analyzer for RS 232 Devices Using Instrument Functions Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters move the highlighted fart to your or plotting device then press If your HP IB printing plotting device has a different address than the analyzer default of 05 press IP IB Addr and enter the address of your printing plotting device typical factory defaults printer 01 plotter 05 Use the front panel numeric key pad to make your entry Press LAB Printy IP Addr Use an external keyboard connected to the analyzer s rear panel DIN KEYBOARD connector and type in the LAN IP address For information on using a keyboard see Bunt a later to point to and select each character of the IP T Then press Ente Refer to User s Guide Supplement for Option 1F7 for information on using the LAN connection for printing 1 If the baud rate of your device is different than the printing plotting device Refer to your Bun or plotter manual for th
264. o set up the analyzer s parameters for a simple measurement is to use the BEGIN key See Using the BEGIN Key to Make Measurements next in this chapter For some measurements you may wish to enter your own specific measurement parameters Use the instrument s keys to input your parameters This step may be omitted under certain conditions Your analyzer can provide highly accurate measurements without performing any additional user calibrations if certain conditions are met Chapter 6 explains when additional calibration is necessary Connect the DUT and any other required test equipment See the measurement examples later in this chapter for typical equipment setup conhgurations Use the SCALE DISPLAY and functions to optimize viewing of the measurement results Markers limit lines and hard copies of the display are common means of interpreting measurement results See Chapter 4 for detailed information on using instrument functions to view and interpret your measurements Using the BEGIN Key to Make Measurements r3 ce c EJ cJ c oO NETWORK ANALYZER Figure 3 4 The Key po610b The key allows you to quickly and easily configure the analyzer from the condition to measure the following devices e amplifiers e filters e broadband passive devices e mixers e cables Option 100 only Configuring basic measurements from the key helps you ensure correct instrument set up The analyze
265. o the internal floppy disk internal non volatile memory or internal volatile memory Built in service diagnostics are available to simplify troubleshooting procedures Measurement calibrations and data averaging provide performance improvement and flexibility Measurement calibrations consist of normalizing data utilizing the internal factory calibration or calibrating with external standards Measurement calibration reduces errors associated with directivity frequency response and source match Directivity is corrected to 40 dB and source match to 30 dB for unproved measurements iii How to Use This Guide The first 7 chapters of this guide explain how to perform measurements calibrate the instrument and use the most common instrument functions Chapters 8 through 12 are reference material Use these chapters to look up information such as front panel features specific key functions and specifications Contents 1 Installing the Analyzer Step 1 Check the Shipment Step 2 Meet Electrical and Environmental Requirements Step 3 Check the Analyzer Operation Step 4 Configure the Analyzer Connecting Peripherals and Controllers Installing the Analyzer In a Rack Preventive Maintenance 2 Getting Started Front Panel Tour Entering Measurement Parameters Performing the Operator s Check Equipment List Make a Transmission Measurement Make a Reflection Measurement If the Analyzer Fails the Operator s Check
266. oes not cause the limit test to fail because it is past the limit line stop frequency of 200 MHz But there is an area on the data trace between 198 MHz and 200 MHz that is above the displayed limit line END LIMIT at 200 MHz MAXIMUM Y DATA f LIMIT LINE IN QUESTION FN next A DATA POINT at 210 MHz v e e e e e 90 102 114 126 138 150 162 174 186 198 DATA POINTS MH 2 po654b Figure 4 18 limit lines Example 2 Using Reference Tracking The reference tracking functions allow you to track either the peak point or a certain frequency of a measurement trace It does this by adjusting the reference level with each sweep so that the point of interest always falls on the display reference line When reference tracking is on marker values are displayed relative to the point of interest Limit lines are also displayed relative to the point of interest when reference tracking is on You may want to use relative limits when the shape of a measurement trace is more important than the absolute amplitude See To Use Relative Limits earlier in this chapter for an example of using relative limit lines 4 50 Using Instrument Functions Using Reference Tracking To Track the Peak Point 1 If you want to move the reference position indicated by the symbol on the left side of the display press SCALE Reference Position and then use the front panel knob the ft keys o
267. olate correction for the narrower span 6 13 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method Note that after you have calibrated a appears in the upper right hand corner of the display This indicates that a user defined cal not the default is in use If you change to a narrower span note that the C changes to C indicating the analyzer is now interpolating between calibrated measurement points The notation also appears when other system parameters such as power number of points or sweep time have changed 6 14 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method To Perform a Conversion Loss Calibration Conversion loss measurements typically utilize only a normalization calibration See lb Perform a Normalization Calibration earlier in this chapter When in conversion loss measurement mode the analyzer is using its internal broadband detectors and pressing the CAL key calls up a menu for zeroing the detectors Zeroing the detectors helps compensate for drift due to changes in ambient temperature The two CAL selections for conversion loss mode are Autozero periodically compensates for detector drift due to changes in temperature When autozero is selected the detectors are automatically zeroed approximately every five minutes A pop up message will briefly appear on the analyzer s display when t
268. ommand and DISP WIND2 GRAPHICS command For more details on IBASIC graphics refer to Graphics and Display Techniques in the manual supplement U sing HP Instrument BASIC with the HP 871 1C 12C 13C 14C provided in the HP Instrument BASIC User s H andbook 7 2 Automating Measurements Operator Interaction User Defined Key Menu This feature requires the IBASIC option 1C2 User BEGIN adds the following capabilities Redefine softkeys to implement single key press functions for example fast Save or Recall e Redefine softkeys to implement your most used functions features Redefine softkeys to implement new features created with IBASIC for example a gain compression implementation e Redefine softkeys to implement application support The feature is designed to provide the fastest possible sweep speeds while taking advantage of the flexibility provided by IBASIC This is the simplest way for recalling instrument states or configuring most used softkey functions under a single softkey menu The menu softkey 8 provides access to the menus below Toggle softkey 8 to enable disable BEGIN You cannot redefine softkey 8 Amplifier Filter Broadband Passive Mixer Cable Option 100 onlyl abe User BEGIN on OFF Vo AR User BEGIN ON off 7 22 Automating Measurements Operator Interaction Once you have selected a menu the same menu will be displayed for subsequent key
269. on Marker Number Y Axis Annotation limit Test Pass Fail Indicator Using Instrument Functions Customizing the Display The marker annotation that appears in the pera of the Annotation Options Mkr Annot ON The marker numbers that appear above below marker symbols can be turned on or off by pressing A 1 Options Mkr Number ON Press DISPLAY More Display Annot Y 151 rel ABS to toggle the y axis annotation and values in ABS mode the absolute value of each horizontal graticule line is indicated in REL mode the value of each horizontal graticule line is indicated relative to the value of the reference line Ib turn on or off the y axis annotation press More Display Annotation Options Y Axis 151 ON off The limit test pass fail indicator can be moved to any position on the display screen the a of the pass fail ee m TOTAN 5 and Limit Icon LY Position are to position the pass fail indicator where desired Limit Options Limit Text on OFF To enable or disable the display of the limit ral indicator AN press DISPLAY Limit Menu Limit Op Limit Using Instrument Functions Customizing the Display Expanding the Displayed Measurement Normally the displayed measurement is limited in size due to the softkey menu and the surrounding annotation The expanded display feature removes these size limiting factors with the exception of annotation in
270. on the measurement trace using eS 1 and 2 ase markers 3 and 4 for measurement channel tions Math Flat to enable the statistics eee ach See To Use Marker Flatness earlier in this chapter for more information on using marker statistics Press Limit Menu Mkr Limits Use the front panel knob or the keys to select Flatness in the marker limit test table Turn this limit function on by pressing the Limit on OFF key Note that the entry in the on off column of the table changes to Limit Min Max t and enter the maximum limit using the front panel keypad and terminating the entry with the ENTER y i Limit and enter the minimum limit using the front panel keypad and terminating the entry with the key NOTE Note that Hes are no lines or on the display with Hs limit test 4 41 Delta Amplitude Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing This marker limit test allows you to set marker 1 as an amplitude reference against which marker 2 is limit tested 1 This limit test requires that you first use marker 1 to determine the reference amplitude Press 1 and then use the front panel knob or the f keys to place marker 1 at the desired place on the measurement trace The amplitude of marker 1 at this point becomes the delta reference for this marker limit test Press Limit Menu Mkr Limits Use the front panel knob or the 1I keys to select
271. ons number of points external reference and spur avoid features MHz Softkey in display frequency resolution menu Displays frequency to MHz resolution For example 1 234 567 MHz is displayed as 1 MHz note rounding down Access Keys Min Limit Softkey in marker limits menu Use this key to set the minimum limit for the marker limit function that is currently highlighted in the on screen table See To Use Marker Limit Functions in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys DISPLAY REPLAY I Limit Menu Mkr Limits Min Search Softkey in marker search menu Places the active marker at the frequency point of minimum amplitude If tracking is off marker remains at that frequency If tracking is on marker moves to the minimum point with each sweep See Using Markers in Bde 4 for more information Mixer ON off Softkey Reference M Softkey in menu Displays menu with selections suitable for mixer and frequency converter measurements conversion loss reflection and AM delay for analyzers with Option 1DA or 1DB See Measuring Conversion Loss in Chapter 3 for an example conversion loss measurement Softkey in annotation options menu Allows you to toggle the marker information displayed in the upper right corner of the display on or off See Customizing the Display in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys DISPLAY More Softkey in marker limits menu Turns marker
272. ontrol Fast Iterative Control You may want to quickly and iteratively change the analyzer s parameters and monitor their effect on your device under test This section describes how to quickly change a parameter take a sweep and query a marker For example when measuring an amplifier you may wish to quickly choose the optimal input power to the amplifier which will result in a maximum output of 10 dBm To do so you can first set the analyzer s source power level then measure the amplifier s output and then change the analyzer s source power in the direction that will cause the measured signal to approach the desired value This process can be repeated until the measured amplifier output is within some specified range of the target value When data at only a single frequency is needed you can achieve the fastest possible sweep by selecting a CW frequency and setting the number of points to the minimum value of 3 A SCPI marker command can be used to read the trace value Using this approach you can typically achieve 3 to 5 sweeps per second Following is a listing of an example program named FAST_CW that can be found on your Example Programs Disk 100 DIMFreq_str 20 110 DIMMsg 100 120 130 IF POS SYSTEM SYSTEM ID HP 871 THEN 140 ASSIGN 8711 TO 800 150 160 ASSIGN 8711 TO 716 170 ABORT 7 180 CLEAR 716 190 ENDIF 200 210 PRESET to ensure known state 220 OUTPUT Hp8711 SY
273. or from IBASIC or both at the same time if certain precautions are observed Things to consider 7 1 If both the analyzer and the computer send SCPI commands at the same time the analyzer may not finish the IBASIC command before executing the computer s command or vice versa The programmer must ensure that SCPI commands executed by IBASIC do not overlap with SCPI commands sent froman external controller otherwise the system may deadlock Synchronization between the analyzer and the controller must be ensured See Synchronizing the Analyzer and a Controller in the supplement to the Instrument BASIC U ser s andbook for additional information Both IBASIC SelectCode 8 and the external controller LAN or SelectCode 7 share the same HP IB status model the same analyzer status bits go to each Be careful sending commands which affect status reporting such as CLS STAT PRES RST etc 14 BASIC IBASIC Automating Measurements Configuring Your Test System Selecting a Programming Language HP BASIC has long been a favorite programming language for instrument control It features an extensive list of keywords and powerful OUTPUT and ENTER formatting making it easy to perform common tasks This generally results in very high programming productivity HP BASIC runs on HP series 700 and 300 workstations IBASIC is a version of BASIC that runs inside of the network analyzer You may order IBASIC with
274. or more information A corrected source match of 30 dB indicates a good calibration for these two calibration choices See Figure 6 5 gt 1 Memory Log Mag 5 0 dB Ref 55 00 dB C ba Of f HHH Start 0 300 MHz Stan 1 300 000 MHz Figure 6 5 Typical Source Match Corrected Error Term other calibration types do not correct for source match The source match error term for other types of calibrations will be equal to the raw source match of the port in these cases See Figure 6 6 This value can be in the 15 dB range 6 31 Calibraring for Increased Measurement Accuracy Check the Calibration gt 1 Memory Log Mag 5 0 dB Ref 25 00 dB D2 Off 30 35 40 45 Start 0 300 MHz Stoo 1 300 000 MHz Figure 6 6 Typical Source Match Uncorrected Error Term 6 32 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Check the Calibration Load Match Load match is a transmission measurement error term It 1 a measure of the re reflections contributed from the match of the THRU standard and the receiver port RF IN A typical value for this match term is 10 dB F1 Memory Log Mag 5 0 dB Ref 45 00 dB C P2 Off i i Start 0 300 MHZ Ston 1 300 000 MHZ Figure 6 7 Typi
275. ore capacitive Making Measurements Measuring Impedance Using the Smith Chart Constant Reactance Constant Resistance M jto a peso mae gt Inductive OO la OG Capacitive Jio X E j250 System Impedance j50 po645b c Figure 3 23 Interpreting the Smith Chart d The magnitude and phase of the reflection coefficient p can be determined by reading the Smith chart as follows lp the distance from the measurement point to the center point on the chart See Figure 3 24 Z p 2 0 the angle between the horizontal axis of the Smith chart and a line from the center point to the measurement point See Figure 3 24 Making Measurements Measuring Impedance Using the Smith Chart Measurement Measurement Point Point Center Center Point Point 9 po lb c Figure 3 24 Determining the Magnitude and Phase of the Reflection Coefficient 4 Figure 3 25 on the net page shows an example of an actual measurement Note the marker readout in the upper right corner of the display The marker values are frequency resistance reactance and the equivalent capacitance or inductance respectively 3 60 Making Measurements Measuring Impedance Using the Smith Chart Pl Reflection Smith 1U FS dm Chl Mkr 1 175 000 MHz 73 33 18 62 16 93 nH Q 0 j10 525250 j25 j 100 Center 175 000 MHz Span 200 000 MHz po856b c Figure 3 25 Example of
276. ory of the active measurement channel Softkey in clock format menu Formats the real time internal clock to display y time as Day Month Year Hour Minute Access Keys Clock Fo SYSTEM OPTIONS Softkey in user TTL config menu Pressing this softkey configures the rear panel USER TTL IN OUT connector for general purpose I O use with IBASIC and SPCI commands This connector can also be configured for softkey sequencing using an external switch and as a sweep out connector See User Defined TTL Input Output in Chapter 7 and BNC Connectors in Chapter 8 for more information 9 19 tay Reference Config User TIE C Access Keys SYSTEM OPTIONS System Softkey in set pen numbers menu Resets plotter pen number assignments to their default values See Define the Printer or Plotter Settings in Chapter 4 for default values Access Keys HARD COPY Def ie Plotter Set Pen Number Softkey in define hardcopy menu Displays menu to define which parts of the graph are to be printed or plotted trace data graticule annotation marker symbol title and clock or combinations See Printing and a Measurement Results in Chapter 4 y Softkey in HARDCOPY menu Displays menu to define the hardcopy in terms of information to be copied Default setting is Graph Only See Printing and Plotting Measurement Results in Chapter 4 Softkey in menu Displays menu to define a
277. ot fall within these ranges an autotransformer that provides third wire continuity to ground should be used 3 Ensure the operating environment meets the following requirements for safety e indoor use e altitude up to 15 000 feet 4 572 meters e temperature 0 C to 55 C maximum relative humidity 5 to 95 percent relative at 40 C non condensing this product is designed for use in INSTALLATION CATEGORY II and POLLUTION DEGREE 2 This product is designed for use in Installation Category and Pollution CAUTION Don NOTE The above requirements are for safety only Separate conditions that must be met for specified performance are noted in Chapter 10 WARNING Installing the Analyzer Step 2 Meet Electrical and Environmental Requirements 4 Verify that the power cable is not damaged and that the power source outlet provides a protective earth ground contact Note that the following illustration depicts only one type of power source outlet Refer to Figure 8 11 to see the different types of power cord plugs that can be used with your analyzer PROTECTIVE EARTH GROUND 4E o pp65c Figure 1 2 Protective Earth Ground o This is a Safety Class I product provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of th
278. ot used as specified the protection provided by the equipment could be impaired This instrument must be used in a normal condition in which all means for protection are intact only For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same type and rating T 5 A 250 V The use of other fuses or material is prohibited This is a Safety Class I product provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited 11 3 Caution Definition CAUTION Safety and Regulatory Information Safety Information Cautions Caution denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure that if not correctly performed or adhered to would result in damage to or destruction of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Cautions applicable to this instrument are Always use the three prong ac power cord supplied with this instrument Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may cause product damage Statement of Compliance This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring Apparatus and has bee
279. ou will be performing After you have selected the type of measurement under the or key press the key Pressing the key brings up calibration choices for the type of measurement you selected in the Or menu See Table 6 1 for the types of calibrations available for each type of measurement The following sections in this chapter discuss these different types of calibrations organized by measurement type There is also a discussion of a type of calibration called normalization 6 8 Calibrating for increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method Table 6 1 Calibration Types Measurement Type Calibntion Choices Transmission Restore Defaults Response Response amp Isolation Enhanced Response Reflection Restore Defaults One Port Fault Location See your Option 709 User s Guide Supplement Power Autozero Manual Zero Normalize Conversion loss Delay ore Defaults ponse ali Unratioed narrowband internal detection Nor 1 Option 100 only 2 Options 1DA and 1DB only NOTE The active calibration will be retained in the analyzer S memory when power is turned off and will be restored when power is turned back NOTE There is no decrease in sweep speed when a calibration is used CAUTION CAUTION Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method To Perform a Normalization Calibration Normalization is the simplest
280. our Minute Access Keys svsrEM options System Conf ig Set Clock YYYY MM DD HH MM 10 Specifications and Characteristics System Specifications Specifications and Characteristics The specifications and characteristics in this section describe the system performance of the analyzer Specifications are valid after the analyzer has been turned on and allowed to warm up for at least one hour The system is defined as the network analyzer itself which includes a built in transmission reflection test set and the following A calibration kit either HP 850323 50 Q HP 850363 75 Q A test port cable either HP part number 8120 6469 50 Q or HP part number 8120 6468 75 Q Specifications describe the instrument s warranted performance over the temperature range of 25 5 C unless otherwise stated These specifications are valid only after the instrument has been turned on and allowed to warm up for at least one hour Supplemental characteristics indicated by italics are typical but nonwarranted parameters intended to provide information useful in applying the instrument Dynamic Range Receiver dynamic range is calculated as the difference between the maximum receiver input level and the receiver s noise floor System dynamic range applies to transmission narrowband measurements only since reflection measurements are limited by directivity Noise floor is specified as the mean of the noise trace a
281. ow number is 1 if in full screen display and 1 or 2 for the upper and lower split screen displays See Figure 7 11 for an example of a display with the graticule turned off 7 63 Automating Measurements Displaying Measurement Results Limit Testing The measurement trace can be automatically compared to limits which you define The limits entered as lines and points can be displayed on the screen or can be hidden Whether or not the limits are displayed the analyzer will VN PASS if the measurement satisfies the limits and will display the symbol if the measurement exceeds the limits Using limits gives the operator visual guides when tuning devices provides standard criteria for meeting device specifications and shows an instant indication of the comparison of data vs specifications To turn limit lines on or off press DISPLAY Limi Limit Line UN off or use these SCPI commands CALC 1 2 LIMit DISPlay ON CALC 1 2 LIMit DISPlay OFF where 12 indicates the measurement channel number either 1 or 2 e Ib turn the fail icon or off m E ED DisPLAY Limit Menu DISP ANN LIM ICON 1 2 FLAG ON DISP ANN LIM ICON 1 2 FLAG OFF lb turn the pass fail text on or off press DISPLAY Limit Menu ions Limit T ON off or use these SCPI commands DISP ANN LIM ICON 1 2 TEXT ON DISP ANN LIM ICON 1 2 TEXT OFF e lb move the position of the pass fail indicator press Limit Menu Limit Op
282. p COPY Define Hardcopy Softkey in autotrack menu Turns LO autotracking on or off See To Use LO Autotracking in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Autotrack Softkey in update correction constants menu Loads a temporary copy of CC data from floppy disk to the analyzer s internal volatile RAM See the Service Guide for more information Access Keys SYSTEMOPTIONS Service 6 Corr Const Softkey in the cal check menu One of the corrected measurement uncertainties that can be viewed after performing a cal check Refer to Chapter 6 for more information on using cal check Access Keys CAL Cal Check View Cal Check Log Mag Softkey in menu Displays the logarithmic magnitude of the data in lt dB This is the default format y Reference L Sof Softkey in the save ASCII menu Saves measurement data in a format compatible with popular spreadsheet programs such as Lotus 1 2 3 See Saving Instrument Data in Chapter 4 for more information Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in BASIC display menu Displays the IBASIC program on the lower half of the screen and measurement data on the upper half See the HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook for more information Access Keys system options IBASIC IBASIC Display Softkey in the custom colors menu Use this key to customize the colors of display items your external monitor Luminance specifies th
283. port register data and OUTPUT DIAG PORT READ port register ENTER Rfna Data or you can use IBASIC and its READIO and WRITEIO commands See the following tables for more information Automating Measurements Controlling Peripherals Table 7 4 Writeable Ports 15 Outputs 8 bit data to the Cent 00 thru 07 lines of the Centronics port Cent DO is the least significant bit Cent D7 is the most significant bit Checks Centronics status lines for Out of Paper Printer Not on tine BUSY ACKNOWLEDGE e user bit according to the least significant bit of A A least significant bit s the user bit high A least significant bit of 0 clears the user bit Sets clears the limit pass fail bit according to the least significant bit of A A least significa bit equal to 1sets the pass fail bit high A least significant bit of clears the pass fail bit 15 3 Outputs B bit data to the Cent DO thru 07 lines of the Centronics port Cent_DO is t least significant bit Cent 07 is the most significant bit Sets the Printer select signal de select Does not check Centronics status lines Outputs a byte to the serial port The byte for the serial port is output serially according to the configurati Table 7 5 Readable Ports u o 2 15 mE WE Reads the limit test pass fail bit 15 10 Reads the 8 bit status port DO Cent acknow ledge
284. presses of the hardkey This is not true if your IBASIC program has changed If your program has changed the 361 SIN mode is reset to By selecting SYSTEM options Syst g Softkey User TTL Input you can automatically through th m lu menu keys by use of a switch connected to the USER TTL IN OUT rear panel connector See Using User Defined with a Switch later in this chapter for more information T Selecting the User BEGIN softkey will run a macro function defined by a sequence of IBASIC commands defmed within an IBASIC program IBASIC programs to be used for User BEGIN must have the following structure The following label must be present DO NOT REMOVE User begin Define softkey labels OUTPUT 871X DISP MENU2 KEY1 Test Setup 1 WAI OUTPUT 0871X DISP MENU2 KEY2 Test Setup 2 WAI OUTPUT 60871X DISP MENU2 KEY3 Save Results WAI OUTPUT 0871X DISP 2 4 Print Results 4 WAI 100 User pause PAUSE 110 GOTO User pause 120 The following key labels must be present DO NOT REMOVE 140 User keyl Insert code for softkey 1 here 150 GOTO User pause 160 User key2 Insert code for softkey 2 here 170 GOTO User pause 200 User key7 Insert code for softkey 7 here 210 GOTO User pause 7 23 Automating Measurements Operator Interaction The labels required are User begin User pause User keyl User key2 User key3 User key4 User keyb5 User
285. pressing Sel ct Disk Non Vol RAM Disk 4 If you have previously saved any files to this disk they will now be listed on the display Auto mating Measurements Measurement Setup and Control with Fast Recall The fast recall feature utilizes only the first seven files listed that contain instrument state calibration or measurement data If you have not previously saved any files to this disk you many want to save a few instrument states now to follow along t on OFF Note that the measurement display r now reappears on 1 the screen and that there are file names next to the first seven softkeys If any of the softkeys are blank it s because you had less than seven files saved on the disk The files are placed on the softkeys in the order in which they appear in the disk s directory table OTE You may want to use the Rename amp feature to give your files more meaningful names See Other File Utilities in Chapter 4 for information on renaming files 10 11 7 42 Ib fast recall an instrument state press the softkey next to the file that contains the instrument state The fast recall toggle will remain on even when the analyzer is PRESET until manually turned off With the fast recall feature turned on you will always be only 1 or 2 key presses away from recalling an instrument state With an external keyboard connected to the rear panel DIN connector keys F1 through F7
286. purchased at that time To determine the exact warranty on your instrument contact the nearest Hewlett Packard sales or service office with the model and serial number of your instrument See Table 10 1 for a list of sales and service offices This Hewlett Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for the warranty period During the warranty period Hewlett Packard Company will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective If the warranty covers repair or service to be performed at Buyer s facility then the service or repair will be performed at the Buyer s facility at no charge within HP service travel areas Outside HP service travel areas warranty service will be performed Buyer s facility only upon HP s prior agreement and Buyer shah pay HP s round trip travel expenses In all other areas products must be returned to a service facility designated by HI If the product is to be returned to Hewlett Packard for service or repair it must be returned to a service facility designated by Hewlett Packard Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Hewlett Packard and Hewlett Packard shah pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shah pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to Hewlett Packard from another country Hewlett Packard warrants that its software and firmware designated by Hewlett Packard for use with an instrume
287. put The USER TTL port can be used as a general purpose input or output Like the LIMIT TEST IN OUT line the USER TTL IN OUT line is au open collector drive When used as an input the state of the USER TTL IN OUT line can be read with either the SCPI command DIAG PORT READ 15 1 or with the IBASIC command I READIO 15 1 When used as an output the state of the USER TTL IN OUT line can be set with either the SCPI command DIAG PORT WRITE 15 1 value or with the IBASIC command WRITEIO 15 1 value The USER TTL IN OUT port can also be used in conjunction with an external switch for softkey auto stepping or as a sweep out port Be sure that USER TTL IN OUT port is configured properly for general purpose VO by pressing g ig Default Or use SYSTEM OPTIONS the following SCPI Command SYST COMM TTL USER FEEIDEFAULT Be sure to observe static precautions when using this port 7 34 Automating Measurements Operator Interaction Using a Foot Switch or Button Box You can connect a foot switch button box or custom keyboard which has a few function keys that are custom labeled and use this in conjunction with IBASIC to allow consistent error free step by step measurement control The operator presses one key then the next in order The foot switch simply connects two wires together grounding the center pin of the analyzer s USER TTL IN OUT rear panel connector See Figure 7 6 The status of the USER TTL I
288. put A are measured by comparison to the incident signal The network analyzer couples off a small portion of the incident signal to use as a reference signal routed to input R The network analyzer sweeps the source frequencies resulting in a measured and displayed response of your test device Figure 3 2 shows the transmitted reflected and reference signal inputs 3 4 Making Measurements Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer Transmi ion RF In Reflection RF Out Device Under Test pp615c Figure 3 2 Simplified Block Diagram 3 5 Making Measurements Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer Refer to Figure 3 3 for the following discussion The network analyzer receiver has two signal detection modes e broadband detection mode e narrowband detection mode There are two internal broadband detector inputs B and R External broadband detectors can also be used when connected to the X and Y ports on the rear panel of the analyzer When the network analyzer is in the broadband detection mode it measures the total power of all signals present at these measurement ports independent of signal frequency This enables the characterization of frequency translation devices such as mixers receivers and tuners where the RF input and output frequencies are not the same Figure 3 3 labels the transmitted signal for broadband detection input as B and the reference signal as R When the network ana
289. r broadband measurements Always use attenuation on the TRANSMISSION RF IN port if your test device s output power exceeds the receiver damage limit of 23 dBm or 25 Vdc Use attenuation on the RF IN port to reduce mismatch errors See Reducing Mismatch Errors in Chapter 5 for more information In an AM delay measurement Options 1DA and 1DB only use attenuation directly before the DUT if the device s input power must be less than the 10 dBm minimum specified detector level If you reduce the input power to the DUT by lowering the analyzer s source power the reference detector X will be below its specified range Use attenuation directly after the DUT if the device s output power is greater than the 13 dBm maximum specified detector level For accurate measurements amplification may be needed on the analyzer s RF OUT port Use amplification when your test device requires input power that exceeds the analyzer s maximum specified output power The maximum specified output power is highly dependent upon the model and option configuration of your analyzer as well as the frequency range of your test setup It ranges from 4 to 16 dBm See Source Specifications in Chapter 10 to determine the maximum specified output power of your analyzer In an AM delay measurement Options 1DA and 1DB only use amplification directly before the DUT if the device s input power must be greater than the maximum power a
290. r guides you through the initial steps and configures itself for the device type you select 3 12 Making Measurements Using the BEGIN Kay to Make Measurements Selecting a New Device Selecting a New Measurement Key Overview The key sets up a generic instrument state for the testing of various types of devices The BEGIN key has two different behaviors depending on whether you are selecting a new device type or a new measurement type When you use the key to select a new device type and measurement the analyzer does the following e presets the analyzer except for external reference parameters and trigger mode e takes a sweep e autoscales the measurement e places a marker the maximum or minimum point depending on the type of measurement e makes the marker active displays the AM delay connection diagram when AM delay measurement is chosen Option 1DA or 1DB only modifies the sweep time Option 100 only See Table 3 1 for a table of parameters for each measurement type Once you have selected your device you can use the softkeys to select the measurement you wish to make When you select a new measurement a preset is not done It is assumed that you are simply changing measurement types and that you may have changed some of the analyzer s parameters such as frequency power etc for your DUT and that you would not want these parameters changed for subsequent measurements 3 13 Mak
291. r the numeric keypad to enter a new reference position A number is assigned to each possible reference position See Figure 4 19 E di 9 8 7 8 5 4 3 2 1 0 po652b c Figure 4 1 9 Reference Positions 2 Press SCALE Reference raak The reference level is now adjusted with each sweep s 0 that the peak point on the measurement trace falls on the reference line Note that the y axis is now a relative scale with all amplitude values referenced to the reference line 3 To turn reference tracking off press SCALE Reference T The y axis reverts to its previous scale format and the reference di is readjusted so that the measurement trace is placed correctly on the display for absolute measurements Using Instrument Functions Using Reference Tracking To Track a Frequency 1 If you want to move the reference position by the gt ie on the left side of the display press SCALE Re eP then use the front panel knob the I keys or ihe numeric S keypad to enter a new reference position number is assigned to each possible reference position See udi 4 19 2 Press SCALE Ref erence T Use the front panel knob the f D iad to enter the frequency of interest Press SCALE Ref erence a The reference level is now adjusted with each sweep so that quency of interest
292. r types the easy way to enter definitions is to download them from a file on disk Use the template program on the Example Programs disk DOS format as a starting point The format of a cal kit file is explained in the next section How to Download Standards Definitions Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method NOTE Calibration kit definitions mU St be in DOS format LIF format is not supported for cal kit definitions 1 Insert the disk with the cal standard definitions into the analyzer s built in disk drive 2 Press Save RECALL and note the first word of the second line on the screen If it is not INT V for internal disk press Select Disk 3 Highlight the file CALKIT in the case of the Example Programs disk 4 Press Racal and wait for the prompt Loaded cal kit information for 4 calibration standards Recall of cal kit from CALKIT complete Cal kit coefficients are displayed in the cal kit block of the operating parameters screen press SYSTEM OPTIONS 0 6 18 Step 1 Determine the Standard Characteristics Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method Writing or Editing Your Own Cal Kit File There are several situations that may require you to define your own calibration kit definition Here are three examples e You are using a connector type TNC or BNC for example which is not one of th
293. raction e Measurement Setup and Control with Fast Recall e Automated Measurement Setup and Control e Controlling Peripherals e Displaying Measurement Results e Saving Measurement Results NOTE BASIC Option 102 when installed on your network analyzer acts as a complete system controller residing inside your analyzer 7 4 Configuring Your Test System Measurement System Topology When configuring your test system there are many things to consider such as How many test stations do you need How many test stations will be needed in the future How much space is available at each test station What type of testing will be done How will the measurement be controlled How will the data be analyzed and archived What level of throughput is required After answering these questions you should decide which of the following configurations best meets your needs 1 5 Stand Alone Network Analyzers Automating Measurements Configuring Your Test System In this configuration the measurement is controlled directly by the operator with very little automation No computer or IBASIC control is used however the fast recall feature may be used for quickly changing to different instrument states This configuration is well suited for simple go no go device testing using the built in limit testing features Configure your system as a stand alone analyzer if you would like to e Simplify test system configuration e Re
294. rea indicates indicato 155 The sweep lass tha o The reference leve on the left A C appears hare when a user de otation becomes C to indicate th The message area is where you wil ents bef appears Whether the sca At sweeptimes a for the active ined calibr ore disappearing here i The reference level is selected using the SCALE key ation is at interpolated error receive messages f e is absolute Abs o the lower left corner of use correction is 0 om the analyze ive Rell rela f the frequency span has been narrowed the n r from time to time Most messages appear he display when the analyzer is sweeping at a rate bove 15 s the sweep indicator moves across the screen with the data trace easurement channel is indicated by a small triangle P adjacent to the graticule Title and date area Active en Marker annotation When ave area aging is turned on the average indicator appears hare ry area used to enter or adjust values for operating parameters 1 if a U for uncalibrated appears here at any time your instrument will not perform accurate measurements and needs servicing See Table 10 1 in Chapter 10 far a lis of Hewlett Packard sales and service offices Knob The front panel knob is used to increase or decrease parameter values The front panel knob is used to give an analog feel to th
295. rmed e For reflection measurements a one port calibration was performed 10 11 Uncertainty dB S21 Uncertainty deg 1 52 50 Specifications and Characteristics Instrument Specifications and Characteristics HP 87 126 Uncertainty Curves 21 Magnitude Uncertainty Test Pert power 20 dBm 0 3 to 1380 MHz 521 Transmission Coefficient 21 Phase Uncertainty Test Part Power 20 dBm 0 3 to 1300 MHz 10 10 30 50 70 Sel Transmission Coefficient 10 12 Uncertainty S1 deg ertainty 11 Magnitude Uncertainty Test Part Power 0 dBm 0 3 to 1308 MHz 8 4 B 8 1 511 Reflection Coefficient 11 Phase Uncertainty Test Part Power 0 dBm 3 to 1300 MHz 2 4 B 1 511 Reflection Coefficient Uncertainty dB sai 521 Uncertainty deg Specifications and Characteristics Instrument Specifications and Characteristics HP 8714 Uncertainty Curves 21 Magnitude Uncertainty Test Part Power 20 dBm 1 3 to 3 GHz 30 19 10 30 50 70 Sel Transmission Coefficient 21 Phase Uncertainty Teat Pert Power 20 dBm 1 3 to 3 GHz N PA
296. rnal Monitor You can connect a VGA compatible external monitor to the VIDEO OUT COLOR VGA connector for a large screen color view of your measurement if you wish See Using an External VGA Monitor in Chapter 4 for information on using an external monitor with your system Measurement Setup and Control with Fast Recall The production of RF components often involves several steps each step requiring a unique set of instrument settings Likewise the different test configurations at each step may require associated calibrations Manually entering these sets of parameters or states or calibrating at each step in the manufacturing process is slow prone to error and costly The fast recall feature allows you to recall an instrument state with just 1 or 2 key presses or to cycle through up to seven different instrument states with a foot switch Using Fast Recall with the Front Panel or a Keyboard NOTE The following explanation assumes that you are familiar with the information presented in Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 1 Press SAVE RECALL 2 If the measurement display area changes to a listing of files on the currently selected disk fast recall is OFF If the measurement display area remains unchanged fast recall is ON Ib follow along with this explanation turn fast recall OFF by pressing the Fas off softkey 3 If necessary select the internal non volatile RAM disk by
297. rolled by a Computer 7 10 Network Analyzers With IBASIC Controlled by Computer s Automating Measurements Configuring Your Test System In this configuration the measurement is controlled by an IBASIC program running inside the analyzer IBASIC can provide high speed measurement control and data collection and save the results in program memory or on disk The external computer then communicates with IBASIC and collects the measurement results at some defined interval This configuration can result in higher throughput especially if the measurement setup and control is complex Configure your system as an analyzer with IBASIC Option 1C2 and an external computer if you would like to e Centralize automation and application programs e Develop a more sophisticated system e Add networking e Add local automation capability IBASIC PROGRAM PROGRAM 1 20 OUTPUT ENTER ANALYZER LAN or pp610c Figure 7 4 Network Analyzer Running IBASIC Controlled by a Computer Automating Measurements Configuring Your Test System Expandability and Large Systems When connecting more than one analyzer to one computer using HP IB you can connect up to 10 analyzers and achieve maximum HP IB bus speed The IEEE 488 standard states that the bus can achieve a data rate of 500 KBytes per second for buses up to 20 meters in length with up to one device per 2 meters of cable IEEE 488 provides for 31 uniq
298. ross the analyzer s REFLECTION port Reflection 11 Figure 3 26 Impedance Calculation for Reflection Measurements 3 63 Making Measurements Measuring Impedance Magnitude How the Transmission Measurement Works In a transmission measurement the data can be converted to its equivalent mathematical series impedance using the model and equations shown in Figure 3 27 Transmission T 2 1 T Z Trans 2 20 Figure 3 27 Impedance Calculation for Transmission Measurements pp612 In the formula shown above T is the complex transmission response The complex impedance Ztyans is computed based on T and ZO The analyzer displays the magnitude of Zyyans This is not the same as two port Z parameter conversion as only the measured parameter is used in the equations Since the transmission response calibration cannot correct for source and load match errors the results of the transmission transform are less accurate than the reflection transform To minimize these errors a good source match and load match are required One way to achieve this is to use pads on both sides of the device Be sure to connect the pads before performing the calibration When interpreting the resulting impedance measurement remember that the analyzer is computing a transform and displaying the equivalent series impedance If your device has significant shunt impedance the results may differ significantl
299. roughput is defined as the sum of the following factors e operator interaction time e measurement speed e data transfer speed e computation speed when applicable Be sure to consider all of these factors when choosing and setting up an automated system An automated system can perform repetitive tasks quickly and repeatedly Automation can be used to direct you through a sequence of tests to set instrument parameters and to send prompts with helpful directions or diagrams Automation is also used to collect data to monitor production line performance and to archive and analyze data Automating your measurements can help ensure consistent quality on a production line Using a consistent documented production process while monitoring product quality are important attributes of modern production standards such as ISO 9000 These attributes are best achieved with an automated system NOTE Hewlett Packard offers professional consulting services to help increase your manufacturing productivity complete test process analysis can be performed by HP system engineers who will work with your factory management engineering and production groups to evaluate various automation solutions For more information contact the nearest HP sales office Refer to Chapter 10 for a table of sales and Service offices Automating Measurements The following sections are included in this chapter e Configuring Your Test System e Operator Inte
300. rs for best image These settings are not affected Jus by presetting the analyzer 5 These adjustments also affect the internal CRT of the analyzer 9 17 Softkey in the color options menu Accesses the menu that allows you to customize the colors on your external monitor or to customize the greyscale on the analyzer s internal display See Using an External VGA Monitor in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Me lay o CW Softkey in menu Selects CW continuous wave single frequency source operation 9 18 CAUTION Data on OFF Default key Reference D HARDKEY Softkey in menu Displays the current measurement data trace _ Softkey in menu Displays both the current data and memory traces with identical scaling and format You must have selected ata gt Mem first for this key to function Use care in interpreting memory trace values The memory trace may have been stored under conditions different from the current measurement trace Softkey in the define save menu Toggle to ON if you want to save the current measurement data Data can be saved by itself or with the instrument state and current calibration Softkey in menu Divides current trace data by data in memory For this key to function you must first have selected Data M m and stored a data trace in memory Softkey in DISPLAY menu Stores the active data trace in the mem
301. rt 0 300 MHZ Stoo 1 300 000 MHz Figure 8 10 Typical Reflection Tracking Error Term Automating M easurements Automating Measurements NOTE This chapter assumes that you are familiar with the information provided in the Programmer s Guide supplied with your analyzer and the nstrument BASIC User s Handbook supplied with Option 1C2 analyzers NOTE This chapter explains how to control your analyzer with either the internal IBASIC option 102 or with an external controller connected via HP IB If you have ordered the LAN option 1 7 you have the additional capability of controlling the analyzer over a LAN Refer to the User s Guide Supplement for Option 1F7 for information An automated measurement system is a system where a computer performs some of the tasks that you would normally have to do manually The information in this chapter will help you learn about how to automate your measurement system Several features of the instrument that are useful for automation are explained 7 2 Automating Measurements Some of the analyzer features that support automation are built in and operate solely on the analyzer limit testing is one example of a built in automated feature Other features can be executed by programs running on IBASIC Option 1C2 or an external computer Use of automation improves the productivity of a measurement system by increasing the system s throughput For the discussions in this document th
302. rus Nigeria Singapore Zmbabwe 250V 8120 1369 Straight NZSS198 ASC112 201 79 Gray Fired 8120 0696 90 221 87 Gray esa nd Mainland China 250V is East and West 8120 1689 straight CEE7 Y11 201 79 TUNE Gray Europe Central 8120 1692 90 201 79 Mint Gray african Republic United Arab Republic unpolarized in many not ions 125V 8120 1348 Straight 5 15 203 80 Black United States 8120 1538 90 203 80 Black Canada 100 8120 1378 Straight NEMA5 15P 203 80 Jade Gray 5200 V Brazil 8120 4753 Straight 230 90 Jade Gray Colombia Mexico 8120 1521 90 203 80 Gray Philippines 8120 4754 90 230 90 Jade Gray Saudia Arabia Taiwan 250V 8120 5182 Straigh 15 200 78 Jade Groy israel G 8120 5181 90 200 78 Jade Gray x Port number for plug is industry identifier for plug only Number shown for cableis HP Part Number for complete cable including plug E Earth Ground L Line N Neutral FORMAT80 Figure 8 11 Power Cable and line Mains Plug Part Numbers 8 22 Front Rear Panel line Module The Line Fuse The line fuse HP part number 2110 0882 and a spare reside within the line module Figure 8 12 illustrates where the fuses are and how to access them INSERT SCREWDR VER PRY OPEN FUSE IN USE SPARE FUSE FORMAT48 Figure 8 12 location of Line Fuses For
303. ry to the serial port use one of the following commands OUTPUT DIAG PORT WRITE9 0 52 WRITEIO 9 0 52 Ib read a byte from the serial port use the following commands OUTPUT ORfna DIAG PORT READ 9 0 ENTERORfna Serial in If you are using IBASIC you can simply use the READIO statement Serial in READIO 9 0 For general purpose the parallel port is much easier to interface to than the serial port Ib interface to the serial port a Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter UART is typically used to decode the RS 232 signals Most UARTS are designed to be used with microprocessors The advantage of the serial port is that it can operate over long distances up to 30 meters using the RS 232 C standard Its disadvantage is its slow speed limited to 19200 bits second Before using the serial port you must select the baud rate and handshake style using the SCPI commands SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit BAUD SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit HANDshake XON DTR One type of application for the serial port would be to use it for data logging to a remote computer After each device is measured an IBASIC program could use the WRITEIO command shown above to send a brief summary of the measurement result such as a filter s 3 dB bandwidth and its serial number to the remote computer A program on the remote computer would monitor the serial port and read the incoming data and archive it to hard disk or t
304. ry powered 12 14 non volatile RAM disk 7 46 Non VoX RAM Disk 9 56 normalization calibration 6 10 Left 4 10 9 55 iK Right 4 10 9 56 Notch 4 15 9 57 Index 21 One Port 9 58 one port calibration 6 13 example 3 26 on screen diagrams 7 21 10 19 P r erg 9 58 eck 2 13 19 operator s check 2 13 19 optimizing measurements 5 2 output video 10 18 output power iii absolute 3 30 output power specifications 10 5 P page layout customizing 7 77 page protection 4 86 panel front and rear 8 2 24 parallel port 1 11 4 82 4 84 7 54 59 10 18 part number rack kit 1 17 part numbers static safe equipment 1 8 parts supplied with shipment 1 3 pass fail indicator 4 46 4 61 PCL5 setup 4 85 peak to peak ripple marker limit test 4 40 peak tracking 4 51 performance system 10 2 peripherals connecting 1 11 Ph 9 59 phase derived delay 3 49 Phase Bffset 9 59 physical dimensions 10 19 plotter address 1 15 point frequency calculation 4 47 point limit creation 4 37 points reduction 5 5 Polar 9 59 Index 22 polar format markers 4 30 pollution degree rating 1 5 port HP IB 1 11 LAN 4 82 parallel 1 11 4 82 4 84 7 54 59 RS 232 1 11 serial 1 1 1 4 82 4 84 port configuration for hardcopy 4 82 port extensions 5 19 on BEF 9 59 9 60 position reference 2 9 position reference 4 51 power absolute 3 30 3 33 1
305. s 4 9 Using Instrument Functions Using Markers Using the Next Peak and Next M in Functions As explained previously pressing MR Max and Mkr gt Min will place a marker on the maximum and minimum points on the measurement trace respectively You can search for the next highest or lowest point using the eak Right Next and Next Min Left keys A maximum or minimum point is detected whenever an amplitude excursion greater than half of a division occurs The half of a division excursion requirement must be satisfied on both sides left and right of the peak or minimum The maximum or minimum point must be gt 60 dB See Figure 4 4 ue Division X Does Not Meet Peak Search Criteria meet Peak Search Criteria Pp61 8c Figure 4 4 Peak and Minimum Search Criteria When the maximum or minimum point is at or near either edge of the display the excursion requirement is satisfied by a half of a division excursion on just one side of the maximum or minimum See Figure 4 5 4 10 Using Instrument Functions Using Markers Y ju Division J Both Meet End Peak Criteria pp619c Figure 4 5 Peak and Minimum Search Criteria at Display Endpoints To Search for Target Values Us ing Instrument Functions Using Markers 1 Press Each time you press Search Ri irget Value to choose the target level and enter the target value The default value is 3
306. s Keys DISPLAY 8 Display Annotation Options OFF Softkey in MEAS 1 or MEAS 2 menu Turns the active measurement channel Off Softkey Reference M Softkey in the system bandwidth menu The default system bandwidth is See Chapter 5 Optimizing Measurements for information on how system bandwidth can affect your measurements Access Keys System Bandwidth Med Wide Softkey in the system bandwidth menu Medium wide is the default system See Chapter 5 Optimizing Measurements for information on how system bandwidth can affect your measurements tem Bandwidth Medium Softkey in the system bandwidth menu The default system bandwidth is eee medium wide 3700 Hz See Chapter 5 Optimizing Measurements for information on how system bandwidth can affect your measurements Access Keys System Bandwidth y Softkey in menu Displays the trace memory of the active measurement channel using the current display format scale and reference NOTE 9 49 y 1 Softkey in the set pen numbers menu Sets pen number assignment color for memory trace 1 on hardcopy Access Keys HARD COPY Def ine Plo Softkey in the set pen numbers menu Sets pen number assignment color for memory trace 2 on hardcopy Access Keys HARD COPY Define P1 Pen MENU Hardkey in the SOURCE area Displays menu with source setting selections trigger functi
307. s from the straight line Limit testing may be performed on the flatness parameter See Use Marker Limit Functions later in this chapter for information 1 On measurement channel 1 press and set markers 1 and 2 to define the beginning and end of the trace segment that you want to measure When using measurement channel 2 use markers 3 and 4 to er Functions Marker 3 Figure 4 13 shows a defined trace segment Notice the marker readout in the upper right corner of the display 4 23 Using Instrument Functions Using Markers P1 Transmission Log Mag 0 5 dB Ref 00 dB P2 off Chir Spn 44 6 1 MHZ dB Galin 2 9V dB 5 Slope 0 54 dB 1 68 dB 1 1 5 2 2 5 3 3 5 4 4 5 Abs 4 24 Center 180 000 MHZ Figure 4 13 Marker Flatness Function 1 Span 70 000 MHz CHAN 1 MKA MHZ 1 154 15 2 97 dB 2 gt 498 77 3 50 dB 3 off 4 off More Markers All Off Marker Functions Marker Searcn To Use RF Filter Statistics Using Instrument Functions Using Markers The RF Elter statistics function measures both the passband and the stopband reject band of a filter with a single sweep 1 Press On measurement channel 1 press and place marker 1 at the beginning of the passband and marker 2 at the end of the passband Place markers 3 and 4 at the beginning and end of the stopband When using me
308. s not uou a 5 19 Electrical Delay the 5 20 Measuring Devices with Long Electrical Delay en 5 2 Contents 4 6 Calibrating for Increased M easurement Accuracy Measurement Calibration Overview The Calibration Reference Plane Determine if a Calibration is Necessary When a Calibration Not Necessary When a Calibration Is Necessary Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method To Perform a Normalization Calibration To Perform a Transmission Calibration To Perform a Reflection Calibration To Perform a Conversion Loss Calibration To Perform an AM Delay Calibration Option 1DA Or 1DB only To Perform a Calibration With Non Standard Connectors Writing or Editing Your Own Cal Kit File Save the Calibration dde NE as Check the Calibration Using Calibration Check for Analysis dad Troubleshooting o y To Perform a Calibration Check PT Error Term Descriptions and Typical Values 7 Automating M easurements Configuring Your Test System Measurement System Topology Expandability and Large Systems Throughput Considerations Selecting Measurement Controller Selecting Programming ML Operator Interaction S Prompting the Operator Using Graphics to Create On Screen User Defined BEGIN Key Menu Data Entry Using a Barcode Reader Data Entry Using an External Keyboard Using the Analyzer s Title Feature Hot Keys on External Keyboard For Comicon Puncions U
309. s so you can store files into categories how to change between the various existing directories and how to remove an unwanted directory You can make directories for floppy disks and the analyzer s internal memory and RAM disk 1 Press save RECALL Select Choose the location of the disk you want to make the directory on If you are going to use a floppy disk place an MS DOS formatted disk in the analyzer s built in disk drive If your disk is not formatted refer Formatting a Floppy Disk located later in this section internal non volatile RAM disk internal volatile RAM disk or internal 3 5 disk the analyzer s built in disk drive Remember that volatile RAM disk memory will be lost if the power to the instrument is turned off 4 Press File Utilities Dj ory Utilities Make Di Think of a logical name to call a directory Standard MS DOS naming conventions apply to the name of the directory maximum of eight characters plus a three character extension Windows95 extended file names are not supported Enter the name of the new directory in one of the following ways e Use an external keyboard connected to the analyzer s rear panel DIN KEYBOARD connector and type in the new filename For information on using a keyboard see Keyboard later in this chapter Character key to point to and select each character of the new pum name Then press Enter Press M ke Directory to create
310. s suppressed from the hardcopy Softkey in more display menu Displays a menu that allows you to customize the analyzer s display screen by enabling or disabling annotation for measurement channel frequency and markers See Customizing the Display in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys DISPLAY More Display Softkey in delay aperture menu See Measuring Group Delay in Chapter 3 for information on aperture OTE lay aperture is fixed at 55 56 kHz when measuring AM delay 9 7 CAUTION HARDKEY Reference Softkey in delay aperture menu See Measuring Group Delay in Chapter 3 for information on aperture ture Softkey in define printer and define plotter menus Toggles paper autofeed feature on and off Default is on m Access Keys HARD copy Def Softkey in menu Scales the data trace vertically to fit within the graticule area of the display Softkey in menu This softkey is only available when using internal or external broadband detectors Periodically compensates for external detector drift due to changes in temperature When this feature is selected the detector s are automatically zeroed every five minutes Do not use Autezere with an external source See Ma Softkey in detection options menu Choose this selection to make very low frequency voltage measurements See Making Measurements With the Auxiliary Input in Chapter 3
311. s the active marker at the frequency point of minimum amplitude If tracking is off marker remains at that frequency If tracking is on marker moves to the minimum point with each sweep See Using Markers in Chapter 4 for more information Pen Softkey Reference M Softkey in clock format menu Formats the real time internal clock to display time as Month Day Year Hour Minute Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in the configure VOL RAM disk menu Allows you to modify the memory allocation on the internal non volatile RAM disk Access Keys save RECALL Select Disk Conf igure VOL_RAM Disk Softkey in define printer and define plotter menus Toggles with Color to define printer or plotter as one color black and white or multi color See Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys HARD COPY Define Printer or Def ins Plotter Softkey in set pen numbers menu Sets pen number assignment for hardcopy in monochrome plot mode See Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys HARD COPY Def Softkey in marker search more menu Designed for use when measuring multi pole filters Automatically searches the measurement trace from left to right and positions up to 8 markers on consecutive minimum points See To Use Marker Search Functions in Chapter 4 for more information
312. ser Defined TTL Input Output Using a Foot Switch or Button Box Limit Test Pass Fail TTL Input Output 6 16 6 17 6 19 6 25 6 26 6 26 6 27 6 28 7 5 7 5 7 12 7 12 7 13 7 15 7 18 7 20 7 21 7 22 7 29 7 30 7 31 7 32 7 34 7 35 7 37 Contents 5 Analyzer Port Numbers X Output for Large Screen External Monitor MEE Measurement Setup and Control with Fast Recall Using Fast Recall with the Front Panel or a Keyboard Using Fast Recall with a Switch sir Automated Measurement Setup and Control Setting the Instrument State E SCPI Commands That Modify a Single Parameter iis os Fast Iterative Control Responsive Communication using SRQs 7 Using Both of the Analyzers Measurement Channels AUTOST files Controlling Peripherals Using the Parallel Port Writing to the Parallel Port Reading from the Parallel Port Hardcopy Considerations Using the Serial Port Displaying Measurement Results Graticule On Off Limit Testing Customized X axis Annotation Customized Measurement Channel Annotation Markers el BR a Bh wae a Tile and Clock 25 2 2 0 106 00 9 x mm Saving Measurement Results Querying Measurement Data Saving the Measurement to Disk Save ASCI Saving the Measurement to Disk Save Data Querying Marker Searches Saving Measurement Results to Disk Using Hardcopy Features to Print or Plot Results Custom Data Sheets Statistical Process Control Transferring Files Co
313. setting is 0 00 mm default maximum setting is gin P 00 mm Softkey in the save ASCII menu Saves measurement data in a format compatible with CAE programs See Saving Instrument Data in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys _ save_ recat Def ine Save Save ASCII Softkey in set pen numbers menu Sets pen number assignment for data trace 1 on hardcopy Different pen numbers can represent different color or width pens See Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys HARD_COPY Def ine Plotter Set Pen Numbers 9 82 HARDKEY 2 Softkey in set pen numbers menu Sets pen number assignment for data xxx trace 2 on hardcopy Different pen numbers can represent different color or Fell pens See Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Chard COPY Define Plotter Set Pan Numbers Softkey in define graph menu A On prints or plots measurement trace is selected Access Keys HARD Def ine Hardcopy Def ine Graph ack Softkey in reference tracking menu When this key is pressed the measurement trace is dans with each sweep so that the frequency set requency y key is placed on the reference line See Using Reference Tracking in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys SCALE Reference Tracking Softkey in reference tracking menu Whe
314. side the normal graticule and expands the display to the full screen size The remaining annotation is enlarged for better readability To use the expanded display feature follow the steps below 1 Press DISPLAY splay f 2 Press ENTER At this point and until you turn the expand mode off with the Expand OFF key the ENTER key is used to toggle between the expanded display and the normal display Spi aj r NOTE Because the ENTER key also functions as the ENTRY OFF key it may be necessary to press ENTER twice The following figures illustrate the difference between a normal display and an expanded display 4 62 Using Instrument Functions Customizing the Display gt 1 Transmission Log Mag 0 5 dB Ref 2 00 dB Marker ba of f d dB Spar 5 718 MHZ Statistics Mear 1 1910 2 0 5170B 2 4340B Flatness 5 1 _ RF Filter Stats 1 5 Math Off 1 gt 2 5 3 3 5 4 Prior Menu Ld Center 180 000 MHz 1 Soan 100 000 MHz Figure 4 23 Normal Display 4 63 Using Instrument Functions Customizing the Display Spa 55 718 Mea 1 192dB 0 514 m 2 423 pex dE 3 va Figure 4 24 Expanded Display Saving and Recalling Measurement Results The network analyzer allows you to save the following information to internal m
315. signal pin 17 to differentiate between hardcopy dumps and user issued WRITEIO and DIAG PORT WRITe commands During a hardcopy to the parallel port the Printer Select signal is driven low During WRITEIO and DIAG PORT WRITe commands it is driven high Using the Printer Select signal you can connect both an interface circuit and a printer to the parallel port The interface circuit should only respond to the data strobe pin 1 when the Printer Select signal is high The printer should only respond to the data strobe when the Printer Select signal is low Most printers require the Printer Select line to be low or else they will not print Other printers ignore this line you are using a printer which ignores this line you have two choices 1 Consult the manual for switch setting that controls how the printer responds to the Printer Select signal or 2 Design your interface circuit so that it gates and inhibits the data strobe signal pin 1 going to the printer when Printer Select is high Similar to the output signals you can use the Printer Select signal to multiplex the input signals selecting either the signals from your interface circuit or those from the printer 7 60 Automating Measurements Controlling Peripherals Using the Serial Port Like the parallel port the RS 232 serial port can also be accessed using SCPI and IBASIC commands Ib write a byte with a value of 52 decimal 34 hex 0011 0100 bina
316. sponse Measurement Connect the DUT View and Interpret the Group Delay Measurement Results bos Measuring Impedance Using the Smith Chart Enter the Measurement Parameters Calibrate For a Reflection Response Measurement Connect the DUT View and Interpret the Results Measuring Impedance Magnitude How the Reflection Measurement Works How the Transmission Measurement Works Using a Fixture Contents 2 Bod cho dy qx Nw M N lt gt XO OO tA C2 lt gt Q2 Q2 Q2 Q2 WWW DW WW WD G9 O 1 00 Q2 Q2 O2 3 48 3 48 3 49 3 50 rr Cn CA Nore Q2 WWW WW WW W QN QN ON ON A CA CA CA CA 1 0 ON NW 4 Using Instrument Functions Using Markers ORC ECRIRE de ot Ne 4 3 To Activate Markers bo whe are a ak Gi ot ae 4 6 To Turn Markers Off 2 2 rns 4 7 To Use Marker Search Functions 2 2 4 8 Use Marker Math Functions 2 4 21 To Use Delta A Marker Mode 4 27 Ib Use Other Marker Functions 2 4 29 To Use Polar Format Markers 2 4 30 To Use Smith Chart Markers 4 30 Using Limit Testing oi Sit SOs EE 4 31 To Create a Flat Limit Line PIRE 4 33 To Create a Sloping Limit Line 4 35 To Create a Single Point Limit 4 37 To Use Marker Limit Functions 4 38
317. stalled If you have a standard instrument with no options installed then the values in the tables preceding this note apply to your analyzer Otherwise use the following table to determine your instrument s maximum and minimum test port power 1E1 subtract 1 dB subtract 1 dB Attenuator 175 ohm delay For each option installed subtract the indicated amount from the maximum and minimum powers stated in the standard tables For example if you have an HP 8714C with Options 1 and 1DB installed you would subtract a total of 7 dB from the standard values found in the tables to get a final correct maximum output of 3 dB for your analyzer and 12 dB for the minimum output power However the minimum output power for any analyzer with Option 1 1 attenuator is 60 dBm regardless of other options installed If you are not sure which options if any are installed in your analyzer press SYSTEM OPTIONS 8 ce Instrument Info for a display of the options installed Source Harmonics measured at 7 dBm 8712 714 lt 1MHz 20 dBc 21M 30 dBc e The measured at value depends on your analyzer s option configuration Standard instruments are measured at 7dBm Subtract the amountis shown in Determining Test Port Power from 7 dBm to determine the measured et value for your particular analyzer 10 6 Specifications and Characteristics Instrument Specifications and C
318. t limits 4 37 deleting limit segments 4 45 limit testing flatness 4 41 limit testing using markers 4 38 Limit Test on OFF 9 43 limit test output 8 5 limit test port used as general purpose I O 7 37 LIMIT TEST TTL IN OUT 8 5 Limit Text on OFF 4 61 Limit Text DN off 4 46 9 43 line fuse location 8 23 ratings 11 3 type 1 4 line module 8 21 line power 10 18 line power requirements 1 5 8 24 line power switch 8 17 line switch 8 17 line voltage requirements 1 4 line voltage selector 8 24 line voltage selector switch 1 4 Li Mag 9 43 Values 9 43 Load From Disk 9 44 load match 10 3 Load Match 9 44 how to fix 9 60 system 9 60 Index 17 Lug Mag 9 44 loss conversion 3 35 insertion 3 22 Lotus 123 4 70 otis 123 Format 9 45 Lower 9 45 LRN 7 48 Luminance 9 45 macro recording 7 27 magnitude impedance 3 62 Units 9 46 maintenance preventive 1 18 make and change directories 4 75 9 46 Manual Zero 9 46 farker 9 46 marker flatness search 4 23 Marker Functions 9 47 marker limit 4 38 marker limit test delta amplitude 4 42 delta frequency 4 43 flatness 4 41 peak to peak ripple 4 40 Statistical mean 4 39 marker math 4 21 Marker Math 9 47 Marker gt Center 9 46 Elec Delay 9 47 Reference 9 47 marker number annotation 4 61 marker resolution specifications 10 16 markers delta A 4 27 polar format
319. t specified CW frequencies A signal at this level would have a signal noise power ratio of 3 dB Noise floor is measured with the test ports terminated in loads response and isolation calibration 15 Hz IF bandwidth 0 dBm test port power and no averaging Dynamic range specifications are listed later in the Receiver Specifications section of this chapter 10 2 Specifications and Characteristics Measurement Port Specifications The following specifications describe the residual system uncertainties These specifications apply after a user enhanced response calibration for transmission measurements or one port calibration for reflection measurements has been performed and with an environmental temperature of 25 5 with less than 1 deviation from the calibration temperature Measurement Port Specifications Parameter HP8712C HP8714C Source Match load Match 300 kHz to 1300 MHz gt 1300 MHz to 3000 MHz 10 3 Range HP 8712C HP 8714C Resolution Instrument Specifications and Characteristics Specifications describe the instrument s warranted performance over the temperature range of 25 5 C unless otherwise stated These specifications are valid only after the instrument has been turned on and allowed to warm up for at least one hour Supplemental characteristics indicated by italics are typical but nonwarranted parameters intended to provide information useful in applying the instrument
320. t_D7 is the most significant bit Checks Centronics status lines for Out of Paper Printer Not on Line BUSY ACKNOW LEOGE e user bit according to the least significant bit of A A least significant bit 1 sets the user bit high A least significant bit of O clears the user bit Sets clears the limit pass fail bit according to the least significant bit of A A least significant bit equal to 1sets the pass fail bit high A least significant bit of 0 clears the pass fail bit Outputs I bit data to the Cent DO thru 07 lines of the Centronics port Cent D is t least significant bit Cent 07 is the most significant bit Sets the Printer select signa de select Ooes not check Centronics status lines Outputs e byte to the serial port The byte is output serially according to the configuration for the serial port NOTE When using the WRITEIO 15 0 or WRITEIO 15 3 command the Printer Select Line is Set High However when the instrument is doing hardcopy the Printer Select Line is set low The Printer Select line may or may not be used by individual printers Check with your printer manual Automating Measurements Operator Interaction Readable Ports Table 7 3 Readable Ports Eu Reads the limit test pass fail bit Reads the B bit status port DO Cent acknow ledge DI Cent busy D2 Cent out of paper D3 Cent on line M Cent printer err Output for Large Screen Exte
321. tection feature 4 86 Defining a Printer Using Instrument Functions Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters Make the selections in the analyzer menus Monochrome Color Monochrome Orientation Portrait Auto Feed ON Printer Resolution 96 Dots Per Inch Top Margin m Left Margin m Print Width m 15 91 in 2 Select the type of printer you have either Monochrome or Color 3 Select the orientation of the paper to the information printed either cape The portrait choice orientates the printout vertically the landscape orientates the printout horizontally i Off 4 If you do not want auto feed active press Auto F tion Refer to the following table for some specific printers and their valid print resolutions 4 87 Using Instrument Functions Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters Printer Valid Resolutions in DPI P ThinkJet P PaintJet 180 Laser et 100 150 300 600 DeskJet 100 150 300 600 HP QuietJet 192 Epson 120 240 360 1 DeskJet 540 should not be used at 100 dpi b Tap Margin Sets the top margin non printing space of the printout in mm Minimum setting is 0 00 mm maximum setting is 200 00 mm fi Sets the left margin non printing space of the printout in mm Minimum setting is 0 00 mm maximum setting is 200 00 mm d Print Width Sets print width printing space of printout in m
322. ter 3 Otherwise follow these general steps when performing a transmission calibration 1 Setup the analyzer for your measurement select or MEAS 2 e enter operating parameters other than the default 2 Press CAL and then one of the following softkeys Restoring the default calibration recalls error correction arrays that the network analyzer previously generated by an adjustment test and permanently stored in memory This response calibration was performed at the factory or during servicing using full band entire frequency span and 401 frequency points It is quick and convenient but not as accurate at narrow frequency spans This calibration is also known as the default calibration A response calibration prompts you to connect a through cable as the calibration standard and then measures it across the frequency band you have defined using the number of points you have defined This measurement is used to correct systematic frequency response errors Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Choose an Appropriate Calibration Method This method of calibration is only necessary when trying to achieve maximum dynamic range gt 100 dB A response and isolation calibration prompts you to connect loads to both ports and then to connect a through cable These standards are measured across the frequency band you have defined using the number of points you have defined These measurements are used to remov
323. th measurement channels this connector also serves as a user defined TTL input and output that can be set and read from IBASIC or SCPI HP IB See Chapter 7 Automating Measurements for more information This rear panel female BNC connector can be used in three different ways Define its use by pressing options onf ig and then making the appropriate selection e The default use for this connector provides a bidirectional open collector TTL signal which can be set or read from IBASIC or SCPI HP IB This is an open collector signal which you can drive low but must not drive high since the analyzer also drives it See Chapter 7 Automating Measurements for more information e This connector can also be used with an external switch to automate softkey presses See User Defined Key Menu and Using Fast Recall with a Switch in Chapter 7 Lastly this connector can be configured for use as a sweep out connector When configured this way the output is driven high during a sweep Front Rear Panel Connectors Multi pin Connectors HP IB This connector allows the analyzer to be connected to other instruments or devices on the interface bus Details of this cable are shown in Figure 8 3 HP part numbers for various HP IB cables that are available are shown in the table following the figure TYPE MICROR BBON CONNECTOR SONNECT P O TWISTE 11 GROUND SHOULD BE
324. that you want to check 2 Press Cal Check Do Cal Check 3 Follow the onscreen prompts to connect the calibration standards You should connect the standards at your calibration reference plane not necessarily at the front panel of the analyzer For example your calibration reference plane may be at the end of cables adapters or test fixtures connected to the analyzer See The Calibration Reference Plane for more information To decrease the likelihood that a faulty calibration standard is being used it is recommended that you use a different set of calibration standards for the calibration check than you used to perform the initial calibration The different set of calibration standards must be of the same type as the original set 4 Once you have properly connected all the required standards as prompted the analyzer computes the residual errors for the measurement type of calibration you did a calibration check on When you view an error term plot the analyzer stops sweeping and displays the plot on the analyzer s screen Ib return to measurement mode and autoscale the store Meas display press R 6 Refer to Error Term Descriptions and Typical Values for descriptions and typical plots of the various error terms Error Term Descriptions and Typical Values The following table lists the typical error term values 6 28 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy Check the Calibration Typical
325. the Syne Green on OFF key to enable the sync on green capability 3 Use the Ve P the display s position on the monitor After pressing one ot these softkeys use the front panel knob the 1 keys or the numeric keypad to vary the position of the display on the monitor 4 For nroni ang your external monitor use the ont Porch keys to vary the vertical and horizontal front auo back porch times until the display is 5 All of these settings are retained when the analyzer is turned off or preset 4 104 Optimizing Measurements Optimizing Measurements This chapter describes techniques and analyzer functions that help you achieve the best measurement results The following sections are included in this chapter e Increasing Sweep Speed Increasing Network Analyzer Dynamic Range e Reducing Trace Noise e Reducing Mismatch Errors e Compensating for Phase Shift in Measurement Setups e Measuring Devices with Long Electrical Delay 3 2 Increasing Sweep Speed You can increase the analyzer sweep speed by avoiding the use of some features that require computational time for implementation and updating such as bandwidth marker tracking You can also increase the sweep speed by making adjustments to the measurement settings Listed below are some of the things that can be done to increase sweep speed increase the start frequency sweep time in AUTO mode widen the system bandwidth reduce the amount of
326. the analyzer via the HP IB including several example programs written in HP BASIC The HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook contains detailed information and examples showing how to control the analyzer using IBASIC The Option 1F7 User s Guide Supplement contains detailed information on controlling the analyzer via LAN including example programs Operator Interaction Many tests are performed by technicians or testers who interact with the measurement system When designing the automation system it is important that the system allow operators to perform the measurement tasks quickly and consistently The system must also be easy to learn and easy to use providing the user with instructions and feedback The analyzer provides many features to satisfy these requirements The features include User defined pop up messages to prompt the operator On screen graphics to create custom diagrams User defined measurement channel and frequency annotation Ability to define the key menu with custom softkeys requires IBASIC Option 1C2 IBASIC display window configurable as full or split IBASIC DISP line and INPUT line Data entry using a barcode reader Data entry using an external keyboard Hot keys on external keyboard for common functions Operator control of measurements using a foot switch or button box Beeper with adjustable volume and pitch Limit test pass fail TTL output User defined TTL input output Output for lar
327. the corrected measurement uncertainties that apply to the current instrument settings and calibrations See Chapter 6 for more information on using cal check Access Keys Cal Check Softkey in select disk menu Selects the analyzer s internal volatile RAM as the place where information will be saved to or recalled from Any information stored on the volatile RAM disk will be lost if the analyzer s power is turned off See Saving and Recalling Measurement Results in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys save RECALL Selec Wide Softkey in the system bandwidth menu This is the widest system bandwidth 0 Hz available Medium wide bandwidth is the system default See Chapter 5 Optimizing Measurements for information on how system bandwidth can affect your measurements em Bandwidth X Softkey Reference X X Softkey in broadband external menu Selects diode detection type of measurement with an external detector connected to the EXT DET X INPUT on the rear panel Access Keys MEAS 1 Broadbar Softkey in broadband external menu Selects measurement of the ratio of external detectors at inputs X and Y Access Keys ER GERE or Detection Opt ions Bri alf Softkey in select copy port menu A software handshake for some serial devices Toggles with DTR DSR Access Keys HARD COPY Sel t Copy Port Softkey Reference _ Softkey in broadband external menu Selects
328. the directory 4 75 Using Instrument Functions Saving and Recalling Measurement Results NOTE You can also change to a directory and use Dire y to create a subdirectory The number of characters in a directory and subdirectory path cannot exceed the MS DOS limitation of 63 Change to a Directory 1 Press the f keys to highlight the directory you want to change to Then press Directory After changing directories the current directory name appears in the top box of the displayed table 2 1b chan e to the previous directory highlight PARENT and press to return to the disk s previous directory 3 Ib uu to the disk s main or root directory continue highlighting and changing to the PARENT directory until the current directory name in the top box is simply a backslash X Remove a Directory 1 A directory must be empty before it can be removed If there are files in the directory that you want to move elsewhere and delete refer to Other File Utilities earlier in this chapter for information on how to copy and delete files 2 Highlight the directory to be removed by using the front panel knob or the D Ds keys 4 76 CAUTION Using Instrument Functions Saving and Recalling Measurement Results Formatting a Floppy Disk You must format unformatted floppy disks before you can save data on them The analyzer internal memory and RAM disk memory do not need to be formatted
329. the type of device that you will be measuring amplifier filter broadband passive device mixer or cable Connect your test device to the network analyzer Use the softkeys to select the type of measurement you want to make Press Transmissn if you want to measure the transmission characteristics of an amplifier filter or broadband passive device Press R flection if you want to measure the reflection characteristics of your device Press Power if you want to measure the RF power of a device The Poser selection is under the lifier Press SEL Option 100 only if you want to measure the structural return loss of a cable The SRL selection is under the Cable menu Press Fault Location Option 100 only if you want to measure the cable fault location The Fault Location selection is under the menu Making Measurements Using the BEGIN Kay to Make Measurements Depending on your selection the analyzer is set to one of the following configurations The SRL and Fault Location configurations are discussed in the Option 100 User s Guide Supplement Table 3 1 Measurement Configurations from the Kay a 0 300 MHz 1300 MHz 10 MHz 1300 M Hz 110 MHz 1300 M Hz o MEN ey PITT e o To To Io km mw ww ww ww w _ ema _ meme wm e ka pus Bandwidth Med
330. the upper right corner of the network analyzer screen The notch feature puts marker 1 in delta marker mode Delta marker mode is explained later in this chapter NOTE Q stands for quality factor defined as the ratio of a circuit s resonant frequency to its bandwidth Your analyzer calculates Q as the center frequency divided by the bandwidth Each marker s dedicated use is listed in the following table Figure 4 7 shows a measurement channel 1 6 dB notch marker search 4 15 Using Instrument Functions Using Markers Dedicated Use of Markers in Notch Search Mode Dedicated Use Measurement Channel 1 Measurement Channel 2 1 The center frequency is defined by the analyzer as the midpoint between the left and right notch points 2 Where n is the target value and the n dB point is relative to the maximum response marker 1 Pi Transmission Log Mag 10 0 dB Ref 20 00 dBC P2 off F 998 MHZ 144 0 23 d ET Center 2 000 000 MHz Span 50 000 MHz Figure 4 7 6 dB Notch Marker Search 4 16 To Use Multi Peak or Multi Notch Search Using Instrument Functions Using Markers Multi peak and multi notch searches are designed for use when measuring multi pole filters Both searches automatically search the measurement trace from left to right and position a marker at each local maximum or minimum Up to eight maximums or minimums will be found Searches are limited to responses
331. thout BASIC Controlled by a Computer 7 1 7 4 Network Analyzer Running IBASIC Controlled by a Computer 7 11 7 5 Example Test System Setup 7 19 7 6 Connect a Switch to the USER TTL IN OUT Connector 7 28 7 7 Connect a Switch to the USER TTL IN OUT Connector 7 43 7 8 Measurement Control 7 44 7 9 Writing to the Parallel Port 7 57 7 10 Digital Latch Circuit 7 58 7 11 Customized Annotation 7 62 7 12 Paper Numbering 7 78 8 1 Analyzer Connectors Front Panel 8 3 82 Analyzer Connectors Rear 8 4 8 3 HP IB Connector and zx Oel 8 4 Parallel Port Pm outs 8 9 8 5 RS 232 Connector Pin out 8 10 8 6 VIDEO OUT Connector Pin out 8 11 8 7 Probe Power Connector Rho aux orco ripped 8 12 8 8 The Analyzer Line Power Switch 8 17 8 9 Display Intensity Control 2 2 8 19 8 10 Disk Drive 8 20 8 1 1 Power Cable and Line Mains Plug Part Numbers 8 22 8 12 Location of Line Fuses 8 23 8 13 Voltage Selector Switch Location 8 24 10 1 Receiver Dynamic Accuracy narrowband 10 9 10 2 Absolute Power Accuracy 10 10 Contents 12 Tables l 1 Maximum HP IB Cable Lengths 1 14 3 1 Measurem
332. tion unlike averaging only one sweep is required for the reduced noise floor effect The analyzer offers a choice of six system bandwidths wide medium wide default setting medium medium narrow narrow and fine NOTE It is recommended that wide system bandwidth only be used for broadband detection measurements due to trace noise effects 5 11 Changing Measurement Averaging Optimizing Measurements Increasing Network Analyzer Dynamic Range In averaging mode the analyzer measures each frequency point once per sweep and averages the current and previous trace up to the averaging factor specified by the user The instrument computes each data point based on an exponential average of consecutive sweeps weighted by the user specified averaging factor As the averaging factor is increased e signal to noise ratio increases e time for each individual sweep remains the same but e total time to update the trace increases Averaging is better than system bandwidth reduction at minimizing very low frequency noise 1 Press Average 2 Enter a value followed by ENTER 3 Press Average ON off rag NOTE When averaging is on there is an indicator in the lower right corner of the analyzer s display The display is in the form Avg x y where x is the averaging factor for measurement channel 1 and y is the averaging factor for measurement channel 2 If only one measurement channel is on the averagin
333. tion does not restrict access to any normally available instrument feature such as marker functions etc nor does this key affect sweep update rates Refer to example programs provided on the IBASIC programs disk for implementation requirements Keystroke recording may be used to modify or update User BEGIN programs See Chapter 7 Automating Measurements for more information Measuring Transmission Response This section uses an example measurement to describe how to calibrate for and make a basic transmission response measurement In this example a bandpass filter like the one that was supplied with your network analyzer is used Enter the Measurement Parameters Press on the analyzer to set the analyzer to the default mode which includes measuring transmission on measurement channel 1 NOTE This example measurement uses the default instrument parameters far a transmission measurement If your particular transmission measurement requires specific parameters such as frequency range source power level number of data points and sweeptime enter them now 3 18 Making Measurements Measuring Transmission Response Calibrate For a Transmission Response Measurement Your analyzer can provide highly accurate measurements without performing any additional user calibrations if certain conditions are met This example describes how to perform an enhanced transmission response calibration When you perform an enhanced trans
334. tion that corrects for frequency response errors Frequency response errors are signal changes as a function of frequency See Chapter 6 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy for more information This calibration removes the same frequency response errors as the response calibration In addition it effectively removes the isolation errors in transmission measurements Isolation errors result from leakage between signal paths crosstalk See Chapter 6 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy for more information Softkey in menu Clears the running average and restarts it with the next sweep See Ib Reduce the Receiver Noise Floor in Chapter 5 for information on averaging Softkey in several menus such as the calibration menus the hardcopy menus and the CRT adjust menu 1 If this key is pressed in the transmission reflection and AM delay calibration menus the default measurement calibration becomes the active calibration This calibration is originally performed and stored in non volatile memory at the factory by performing an adjustment test It is a full frequency span cal of 401 points When selected it erases a user defined cal if any See Chapter 6 for more information on measurement calibrations 2 If this key is pressed in the hardcopy menus it resets parameters such as addresses baud rates handshakes color pens resolution and margins to predetermined values See Printi
335. tions andusethe Limit Icon X Po ion and Limit Icon Y Position keys to reposition the indicator or use the following SCPI commands DISP ANN LIM ICON 1 2 POS X num 7 64 Automating Measurements Displaying Measurement Results DISP ANN LIM ICON 1 2 PO0S Y num For more information on limit lines see Using Limit Testing in Chapter 4 See Figure 7 11 for an example of a measurement using limit lines with a PASS test result 7 65 Automating Measurements Displaying Measurement Results Customized X axis Annotation X axis annotation consists of one or two lines of information that appear below the graticule By default the X axis annotation displays the stimulus frequencies default resolution is KHz or powers if in power sweep It can be however customized using SCPI commands to show your own start and stop x axis values and units For example when measuring mixers which introduce a frequency offset you can annotate the frequencies at the output of the mixer Ib turn on user defined X axis annotation use the command DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency 1 2 USER STATe OFF 0 ON 1 For example DISPlay ANNotation FREQuencyl USER e To specify your start and stop values use DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency 1 2 USER STARt num DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency 1 2 USER STOP num The value num must be between 10 000 and 10 000 For example DISPlay ANNotation FREQuencyl USER STAR
336. tiple maximums or minimums NOTE Marker tracking can be useful for tuning DUTs when combined with the marker search functions When tracking is turned on the marker search is applied to the active marker and is updated with each sweep To turn tracking on press Marker Search and then select the type of search you will be performing Then press Tr It is possible to select marker search types on measurement channel 1 that are incompatible with those on measurement channel 2 and vice versa Doing so can cause the markers on the inactive channel to be moved Be careful to ensure you are using the correct markers for the measurement channel you are currently measuring especially when marker tracking is turned on CAUTION 4 8 Using Instrument Functions Using Markers To Use Max Search and The maximum search functions search for peak points on the measurement Min Search trace The minimum search functions search for minimum points on the measurement trace 1 Press Marker Search Min Search Mkr gt Win to place marker 1 at the minimum value on the trace 2 Press Prior Menu Prior Menu 2 gt Max to place marker 2 at the maximum on the trace 3 Figure 4 3 shows markers 1 and 2 at the maximum and minimum points respectively gt i Transmission Log Mag 20 0 dB Ref 60 00 dB ba off LIII EE 121 0 IUBE Center 175 000 MHz Span 349 400 MHz Figure 4 3 Markers at Minimum and Maximum Value
337. to eliminate spurious responses Both features shift the frequency of the spur without changing the RF output frequency They shift the spur by changing frequencies internal to the analyzer that mix to produce the RF frequency The features are e dither e spur avoid Dither is usually most effective for narrow frequency span measurements generally lt 15 MHz as explained below If dither does not eliminate visible spurs use spur avoid instead 5 14 Optimizing Measurements Reducing Trace Noise Dithering to Shift Spurs Dither shifts all spurs by a small amount once thus it imposes no sweep time CAUTION Activating Spur Avoidance CAUTION penalty But some spurs occurring within the measured frequency band may not be shifted out of band and others may be shifted in Therefore dither is most effective for narrowband measurements with a user defined measurement calibration lb activate dithering 1 Press MENU 2 Make a user defined measurement calibration Refer to Chapter 6 Calibrating for Increased Measurement Accuracy for calibration procedures Avoid Dither The measurement calibration must be performed with the same spur avoid option used in the measurement or your results may be invalid When you activate spur avoidance the analyzer sweeps to a point before a spur stops the sweep shifts the spur sweeps through the spur location then shifts the spur back and continues the sweep The ana
338. ts General Conditions Operating Environment Non Operating Storage Conditions Weight Cabinet Dimensions Specifications and Characteristics General Characteristics These connectors provide for two external scalar detector inputs Environmental Characteristics RFI and EMI susceptibility defined by CISPR Publication 11 and FCC Class B Standards ESD electrostatic discharge must be eliminated by use of static safe work procedures and an anti static bench mat such as HP 921751 Dust The flexible rubber keypad protects key contacts from dust but the environment should be as dust free as possible Indoor use only Operating temperature 0 to 55 Maximum relative humidity 5 to 95 percent relative at 40 non condensing Altitude up to 15 000 feet 4 572 meters Ibmperature 40 C to 70 C Humidity 0 to 90 percent relative at 65 C non condensing Altitude 0 to 15 240 meters 50 000 feet Net Approximately 21 kg Shipping Approximately 30 kg These dimensions exclude front and rear panel protrusions 179 mm H x 425 mm W x 514 mm D 7 0 in x 16 75 in x 20 25 in 10 19 Specifications and Characteristics General Characteristics NETWORK ANALYZER Y po674b Physical Dimensions 10 20 Warranty NOTE The actual warranty on your instrument depends on the date it was ordered as well as whether or not any warranty options were
339. ts the characteristic impedance used by the analyzer in calculating measured impedance with Smith chart markers and conversion parameters Characteristic impedance must be set correctly before calibrating for a Smith chart measurement Acceptable values are 1 Q to 1000 Q Access Keys CAL More Cal Softkey in the system config menu Displays a pop up message with a description of softkey sequencing and softkeys to enable or disable the auto step function See Measurement Setup and Control with Fast Recall in Chapter 7 for more information Access Keys svsrEM options System C Softkey in the cal check menu One of the corrected measurement 4 uncertainties that can be viewed after performing cal check Refer to Chapter 6 for more information on using cal check Access Keys Cal Check View Cal Chec Softkey in character entry menu Adds a blank space to a title or filename Softkey in menu Used in conjunction with Center Selects the frequency span of source When selected it changes the frequency annotation from start stop to center span See Entering Measurement Parameters in Chapter 2 for more information Softkey in more display menu Toggles the display mode between split measurement channel 1 on top measurement channel 2 on the bottom and full both measurement channels on full screen See Entering Measurement Parameters in Chapter 2 for more information Softkey Refer
340. typically remain valid until the next write to the parallel port but you should always latch the data using the strobe Figure 7 10 shows a simple circuit which can be used to write to an 8 bit DAC and a digital latch DECODE DACOB30 VOUT OP AMP ILE PARALLEL d PORT CS WR2 XFER 08 25 CONNECTOR DIGITAL OUTPUTS BUFFER IF NECESSARY NOTE ESD PROTECTION POWER SUPPLIES AND DECOUPLING ARE NOT SHOWN po673b Figure 7 10 Digital latch Circuit 7 58 Automating Measurements Controlling Peripherals Reading from the Parallel Port The parallel port has five TTL input signals normally used for determining the printer s status which can be read The signals and the corresponding data bits and pins are shown in the following table Acknow ledge Busy Out of Paper On Line Printer Error Your custom interface circuit can drive these signals and they can be read using any of these commands SCPI commands OUTPUT ORfna DIAG PORT READ 15 10 ENTERGRfna Parallel in IBASIC command Parallel in READIO 15 10 Automating Measurements Controlling Peripherals Hardcopy Considerations The analyzer s feature can send output to printers connected to the parallel port If you have a custom interface circuit attached to the parallel port you don t want the hardcopy output to interfere with it To address this issue the analyzer uses the parallel port s Printer Select
341. uctions 11 4 clock 4 60 Cluck F rmat 9 15 color display 4 102 Color gpt computer selecting for automation 7 13 computer connections 7 12 conditions for environment 10 19 confidence check 2 13 19 configurations of system for automation 7 5 configure the hardcopy port 4 82 configuring measurements from the key 3 12 configuring memory allocations 4 68 configuring the analyzer 1 10 connecting analyzers to a computer 7 12 connecting computers 1 1 1 connecting controllers 1 1 1 Index 6 connecting peripherals 1 11 connector care 1 18 connectors 8 3 coaxial 8 4 6 damage levels 8 4 6 front panel 8 3 HP IB 8 7 impedances 8 4 6 multi pin 8 7 12 rear panel 8 3 connectors on rear panel 10 17 connector specs 1 18 contents of shipment 1 3 Continue 9 16 Continuous 9 16 control intensity 8 19 controller selecting for automation 7 13 controller connections 7 12 controllers connecting 1 11 conversion loss formula 3 40 measuring 3 35 Conversion Loss 9 16 conversion loss calibration 6 15 Copy AXI Files 9 16 to 3 5 9 7 to NonVoi RAM 9 17 Copy to Vol RAM 9 17 crosstalk 9 66 CRT Adjust 4 104 9 17 CRT adjustment for external monitor 4 104 CSA mark definition 11 5 Custom Colors 9 18 customizing page layout 7 77 CW 9 18 Index 7 D Data 9 19 m 9 19 Data gt Mem 9 19 Data
342. ue addresses 0 through 30 however it restricts the number of devices on the bus to 15 Due to this restriction you may need to add more computers as you add more analyzers Set each analyzer s address via th svsrew options HP IB menu If you have Option 1F7 installed in your analyzer you can overcome the physical limitations of HP IB cabling and create large systems with hundreds of analyzers 10 BaseT LAN provides a theoretical bandwidth of close to 1 MByte second although in practice throughput will be slower due to overhead and turn around time See your Option 127 User s Guide Supplement for more information Throughput Considerations When considering the throughput of the system configuration contributing factors are e operator interaction time e measurement speed e data transfer speed e computation speed when applicable Each system should be evaluated for throughput based on the sums of these four factors 7 12 Stand Alone Operation using IBASIC Computer Controlled HP IB Operation Computer Controlled LAN Operation Option 1F7 only Automating Measurements Configuring Your Test System Selecting a Measurement Controller There are three standard configurations that you can use to control the analyzer IBASIC in effect puts a controller inside your analyzer and eliminates the need for an external controller IBASIC controls the analyzer by sending SCPI commands to address 800 OUTPUT 800
343. uency the analyzer will always place the frequency point of interest on the display reference line See Using Reference Tracking in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys Ref erence 1 9 73 set Year Show Clock on Line 1 ow Clock on Line 2 Show Smith Chart HARDKEY Softkey Reference S Softkey in set clock menu Use this key to set the year on the clock Access Keys 5 options System Config Set Clock Softkey in title and clock menu Displays the clock on the uppermost line of the title area when Tf CIK ON off is on jay 1 Softkey in title and clock menu Displays the clock on the uppermost line of the title area when Title C1k ON off is on Access Keys DISPLAY More ay Title and Clock Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in the configure VOL RAM disk menu Displays a message box that shows the total memory available and the current memory allocation for the internal non volatile RAM disk M Disk Access Keys save Select Disk Conf igure Softkey in trigger menu Immediately stops the current sweep takes one complete sweep and holds until retriggered by pressing Si Softkey in the format menu A reflection measurement display format that maps the complex reflection coefficient p to the DUT s impedance See Measuring Impedance Using the Smith Chart in Chapter 3 for more information HARDKEY Softkey Reference S Se
344. unctions Using limit Testing Example 1 When using a small number of measurement points limit lines must be set carefully or the results may be confusing because the analyzer connects the measurement points with straight lines The following illustration shows a data trace with three measurement points A B and C along with a minimum limit line MINIMUM B LIMIT LINE B TRACE SHOWING THREE MEASURED POINTS po653b Figure 4 17 limit lines Example 1 Note that the beginning of the limit line falls between points A and B along the horizontal frequency axis The end of the limit line falls between points B and C along the frequency axis Therefore only one measurement point is encountered between the beginning and end of the limit line This particular example would result in a limit test result of PASS when it appears that it could fail More measurement points are needed to evaluate this measurement 4 48 Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing Example 2 In this example the analyzer has been set up with the following parameters Start frequency 90 MHz Stop frequency 210 MHz Number of points 11 Maximum limit line begin frequency 90 MHz Maximum limit line end frequency 200 MHz Refer to the illustration below for the discussion Here the data trace passes through the limit line and is above it but this test passes because the last point tested is at 198 MHz The last point 210 d
345. und 1 MegOhm Resistor able mat with earth ground wire HP part ber 9300 0797 wrist strap cord with 1 Meg Ohm resistor HP pa ber 9300 0980 e wrist strap HP pa ber 9300 1367 eal straps HP pa ber 9300 1308 e floor 18648 Step 3 Check the Analyzer Operation 1 Turn on the line switch of the analyzer After approximately 30 seconds a display box should appear on the screen with the following information The model number of your analyzer either HP 8712C or HP 8714C e The firmware revision e The serial number of your analyzer e Installed options 2 Verify that the serial number and options displayed on the screen match the information on the rear panel serial label 3 The operator s check should be performed on the analyzer to provide a high degree of confidence that the analyzer is working properly Refer to Chapter 2 for instructions on how to perform the operator s check 1 9 Step 4 Configure the Analyzer You can begin making measurements by simply connecting your analyzer to an appropriate power source and turning it on This section however will explain how to connect common peripherals and controllers and how to install your analyzer into a rack system 1 10 Installing the Analyzer Step 4 Configure the Analyzer Connecting Peripherals and Controllers CONTROL PORTS N TWIST SERIAL PARALLEL KEYBOARD S50 o
346. ur instrument should need to be returned for maintenance or repair Check the items received against the Product Checklist included in your shipment to make sure that you received everything Inspect the analyzer and all accessories for any signs of damage that may have occurred during shipment If your analyzer or any accessories appear to be damaged or missing call your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales or Service office Refer to Table 10 1 in Chapter 10 for the nearest office 1 3 Step 2 Meet Electrical and Environmental Requirements 1 Set the line voltage selector to the position that corresponds to the ac power source you will be using Before switching on this instrument make sure that the line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse T 5A 250 V is installed Assure the supply voltage is in the specified range CAUTION NOTE The working fuse and a spare are located in the power cable receptacle See figure 8 12 EDIE e POWER CABLE VOLTAGE SELECTOR RECEPTACLE SWITCH pp64c Figure 1 1 Voltage Selector Switch location 1 4 Installing the Analyzer Step 2 Meet Electrical and Environmental Requirements 2 Ensure the available ac power source meets the following requirements AC Line Power Nominal Setting 115 V 90 to 132 47 to 66 Hzl 230 Y 198 to 254 Vac 47 to 66 Hzl If the ac line voltage does n
347. uracy narrowband at 30 MHz Accuracy narrowband Reference Power Level 20 dBm Error dB 10 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Input Power Level dBm Legend 87140 amm mum mu uma 8712C pp623c Figure 10 1 Receiver Dynamic Accuracy narrowband 10 9 Specifications and Characteristics Instrument Specifications and Characteristics Absolute Power Absolute Power Accuracy broadband at 30 MH Accuracy broadband 47 a 5 5 ui InputPower dBm Legend ohm sem 75 Option 1EC po684b c Figure 1 0 2 Absolute Power Accuracy broadband Frequency Response broadband Typical Frequency Response broadband HP 8712 05 8 Total Power Accuracy Total Power Accuracy Absolute Power Accuracy Frequency Response 10 10 Specifications and Characteristics Instrument Specifications and Characteristics Typical Measurement Uncertainty The following graphs show typical measurement uncertainty The assumptions made to generate these curves were e For transmission uncertainty the DUT is assumed to be well matched e For reflection uncertainty the DUT is assumed to be a one port device In other words load match errors produced when measuring transmission are not taken into account e Power 0 dBm for reflection measurements e Power 20 dBm for transmission measurements e For transmission measurements an enhanced response calibration was perfo
348. vailable at the power splitter output Use amplification directly after the DUT it the device s output power is less than the 10 dBm minimum specified level needed by the test detector Y 3 9 Making Measurements Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer When to Change the System Impedance Analyzers with a system characteristic impedance of 50 or 75 ohms may be switched to the alternate impedance If using minimum loss pads for impedance conversions the alternate impedance should be selected so that the measurement results are displayed relative to the conversion impedance For example if you have a 50 ohm instrument and are making 75 ohm measurements you may be using a 50 to 75 ohm minimum loss pad Measurement results can be reported relative to 75 ohms not 50 ohms if the alternate system impedance is selected This may include marker readouts Smith chart results or SRL impedance computations Option 100 To change the system impedance press the following keys on the analyzer CAL The built in cal kit selections will be converted to the selected system impedance 3 10 Step 1 Enter the Measurement Parameters Step 2 Calibrate the Analyzer Step 3 Connect the Equipment Step 4 View and Interpret the Measurement Making Measurements Measuring Devices with Your Network Analyzer The Typical Measurement Sequence A typical measurement consists of performing four major steps The easiest way t
349. veniently enter file names for instrument state save recall or text for title lines NOTE If your keyboard has a standard large DIN connector you will need to use a DIN to mini DIN adapter to connect the keyboard to the analyzer These adapters are available as HP part 1252 4141 Contact the nearest HP sales or service office for more information See Using the Analyzer s Title Feature next in this section for more information Automating Measurements Operator Interaction Using the Analyzer s Title Feature The analyzer has two 30 character title lines which can be entered using the barcode reader From the front panel press DisPLAY More i and Clock Title Line 1 or on an external keyboard press F9 Then use the barcode reader to scan in the information from the DUT or use a keyboard to type in the information Once stored in the title line the information will be included on hardcopy dumps The title lines can also be set or queried using the following SCPI command DISPlay ANNotation TITLe 1 2 DATA lt STRING gt For example OUTPUT GR fna DISP ANN TITL1 DATA BPF 177 SN US95170001 and OUTPUTeR na DISPlay ANNotation TITLe1 DATA ENTERRfna Titlei Use the command DISPlay ANNotation TITLe 1 2 ON OFF to display or hide the title lf you are using IBASIC you can use the INPUT statement to read in barcode or keyboard characters For example 30 INPUT Scan in the Barcode now Dut 40
350. viation of the amplitude response e peak to peak ripple Limit testing may be performed on the statistical mean and peak to peak ripple See lb Use Marker Limit Functions later in this chapter for information 1 On measurement channel 1 press and set markers 1 and 2 to define the beginning and end of the trace segment that you want to measure When using measurement channel 2 use markers 3 and 4 to define the trace segment 4 2 Using Instrument Functions Using Markers 3 Figure 4 12 shows a defined trace segment Notice the marker readout in the upper right corner of the display D4 Transmission Log Mag 0 5 9 Ref 0 00 1 Da off MKR MHz 45 000 MHz 1 153 00 3 71 dB 2 gt 199 00 3 52 dB 3 off More Markers All Off 4 Marker Functions Marker Abs Search 1 Center 180 000 MHz Span 70 000 MHz Figure 4 12 Marker Statistics Function 4 22 Using Instrument Functions Using Markers Use Marker Flatness The marker flatness search function measures a user defined segment of the measurement trace and calculates the following e frequency span e gain e slope e flatness The analyzer calculates flatness by drawing a straight line between the markers maximum vertical deviation from this line is computed for each measurement point Flatness is the magnitude difference of the maximum and minimum calculated deviation
351. wer you may need to use a preamplifier in your measurement setup However remember to not exceed the receiver damage limit of 23 dBm CAUTION 3 34 Measuring Conversion Loss Conversion loss is the ratio of IF output power to RF input power expressed in dB This section uses an example measurement to describe how to measure the conversion loss of a broadband mixer When characterizing a device s conversion loss the analyzer uses broadband detection to compare the transmitted signal B to the reference signal R This is because the input and output signals of a frequency translating device may be different Since broadband detection measures signals at all frequencies you may want to use a filter to remove unwanted signals such as LO feedthrough when performing this measurement For example an RF signal at 900 MHz mixed with an LO signal at 200 MHz results in mixing product signals at 700 MHz and 1100 MHz as well as the original 900 MHz and 200 MHz RF and LO signals 3 35 Making Measurements Measuring Conversion loss 700 MHz Bandpass Filter po650b c Figure 3 13 Filtering Out the Unwanted Mixing Product Inserting a 700 MHz bandpass filter in the measurement setup removes the unwanted signals at 200 MHz 900 MHz and 1100 MHz providing an accurate measurement of the desired IF signal at 700 MHz In the following example the conversion loss of a mixer will be measured with RF input frequencies over a 15 MHz span
352. when an event of interest occurs This communication is done via HP IB signals Analyzer SRQ events include e Limit test fails A front panel key or external keyboard key is pressed e Hardcopy in progress or complete e Sweep in progress or complete e Power has been cycled The analyzer can be set to cause an SRQ on any combination of the above events Using SRQs allows your program to be interrupt driven reducing the latency and inefficiency of polling For more details refer to Chapter 5 Using Status Registers in the Programmer s Guide Using Both of the Analyzer s Measurement Channels The analyzer is capable of making different measurements on each of its two measurement channels For example you can set measurement channel 1 to measure Transmission over one set of sweep frequencies while measurement channel 2 is set to to measure Reflection from another set of sweep frequencies Thus two measurements can be made by the operator at the same time Also the controller can switch between measurement channel and measurement channel 2 while turning the inactive channel off to quickly change the test setup between two test states 7 52 Automating Measurements Automated Measurement Setup and Control AUTOST files When IBASIC is used the measurement control program can be saved as an AUTOST file on the analyzer s non volatile RAM disk When the analyzer s power is turned on it will first check for this file on the non
353. y default setting externally or externally one frequency point at a time Trigger Softkey in trigger menu Displays menu for choice of internal or external P triggering Cal Softkey in the define save menu For use with a multiport test set on OFF Refer to the multiport test set User s and Service Guide for more information User BEGIN on OFF User ITL Utilities Softkey in service menu Displays a menu to store correction constants to disk or memory or load them from disk See the Service Guide for more information Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in IBASIC display menu Displays the IBASIC program on the upper half of the screen and measurement data on the lower half Access Keys svsrEM oeriows BAF O ption 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in menu See The User BEGIN Function in Chapter 3 for more information Softkey in the system config menu Allows you to choose how the USER TTL IN OUT rear panel connector will be utilized See Measurement Setup and Control with Fast Recall in Chapter 7 for more information Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in IBASIC menu Enables user to clear program set memory size or secure programs See the HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook for more information Access Keys SYSTEM options fBASIC 9 85 Velocity Back Porch Vertical Position Softkey in the more cal menu Enters the velocity factor used by th
354. y from the expected series impedance 3 64 Making Measurements Using a Fixture Devices such as discrete components generally do not have RF connectors To measure such devices a fixture must be used When using a fixture the calibration should be performed at the point where the device connects to the fixture in order to remove the response of the cables and fixture 3 65 Using Instrument Functions Using Instrument Functions This chapter explains some common analyzer functions that can help you to examine store and print measurement data The following functions are explained in this chapter Using Markers e Using Limit Testing Using Reference Tracking Customizing the Display Saving and Recalling Measurement Results Connecting and Configuring Printers and Plotters Printing and Plotting Measurement Results Using a Keyboard Using an External VGA Monitor 4 2 Using Markers The markers provide numerical readout of trace data Markers have a stimulus value the x axis value in a Cartesian format and a response value the y axis value in a Cartesian format In Smith chart format markers have a stimulus value a resistive value a reactive value and a complex impedance value In polar format markers have a stimulus value a magnitude value and a phase value When you switch on a marker and no other function is active the analyzer shows the marker stimulus value in the active entry area You
355. y to customize the colors of display items on your external monitor Values accepted for hue are 0 to 99 Zero represents red and the approximate color progression from there 15 orange yellow green cyan blue magenta and back to red See Using an External VGA Monitor in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys DISPLAY More Display Color 9 35 Softkey Reference H Hz Softkey in display frequency resolution menu Displays frequency to Hz resolution Access Keys Disp Resol 9 36 HARDKEY Softkey Reference Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey system options menu IBASIC menu functions include run continue step edit key record and clear See Chapter 7 Using Automation and the HP Instrument BASIC U ser s Handbook for more information IBASIC Option 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in IBASIC menu Displays a menu to i allow selection of how to display an BASIC program Display See the HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook for more information Access Keys _ system_options IBASIC Imag ina Softkey in more format menu Displays only the imaginary reactive portion of the measured data on a Cartesian format This format is similar to the red format except that reactance data is displayed on the trace instead of impedance data Access Keys FORMAT More Format Softkey in menu Displays impedance magnitude vs frequency on a Cartesian format See Measuring
356. your analyzer by specifying Option 1C2 IBASIC is a sub set of HP s BASIC UX It has roughly the same keywords as HP BASIC 4 0 With very little effort you can design your program so that it will run either inside the analyzer or on a computer with no modification The IBASIC program runs concurrently with normal instrument measurement processing Since IBASIC has direct access to the analyzer s measurement arrays it can read them and write to them very quickly eliminating the need to use SCPI commands Using IBASIC s keystroke recording you can write a large portion of your instrument control program by pressing the keys on the analyzer s front panel IBASIC can be used in a stand alone instrument or in conjunction with an external computer For more information on IBASIC refer to the HP Instrument BASIC U ser s H andbook 7 15 HP VEE Microsoft QuickBasic M C and C Automating Measurements Configuring Your Test System HP is a powerful application which lets you graphically create programs to control your instrument VEE automatically handles the programming details so you can focus on higher level tasks It also contains statistical functions which you can use to monitor your production process VEE runs on PCs and HP UX and Sun Workstations is used in conjunction with a VEE instrument driver The VEE instrument driver presents the user with a picture of the instrument s front panel on the computer displ
357. ystem_options Qpe Softkey in update correction constants menu Displays the help message that describes the actions of the other softkeys in the update correction constants menu Access Keys Softkey in more CRT adjustment menu CRT timing adjustment for use with external monitors Also affects network analyzer s internal CRT Default setting is 3 68 usec This setting is not affected by an instrument preset See Using an External VGA Monitor in aoa 4 for more information 9 33 HARDKEY H Softkey in more CRT adjustment menu CRT timing adjustment for use with external monitors Also affects network analyzer s internal CRT Default setting is 31 68 psec This setting is not affected by an instrument preset See Using an External VGA Monitor in Chapter 4 for more information Access Keys SYSTEM options System Config CRT Adjust More Softkey in the CRT adjustment menu Changes the horizontal positioning of the display on both the internal CRT and an external monitor Accepts whole number values from 1 to 100 with 1 representing as far left as possible and with 100 representing as far right as possible The default value set at the factory and obtained by pressing Rest is 73 This setting is not affected by an instrument preset See Using an External VGA Monitor in Chapter 4 for more information on using an external display Access Keys svsrEM OPTIONS Softkey in file
358. zer Cancels the editing mode and any changes that were made but not saved by pressing Enter Softkey in menu Sets the center frequency of the internal RF source and changes screen annotation to center and span as opposed to start and stop Softkey in directory utilities menu Used to change directories on an internal or external DOS storage device Directory See Ib Use Directory Utilities in Chapter 4 for more information programs from the front panel of the analyzer Clears the entire title name or Ey line if pressed O ption 1C2 IBASIC only Softkey in IBASIC utilities menu Clears erases the current IBASIC program from internal memory Program See the HP Instrument BASIC User s Handbook for more information Access Keys _ system_options IBASIC U 8 9 14 Softkey C Clock Softkey in set clock menu Determines how the date and time are displayed when they are turned on Format Date abbreviations YYYY stands for year MM stands for month DD stands for day Time abbreviations HH stands for hour 24 hour mode MM stands for minute In numeric format the month is displayed by number for example March is 03 In alpha format the first three letters of the month are displayed for example Mar information on viewing and setting the internal clock ig Sat Clock Access Keys svsreEM 8 Softkey in title and clock menu Suppresses display of
359. zer display These types of lines may be used individually or combined to represent the performance parameters for your device under test Also available are limit testing capabilities for five types of marker searches statistical mean peak to peak ripple flatness delta amplitude and delta frequency NOTE Limit testing is only performed on the measurement data trace It cannot be performed on a memory trace NOTE Limit line testing is not available when the analyzer is in Smith chart or polar format If limit lines are on and you change to Smith chart or polar format the analyzer will automatically turn off the limit line s 4 3 Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing The following examples are performed using a transmission measurement of the bandpass filter shipped with your instrument To follow along with these examples connect your filter to the analyzer and press c MHz 4 32 Using Instrument Functions Using limit Testing To Create a Flat Limit Line In this example you will create a minimum limit line from 155 MHz to 195 MHz at a level of 3 dB 2 12 To create new minimum limit line press Add 1 Add Min L Press Begin Frequency and enter MHZ Press End Frequency and enter MHz Press B Press End Limit and press Enter Notice that the analyzer has generated a limit line at about the center of the display To get a less distract

HP 8712C and HP 8714C RF Network Analyzers User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents